# The NeoMutt E-Mail Client

### Richard Russon

`<rich@flatcap.org>`

version 2024-03-29

Abstract

“Teaching an old dog new tricks”

List of Tables

1.1. Typographical conventions for special terms
2.1. sidebar_format
2.2. sidebar_format examples
2.3. Sidebar Color Priority
2.4. Most common navigation keys in entry-based menus
2.5. Most common navigation keys in page-based menus
2.6. Most common line editor keys
2.7. Most common message index keys
2.8. Message status flags
2.9. Message recipient flags
2.10. Most common pager keys
2.11. ANSI escape sequences
2.12. Color sequences
2.13. Most common thread mode keys
2.14. Special Thread Characters
2.15. Most common mail sending keys
2.16. Most common compose menu keys
2.17. PGP key menu flags
2.18. PGP key menu validity
3.1. NeoMutt config file search order
3.2. NeoMutt system config file locations
3.3. NeoMutt user config file locations
3.4. Config Priority
3.5. Symbolic key names
3.6. Fallback key bindings
3.7. Simple Colours
3.8. Simple Sidebar Colours
3.9. Simple Compose Colours
3.10. Quoted Email Colours
3.11. Colour Regex Lists
4.1. POSIX regular expression character classes
4.2. Regular expression repetition operators
4.3. GNU regular expression extensions
4.4. Pattern modifiers
4.5. Alias pattern modifiers
4.6. Relative Message Number Ranges
4.7. Message Number Shortcuts
4.8. Absolute Message Number Ranges
4.9. Simple search keywords
4.10. Date units
4.11. Relative date units
4.12. Gmail Example Patterns
4.13. Mailbox shortcuts
5.1. Supported MIME types
6.1. compose-to-sender Functions
6.2. Not all Hooks are Required
6.3. Potential Formatting Scheme
6.4. Date Formatting Codes
6.5. Example Date Tests
6.6. Example 1
6.7. Example 2
6.8. encrypt-self Variables
6.9. forgotten-attachment Variables
6.10. Header Cache Compression Variables
6.11. Header Cache Compression Methods and it's Levels
6.12. ifdef Symbols
6.13. Index Colors
6.14. Limit-Current-Thread Functions
6.15. New Mail Command Variables
6.16. NNTP Variables
6.17. NNTP Functions
6.18. Custom tags Variables
6.19. Notmuch/IMAP Functions
6.20. Index Colors
6.21. Notmuch Variables
6.22. Notmuch Functions
6.23. Progress Colors
6.24. Quasi-Delete Functions
6.25. Reply With X-Original-To Variables
6.26. Sidebar Variables
6.27. Sidebar Functions
6.28. Sidebar Colors
6.29. Sidebar Sort
6.30. Skip Quoted Functions
6.31. Skip-Quoted Variables
6.32. Status Colors
6.33. Trash Variables
6.34. Trash Functions
6.35. Use Threads
9.1. Command line options
9.2. Default Generic Menu Bindings
9.3. Default Index Menu Bindings
9.4. Default Pager Menu Bindings
9.5. Default Alias Menu Bindings
9.6. Default Query Menu Bindings
9.7. Default Attachment Menu Bindings
9.8. Default Compose Menu Bindings
9.9. Default Postpone Menu Bindings
9.10. Default Browser Menu Bindings
9.11. Default Pgp Menu Bindings
9.12. Default Smime Menu Bindings
9.13. Default Editor Menu Bindings

List of Examples

3.1. Multiple configuration commands per line
3.2. Commenting configuration files
3.3. Escaping quotes in configuration files
3.4. Splitting long configuration commands over several lines
3.5. Using external command's output in configuration files
3.6. Preventing the output of backticks from being parsed
3.7. Using environment variables in configuration files
3.8. Configuring external alias files
3.9. Setting sort method based on mailbox name
3.10. Header weeding
3.11. Configuring header display order
3.12. Defining custom headers
3.13. Using %-expandos in save-hook
3.14. Embedding push in folder-hook
3.15. Configuring spam detection
3.16. Using user-defined variables for config file readability
3.17. Using user-defined variables for backing up other config option values
3.18. Deferring user-defined variable expansion to runtime
3.19. Type conversions using variables
3.20. Using external filters in format strings
4.1. Matching a literal dot
4.2. Using `\s` and matching a literal dot in patterns
4.3. Matching all addresses in address lists
4.4. Matching restricted to aliases
4.5. Matching any defined alias
4.6. Using boolean operators in patterns
4.7. Specifying a “default” hook
4.8. Subject Munging
5.1. `mime.types`
5.2. Attachment counting
6.1. URLs
6.2. Managing multiple accounts
6.3. Example of `open-hook`
6.4. Example of `close-hook`
6.5. Example of `append-hook`

# Chapter 1. Introduction

NeoMutt is a small but very powerful text-based MIME mail client. NeoMutt is highly configurable, and is well suited to the mail power user with advanced features like key bindings, keyboard macros, mail threading, regular expression searches and a powerful pattern matching language for selecting groups of messages.

## 1. NeoMutt Home Page

The homepage can be found at https://neomutt.org.

## 2. Mailing Lists

- `<neomutt-users@neomutt.org>` – help, bug reports and feature requests. To subscribe to this list, please send a mail to `<neomutt-users-request@neomutt.org>` with the subject "subscribe".

- `<neomutt-devel@neomutt.org>` – development mailing list. To subscribe to this list, please send a mail to `<neomutt-devel-request@neomutt.org>` with the subject "subscribe".

## 3. NeoMutt Online Resources

Issue Tracking System

  Bugs may be reported on the devel mailing list, or on GitHub: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/issues

IRC

  For the IRC user community, visit channel #neomutt on irc.libera.chat.

## 4. Contributing to NeoMutt

There are various ways to contribute to the NeoMutt project.

Especially for new users it may be helpful to meet other new and experienced users to chat about NeoMutt, talk about problems and share tricks.

Since translations of NeoMutt into other languages are highly appreciated, the NeoMutt developers always look for skilled translators that help improve and continue to maintain stale translations.

For contributing code patches for new features and bug fixes, please refer to the developer pages at https://neomutt.org/dev.html for more details.

## 5. Typographical Conventions

This section lists typographical conventions followed throughout this manual. See table Table 1.1, “Typographical conventions for special terms” for typographical conventions for special terms.

Table 1.1. Typographical conventions for special terms

Item | Refers to...
--- | ---
`printf(3)` | UNIX manual pages, execute `man 3 printf`
`<PageUp>` | named keys
`<create-alias>` | named NeoMutt function
`^G` | Control+G key combination
$mail_check | NeoMutt configuration option
`$HOME` | environment variable

Examples are presented as:

    neomutt -v

Within command synopsis, curly brackets (“{}”) denote a set of options of which one is mandatory, square brackets (“[]”) denote optional arguments, three dots denote that the argument may be repeated arbitrary times.

## 6. Copyright

NeoMutt is Copyright © 2015-2024 Richard Russon `<rich@flatcap.org>` and friends.

This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.

This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details.

You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 51 Franklin Street, Fifth Floor, Boston, MA 02110-1301, USA.

# Chapter 2. Getting Started

This section is intended as a brief overview of how to use NeoMutt. There are many other features which are described elsewhere in the manual. There is even more information available in the NeoMutt FAQ and various web pages. See the NeoMutt homepage for more details.

The keybindings described in this section are the defaults as distributed. Your local system administrator may have altered the defaults for your site. You can always type “?” in any menu to display the current bindings.

The first thing you need to do is invoke NeoMutt, simply by typing `neomutt` at the command line. There are various command-line options, see either the NeoMutt man page or the reference.

## 1. Core Concepts

NeoMutt is a text-based application which interacts with users through different menus which are mostly line-/entry-based or page-based. A line-based menu is the so-called “index” menu (listing all messages of the currently opened folder) or the “alias” menu (allowing you to select recipients from a list). Examples for page-based menus are the “pager” (showing one message at a time) or the “help” menu listing all available key bindings.

The user interface consists of a context sensitive help line at the top, the menu's contents followed by a context sensitive status line and finally the command line. The command line is used to display informational and error messages as well as for prompts and for entering interactive commands.

NeoMutt is configured through variables which, if the user wants to permanently use a non-default value, are written to configuration files. NeoMutt supports a rich config file syntax to make even complex configuration files readable and commentable.

Because NeoMutt allows for customizing almost all key bindings, there are so-called “functions” which can be executed manually (using the command line) or in macros. Macros allow the user to bind a sequence of commands to a single key or a short key sequence instead of repeating a sequence of actions over and over.

Many commands (such as saving or copying a message to another folder) can be applied to a single message or a set of messages (so-called “tagged” messages). To help selecting messages, NeoMutt provides a rich set of message patterns (such as recipients, sender, body contents, date sent/received, etc.) which can be combined into complex expressions using the boolean and and or operations as well as negating. These patterns can also be used to (for example) search for messages or to limit the index to show only matching messages.

NeoMutt supports a “hook” concept which allows the user to execute arbitrary configuration commands and functions in certain situations such as entering a folder, starting a new message or replying to an existing one. These hooks can be used to highly customize NeoMutt's behavior including managing multiple identities, customizing the display for a folder or even implementing auto-archiving based on a per-folder basis and much more.

Besides an interactive mode, NeoMutt can also be used as a command-line tool to send messages. See Table 9.1, “Command line options” for a complete list of command-line options.

## 2. Screens and Menus

### 2.1. Index

The index is the screen that you usually see first when you start NeoMutt. It gives an overview over your emails in the currently opened mailbox. By default, this is your system mailbox. The information you see in the index is a list of emails, each with its number on the left, its flags (new email, important email, email that has been forwarded or replied to, tagged email, ...), the date when email was sent, its sender, the email size, and the subject. Additionally, the index also shows thread hierarchies: when you reply to an email, and the other person replies back, you can see the other person's email in a "sub-tree" below. This is especially useful for personal email between a group of people or when you've subscribed to mailing lists.

### 2.2. Pager

The pager is responsible for showing the email content. On the top of the pager you have an overview over the most important email headers like the sender, the recipient, the subject, and much more information. How much information you actually see depends on your configuration, which we'll describe below.

Below the headers, you see the email body which usually contains the message. If the email contains any attachments, you will see more information about them below the email body, or, if the attachments are text files, you can view them directly in the pager.

To give the user a good overview, it is possible to configure NeoMutt to show different things in the pager with different colors. Virtually everything that can be described with a regular expression can be colored, e.g. URLs, email addresses or smileys.

### 2.3. File Browser

The file browser is the interface to the local or remote file system. When selecting a mailbox to open, the browser allows custom sorting of items, limiting the items shown by a regular expression and a freely adjustable format of what to display in which way. It also allows for easy navigation through the file system when selecting file(s) to attach to a message, select multiple files to attach and many more.

Some mail systems can nest mail folders inside other mail folders. The normal open entry commands in NeoMutt will open the mail folder and you can't see the sub-folders. If you instead use the `<descend-directory>` function it will go into the directory and not open it as a mail directory.

### 2.4. Sidebar

The Sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes. The list can be turned on and off, it can be themed and the list style can be configured.

This part of the manual is suitable for beginners. If you already know NeoMutt you could skip ahead to the main Sidebar guide. If you just want to get started, you could use the sample Sidebar neomuttrc.

To check if NeoMutt supports “Sidebar”, look for the string `+sidebar` in the neomutt version.

    neomutt -v

Let's turn on the Sidebar:

    set sidebar_visible
    set sidebar_format = "%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S"
    set mail_check_stats

You will see something like this. A list of mailboxes on the left. A list of emails, from the selected mailbox, on the right.

    Fruit [1]     3/8|  1    + Jan 24  Rhys Lee         (192)  Yew
    Animals [1]   2/6|  2    + Feb 11  Grace Hall       (167)  Ilama
    Cars            4|  3      Feb 23  Aimee Scott      (450)  Nectarine
    Seas          1/7|  4    ! Feb 28  Summer Jackson   (264)  Lemon
                     |  5      Mar 07  Callum Harrison  (464)  Raspberry
                     |  6 N  + Mar 24  Samuel Harris    (353)  Tangerine
                     |  7 N  + Sep 05  Sofia Graham     (335)  Cherry
                     |  8 N    Sep 16  Ewan Brown       (105)  Ugli
                     |
                     |

This user has four mailboxes: “Fruit”, “Cars”, “Animals” and “Seas”.

The current, open, mailbox is “Fruit”. We can also see information about the other mailboxes. For example: The “Animals” mailbox contains, 1 flagged email, 2 new emails out of a total of 6 emails.

#### 2.4.1. Navigation

The Sidebar adds some new functions to NeoMutt.

The user pressed the “c” key to `<change-folder>` to the “Animals” mailbox. The Sidebar automatically updated the indicator to match.

    Fruit [1]     3/8|  1      Jan 03  Tia Gibson       (362)  Caiman
    Animals [1]   2/6|  2    + Jan 22  Rhys Lee         ( 48)  Dolphin
    Cars            4|  3    ! Aug 16  Ewan Brown       (333)  Hummingbird
    Seas          1/7|  4      Sep 25  Grace Hall       ( 27)  Capybara
                     |  5 N  + Nov 12  Evelyn Rogers    (453)  Tapir
                     |  6 N  + Nov 16  Callum Harrison  (498)  Hedgehog
                     |
                     |
                     |
                     |

Let's map some functions:

    bind index,pager \CP sidebar-prev       # Ctrl-P – Previous Mailbox
    bind index,pager \CN sidebar-next       # Ctrl-N – Next Mailbox
    bind index,pager \CO sidebar-open       # Ctrl-O – Open Highlighted Mailbox

Pressing “Ctrl-N” (Next mailbox) twice will move the Sidebar highlight to down to the “Seas” mailbox.

    Fruit [1]     3/8|  1      Jan 03  Tia Gibson       (362)  Caiman
    Animals [1]   2/6|  2    + Jan 22  Rhys Lee         ( 48)  Dolphin
    Cars            4|  3    ! Aug 16  Ewan Brown       (333)  Hummingbird
    Seas          1/7|  4      Sep 25  Grace Hall       ( 27)  Capybara
                     |  5 N  + Nov 12  Evelyn Rogers    (453)  Tapir
                     |  6 N  + Nov 16  Callum Harrison  (498)  Hedgehog
                     |
                     |
                     |
                     |

### Note

Functions `<sidebar-next>` and `<sidebar-prev>` move the Sidebar highlight. They do not change the open mailbox.

Press “Ctrl-O” (`<sidebar-open>`) to open the highlighted mailbox.

    Fruit [1]     3/8|  1    ! Mar 07  Finley Jones     (139)  Molucca Sea
    Animals [1]   2/6|  2    + Mar 24  Summer Jackson   ( 25)  Arafura Sea
    Cars            4|  3    + Feb 28  Imogen Baker     (193)  Pechora Sea
    Seas          1/7|  4 N  + Feb 23  Isla Hussain     (348)  Balearic Sea
                     |
                     |
                     |
                     |
                     |
                     |

#### 2.4.2. Features

The Sidebar shows a list of mailboxes in a panel.

Everything about the Sidebar can be configured.

State of the Sidebar

- Visibility

- Width

Which mailboxes are displayed

- Display all

- Limit to mailboxes with new mail

- Pin mailboxes to display always

The order in which mailboxes are displayed

- Unsorted (order of mailboxes commands)

- Sorted alphabetically

- Sorted by number of new mails

Color

- Sidebar indicators and divider

- Mailboxes depending on their type

- Mailboxes depending on their contents

Key bindings

- Hide/Unhide the Sidebar

- Select previous/next mailbox

- Select previous/next mailbox with new mail

- Page up/down through a list of mailboxes

Misc

- Formatting string for mailbox

- Wraparound searching

- Flexible mailbox abbreviations

- Support for Unicode mailbox names (UTF-8)

#### 2.4.3. Display

Everything about the Sidebar can be configured.

For a quick reference:

- Sidebar variables to set

- Sidebar colors to apply

- Sidebar sort methods

##### 2.4.3.1. Sidebar Basics

The most important variable is `$sidebar_visible`. You can set this in your “neomuttrc”, or bind a key to the function `<sidebar-toggle-visible>`.

    set sidebar_visible                         # Make the Sidebar visible by default
    bind index,pager B sidebar-toggle-visible   # Use 'B' to switch the Sidebar on and off

Next, decide how wide you want the Sidebar to be. 25 characters might be enough for the mailbox name and some numbers. Remember, you can hide/show the Sidebar at the press of button.

Finally, you might want to change the divider character. By default, Sidebar draws an ASCII line between it and the Index panel. If your terminal supports it, you can use a Unicode line-drawing character.

    set sidebar_width = 25                  # Plenty of space
    set sidebar_divider_char = '│'          # Pretty line-drawing character

##### 2.4.3.2. Sidebar Format String

`$sidebar_format` allows you to customize the Sidebar display. For an introduction, read format strings including the section about conditionals.

The default value is: `%D%* %n`

A more detailed value is: `%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S`

Which breaks down as:

- `%B` – Mailbox name

- `%<F? [%F]>` – If flagged emails `[%F]`, otherwise nothing

- `%*` – Pad with spaces

- `%<N?%N/>` – If new emails `%N/`, otherwise nothing

- `%S` – Total number of emails

Table 2.1. sidebar_format

Format | Notes | Description
--- | --- | ---
%B |  | Name of the mailbox
%d | * ‡ | Number of deleted messages
%D |  | Descriptive name of the mailbox
%F | * † | Number of flagged messages in the mailbox
%L | * ‡ | Number of messages after limiting
%n | * | If there's new mail, display “N”, otherwise “ ” (space).
%N | * † | Number of unread messages in the mailbox (seen or unseen)
%o | * † | Number of old messages in the mailbox (unread, but seen)
%r | * † | Number of read messages in the mailbox
%S | * † | Size of mailbox (total number of messages)
%t | * ‡ | Number of tagged messages in the mailbox
%Z | * † | Number of new messages in the mailbox (unread, unseen)
%! |  | “!”: one flagged message; “!!”: two flagged messages; “n!”: n flagged messages (for n > 2). Otherwise prints nothing.
%>X |  | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with “X”
%|X |  | Pad to the end of the line with “X”
%*X |  | Soft-fill with character “X” as pad

* = Can be optionally printed if nonzero

† = To use these expandos, you must first:

    set mail_check_stats

‡ = Only applicable to the current folder

Here are some examples. They show the number of (F)lagged, (N)ew and (S)ize.

Table 2.2. sidebar_format examples

Format | Example
--- | ---
`%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S` |
    mailbox [F]            N/S
`%B%* %F:%N:%S` |
    mailbox              F:N:S
`%B %<N?(%N)>%* %S` |
    mailbox (N)              S
`%B%* %<F?%F/>%N` |
    mailbox                F/S

##### 2.4.3.3. Abbreviating Mailbox Names

`$sidebar_delim_chars` tells Sidebar how to split up mailbox paths. For local directories use “/”; for IMAP folders use “.”

###### 2.4.3.3.1. Example 1

This example works well if your mailboxes have unique names after the last separator.

Add some mailboxes of different depths.

    set folder="~/mail"
    mailboxes =fruit/apple          =fruit/banana          =fruit/cherry
    mailboxes =water/sea/sicily     =water/sea/archipelago =water/sea/sibuyan
    mailboxes =water/ocean/atlantic =water/ocean/pacific   =water/ocean/arctic

Shorten the names:

    set sidebar_short_path                  # Shorten mailbox names (truncate all subdirs)
    set sidebar_component_depth=1           # Shorten mailbox names (truncate 1 subdirs)
    set sidebar_delim_chars="/"             # Delete everything up to the last or Nth / character

The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like before and after shortening using `sidebar_short_path`.

    |fruit/apple                            |apple
    |fruit/banana                           |banana
    |fruit/cherry                           |cherry
    |water/sea/sicily                       |sicily
    |water/sea/archipelago                  |archipelago
    |water/sea/sibuyan                      |sibuyan
    |water/ocean/atlantic                   |atlantic
    |water/ocean/pacific                    |pacific
    |water/ocean/arctic                     |arctic

The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like before and after shortening using `sidebar_component_depth=1`.

    |fruit/apple                            |apple
    |fruit/banana                           |banana
    |fruit/cherry                           |cherry
    |water/sea/sicily                       |sea/sicily
    |water/sea/archipelago                  |sea/archipelago
    |water/sea/sibuyan                      |sea/sibuyan
    |water/ocean/atlantic                   |ocean/atlantic
    |water/ocean/pacific                    |ocean/pacific
    |water/ocean/arctic                     |ocean/arctic

###### 2.4.3.3.2. Example 2

This example works well if you have lots of mailboxes which are arranged in a tree.

Add some mailboxes of different depths.

    set folder="~/mail"
    mailboxes =fruit
    mailboxes =fruit/apple =fruit/banana =fruit/cherry
    mailboxes =water
    mailboxes =water/sea
    mailboxes =water/sea/sicily =water/sea/archipelago =water/sea/sibuyan
    mailboxes =water/ocean
    mailboxes =water/ocean/atlantic =water/ocean/pacific =water/ocean/arctic

Shorten the names:

    set sidebar_short_path                  # Shorten mailbox names
    set sidebar_delim_chars="/"             # Delete everything up to the last / character
    set sidebar_folder_indent               # Indent folders whose names we've shortened
    set sidebar_indent_string="  "          # Indent with two spaces

The screenshot below shows what the Sidebar would look like before and after shortening.

    |fruit                                  |fruit
    |fruit/apple                            |  apple
    |fruit/banana                           |  banana
    |fruit/cherry                           |  cherry
    |water                                  |water
    |water/sea                              |  sea
    |water/sea/sicily                       |    sicily
    |water/sea/archipelago                  |    archipelago
    |water/sea/sibuyan                      |    sibuyan
    |water/ocean                            |  ocean
    |water/ocean/atlantic                   |    atlantic
    |water/ocean/pacific                    |    pacific
    |water/ocean/arctic                     |    arctic

Sometimes, it will be necessary to add mailboxes, that you don't use, to fill in part of the tree. This will trade vertical space for horizontal space (but it looks good).

##### 2.4.3.4. Limiting the Number of Mailboxes

If you have a lot of mailboxes, sometimes it can be useful to hide the ones you aren't using. `$sidebar_new_mail_only` tells Sidebar to only show mailboxes that contain new, or flagged, email.

Sometimes it is useful to only show mailboxes that have mails in them, while hiding the rest. `$sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only` tells the Sidebar to only show mailboxes with a non-zero number of mails.

If you want some mailboxes to be always visible, then use the `sidebar_pin` command. It takes a list of mailboxes as parameters.

    set sidebar_new_mail_only         # Only mailboxes with new/flagged email
    sidebar_pin +fruit +fruit/apple   # Always display these two mailboxes

#### 2.4.4. Colors

Here is a sample color scheme:

    color sidebar_background default black       # Black background
    color sidebar_indicator  default color17     # Dark blue background
    color sidebar_highlight  white   color238    # Grey background
    color sidebar_spool_file yellow  default     # Yellow
    color sidebar_unread     cyan    default     # Light blue
    color sidebar_new        green   default     # Green
    color sidebar_ordinary   default default     # Default colors
    color sidebar_flagged    red     default     # Red
    color sidebar_divider    color8  default     # Dark grey

There is a priority order when coloring Sidebar mailboxes. e.g. If a mailbox has new mail it will have the `sidebar_new` color, even if it also contains flagged mails.

Table 2.3. Sidebar Color Priority

Priority | Color | Description
--- | --- | ---
Highest | `sidebar_indicator` | Mailbox is open
| `sidebar_highlight` | Mailbox is highlighted
| `sidebar_new` | Mailbox contains new mail
| `sidebar_unread` | Mailbox contains unread mail
| `sidebar_flagged` | Mailbox contains flagged mail
| `sidebar_spool_file` | Mailbox is the spool_file (receives incoming mail)
Lowest | `sidebar_ordinary` | Mailbox does not match above

### 2.5. Help

The help screen is meant to offer a quick help to the user. It lists the current configuration of key bindings and their associated commands including a short description, and currently unbound functions that still need to be associated with a key binding (or alternatively, they can be called via the NeoMutt command prompt).

### 2.6. Compose Menu

The compose menu features a split screen containing the information which really matters before actually sending a message by mail: who gets the message as what (recipients and who gets what kind of copy). Additionally, users may set security options like deciding whether to sign, encrypt or sign and encrypt a message with/for what keys. Also, it's used to attach messages, to re-edit any attachment including the message itself.

### 2.7. Alias Menu

The alias menu is used to help users finding the recipients of messages. For users who need to contact many people, there's no need to remember addresses or names completely because it allows for searching, too. The alias mechanism and thus the alias menu also features grouping several addresses by a shorter nickname, the actual alias, so that users don't have to select each single recipient manually. The alias menu is also used to display the result of external address queries.

### 2.8. Attachment Menu

As will be later discussed in detail, NeoMutt features a good and stable MIME implementation, that is, it supports sending and receiving messages of arbitrary MIME types. The attachment menu displays a message's structure in detail: what content parts are attached to which parent part (which gives a true tree structure), which part is of what type and what size. Single parts may saved, deleted or modified to offer great and easy access to message's internals.

## 3. Moving Around in Menus

The most important navigation keys common to line- or entry-based menus are shown in Table 2.4, “Most common navigation keys in entry-based menus” and in Table 2.5, “Most common navigation keys in page-based menus” for page-based menus.

Table 2.4. Most common navigation keys in entry-based menus

Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
j or <Down> | `<next-entry>` | move to the next entry
k or <Up> | `<previous-entry>` | move to the previous entry
z or <PageDn> | `<page-down>` | go to the next page
Z or <PageUp> | `<page-up>` | go to the previous page
= or <Home> | `<first-entry>` | jump to the first entry
* or <End> | `<last-entry>` | jump to the last entry
q | `<quit>` | exit the current menu
? | `<help>` | list all keybindings for the current menu

Table 2.5. Most common navigation keys in page-based menus

Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
J or <Return> | `<next-line>` | scroll down one line
<Backspace> | `<previous-line>` | scroll up one line
K, <Space> or <PageDn> | `<next-page>` | move to the next page
- or <PageUp> | `<previous-page>` | move the previous page
<Home> | `<top>` | move to the top
<End> | `<bottom>` | move to the bottom

## 4. Editing Input Fields

### 4.1. Introduction

NeoMutt has a built-in line editor for inputting text, e.g. email addresses or filenames. The keys used to manipulate text input are very similar to those of Emacs. See Table 2.6, “Most common line editor keys” for a full reference of available functions, their default key bindings, and short descriptions.

Table 2.6. Most common line editor keys

Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
^A or <Home> | `<bol>` | move to the start of the line
^B or <Left> | `<backward-char>` | move back one char
Esc B | `<backward-word>` | move back one word
^D or <Delete> | `<delete-char>` | delete the char under the cursor
^E or <End> | `<eol>` | move to the end of the line
^F or <Right> | `<forward-char>` | move forward one char
Esc F | `<forward-word>` | move forward one word
<Tab> | `<complete>` | complete filename, alias, or label
^T | `<complete-query>` | complete address with query
^K | `<kill-eol>` | delete to the end of the line
Esc d | `<kill-eow>` | delete to the end of the word
^W | `<kill-word>` | kill the word in front of the cursor
^U | `<kill-line>` | delete entire line
^V | `<quote-char>` | quote the next typed key
<Up> | `<history-up>` | recall previous string from history
<Down> | `<history-down>` | recall next string from history
^R | `<history-search>` | use current input to search history
<BackSpace> | `<backspace>` | kill the char in front of the cursor
Esc u | `<upcase-word>` | convert word to upper case
Esc l | `<downcase-word>` | convert word to lower case
Esc c | `<capitalize-word>` | capitalize the word
^G | n/a | abort
<Return> | n/a | finish editing

`^G` is the generic “abort” key in NeoMutt. In addition to the line editor, it can also be used to abort prompts. Generally, typing `^G` at a confirmation prompt or line editor should abort the entire action.

You can remap the editor functions using the bind command. For example, to make the <Delete> key delete the character in front of the cursor rather than under, you could use:

    bind editor <delete> backspace

### 4.2. History

NeoMutt maintains a history for the built-in editor. The number of items is controlled by the $history variable and can be made persistent using an external file specified using $history_file and $save_history. You may cycle through them at an editor prompt by using the `<history-up>` and/or `<history-down>` commands. NeoMutt will remember the currently entered text as you cycle through history, and will wrap around to the initial entry line.

NeoMutt maintains several distinct history lists, one for each of the following categories:

- `.neomuttrc` commands

- addresses and aliases

- shell commands

- filenames

- patterns

- everything else

NeoMutt automatically filters out consecutively repeated items from the history. If $history_remove_dups is set, all repeated items are removed from the history. It also mimics the behavior of some shells by ignoring items starting with a space. The latter feature can be useful in macros to not clobber the history's valuable entries with unwanted entries.

## 5. Reading Mail

Similar to many other mail clients, there are two modes in which mail is read in NeoMutt. The first is a list of messages in the mailbox, which is called the “index” menu in NeoMutt. The second mode is the display of the message contents. This is called the “pager.”

The next few sections describe the functions provided in each of these modes.

### 5.1. The Message Index

Common keys used to navigate through and manage messages in the index are shown in Table 2.7, “Most common message index keys”. How messages are presented in the index menu can be customized using the $index_format variable.

Table 2.7. Most common message index keys

Key | Description
--- | ---
c | change to a different mailbox
Esc c | change to a folder in read-only mode
C | copy the current message to another mailbox
Esc C | decode a message and copy it to a folder
Esc s | decode a message and save it to a folder
D | delete messages matching a pattern
d | delete the current message
F | mark as important
l | show messages matching a pattern
N | mark message as new
o | change the current sort method
O | reverse sort the mailbox
q | save changes and exit
s | save-message
T | tag messages matching a pattern
t | toggle the tag on a message
Esc t | toggle tag on entire message thread
U | undelete messages matching a pattern
u | undelete-message
v | view-attachments
x | abort changes and exit
<Return> | display-message
<Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message
@ | show the author's full e-mail address
$ | save changes to mailbox
/ | search
Esc / | search-reverse
^L | clear and redraw the screen
^T | untag messages matching a pattern

In addition to who sent the message and the subject, a short summary of the disposition of each message is printed beside the message number. Zero or more of the “flags” in Table 2.8, “Message status flags” may appear, some of which can be turned on or off using these functions: `<set-flag>` and `<clear-flag>` bound by default to “w” and “W” respectively.

Furthermore, the flags in Table 2.9, “Message recipient flags” reflect who the message is addressed to. They can be customized with the $to_chars variable.

Table 2.8. Message status flags

Flag | Description
--- | ---
D | message is deleted (is marked for deletion)
d | message has attachments marked for deletion
K | contains a PGP public key
N | message is new
O | message is old
P | message is PGP encrypted
r | message has been replied to
S | message is signed, and the signature is successfully verified
s | message is signed
! | message is flagged
* | message is tagged
n | thread contains new messages (only if collapsed)
o | thread contains old messages (only if collapsed)

Table 2.9. Message recipient flags

Flag | Description
--- | ---
+ | message is to you and you only
T | message is to you, but also to or CC'ed to others
C | message is CC'ed to you
F | message is from you
L | message is sent to a subscribed mailing list
R | message has your address in the Reply-To field

### 5.2. The Pager

By default, NeoMutt uses its built-in pager to display the contents of messages (an external pager such as `less(1)` can be configured, see $pager variable). The pager is very similar to the Unix program `less(1)` though not nearly as featureful.

Table 2.10. Most common pager keys

Key | Description
--- | ---
<Return> | go down one line
<Space> | display the next page (or next message if at the end of a message)
- | go back to the previous page
n | search for next match
S | skip beyond quoted text
T | toggle display of quoted text
? | show keybindings
/ | regular expression search
Esc / | backward regular expression search
\ | toggle highlighting of search matches
^ | jump to the top of the message

In addition to key bindings in Table 2.10, “Most common pager keys”, many of the functions from the index menu are also available in the pager, such as `<delete-message>` or `<copy-message>` (this is one advantage over using an external pager to view messages).

Also, the internal pager supports a couple other advanced features. For one, you can set $pager_read_delay to operate in a preview mode, where new messages are not marked read unless you remain on the message for a certain length of time. Additionally, it will accept and translate the “standard” nroff sequences for bold and underline. These sequences are a series of either the letter, backspace (“^H”), the letter again for bold or the letter, backspace, “_” for denoting underline. NeoMutt will attempt to display these in bold and underline respectively if your terminal supports them. If not, you can use the bold and underline color objects to specify a color or mono attribute for them.

Additionally, the internal pager supports the ANSI escape sequences for character attributes. NeoMutt translates them into the correct color and character settings. The sequences NeoMutt supports are:

    \e[ Ps; Ps; ...  Ps;m

where Ps can be one of the codes shown in Table 2.11, “ANSI escape sequences”.

Table 2.11. ANSI escape sequences

Escape code | Description
--- | ---
0 | All attributes off
1 | Bold on
3 | Italics on
4 | Underline on
5 | Blink on
7 | Reverse video on
3 <color> | Foreground color is <color> (see Table 2.12, “Color sequences”)
4 <color> | Background color is <color> (see Table 2.12, “Color sequences”)

Table 2.12. Color sequences

Color code | Color
--- | ---
0 | Black
1 | Red
2 | Green
3 | Yellow
4 | Blue
5 | Magenta
6 | Cyan
7 | White

NeoMutt uses these attributes for handling `text/enriched` messages, and they can also be used by an external autoview script for highlighting purposes.

### Note

If you change the colors for your display, for example by changing the color associated with color2 for your xterm, then that color will be used instead of green.

### Note

Note that the search commands in the pager take regular expressions, which are not quite the same as the more complex patterns used by the search command in the index. This is because patterns are used to select messages by criteria whereas the pager already displays a selected message.

### 5.3. Threaded Mode

So-called “threads” provide a hierarchy of messages where replies are linked to their parent message(s). This organizational form is extremely useful in mailing lists where different parts of the discussion diverge. NeoMutt displays threads as a tree structure.

In NeoMutt, when a mailbox is sorted by threads, there are a few additional functions available in the index and pager modes as shown in Table 2.13, “Most common thread mode keys”.

Table 2.13. Most common thread mode keys

Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
^D | `<delete-thread>` | delete all messages in the current thread
^U | `<undelete-thread>` | undelete all messages in the current thread
^N | `<next-thread>` | jump to the start of the next thread
^P | `<previous-thread>` | jump to the start of the previous thread
^R | `<read-thread>` | mark the current thread as read
Esc d | `<delete-subthread>` | delete all messages in the current subthread
Esc u | `<undelete-subthread>` | undelete all messages in the current subthread
Esc n | `<next-subthread>` | jump to the start of the next subthread
Esc p | `<previous-subthread>` | jump to the start of the previous subthread
Esc r | `<read-subthread>` | mark the current subthread as read
Esc t | `<tag-thread>` | toggle the tag on the current thread
Esc v | `<collapse-thread>` | toggle collapse for the current thread
Esc V | `<collapse-all>` | toggle collapse for all threads
P | `<parent-message>` | jump to parent message in thread

In the index, the subject of threaded children messages will be prepended with thread tree characters. By default, the subject itself will not be duplicated unless $hide_thread_subject is unset. Special characters will be added to the thread tree as detailed in Table 2.14, “Special Thread Characters”.

Table 2.14. Special Thread Characters

Character | Description | Notes
--- | --- | ---
& | hidden message | see $hide_limited and $hide_top_limited
? | missing message | see $hide_missing and $hide_top_missing
* | pseudo thread | see $strict_threads; not displayed when $narrow_tree is set
= | duplicate thread | see $duplicate_threads; not displayed when $narrow_tree is set

Collapsing a thread displays only the first message in the thread and hides the others. This is useful when threads contain so many messages that you can only see a handful of threads on the screen. See %M in $index_format. For example, you could use `%<M?(#%03M)&(%4l)>` in $index_format to optionally display the number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed. The `%<char?if-part&else-part>` syntax is explained in detail in format string conditionals.

Technically, every reply should contain a list of its parent messages in the thread tree, but not all do. In these cases, NeoMutt groups them by subject which can be controlled using the $strict_threads variable.

### 5.4. Miscellaneous Functions

In addition, the index and pager menus have these interesting functions:

`<check-stats>`

  Calculate statistics for all monitored mailboxes declared using the mailboxes command. It will calculate statistics despite $mail_check_stats being unset.

`<create-alias>` (default: a)

  Creates a new alias based upon the current message (or prompts for a new one). Once editing is complete, an alias command is added to the file specified by the $alias_file variable for future use

  ### Note

  NeoMutt does not read the $alias_file upon startup so you must explicitly source the file.

`<check-traditional-pgp>` (default: Esc P)

  This function will search the current message for content signed or encrypted with PGP the “traditional” way, that is, without proper MIME tagging. Technically, this function will temporarily change the MIME content types of the body parts containing PGP data; this is similar to the `<edit-type>` function's effect.

`<edit-raw-message>`

  This command (available in the index and pager) allows you to edit the raw current message as it's present in the mail folder. After you have finished editing, the changed message will be appended to the current folder, and the original message will be marked for deletion; if the message is unchanged it won't be replaced.

  `<edit>` is a synonym of this for backwards compatibility.

  See also `<edit-or-view-raw-message>`, `<view-raw-message>`.

`<edit>`

  Alias of `<edit-raw-message>` for backwards compatibility.

`<edit-or-view-raw-message>` (default: e)

  This command (available in the index and pager) is the same as `<edit-raw-message>` if the mailbox is writable, otherwise it the same as `<view-raw-message>`.

`<edit-type>` (default: ^E on the attachment menu, and in the pager and index menus; ^T on the compose menu)

  This command is used to temporarily edit an attachment's content type to fix, for instance, bogus character set parameters. When invoked from the index or from the pager, you'll have the opportunity to edit the top-level attachment's content type. On the attachment menu, you can change any attachment's content type. These changes are not persistent, and get lost upon changing folders.

  Note that this command is also available on the compose menu. There, it's used to fine-tune the properties of attachments you are going to send.

`<enter-command>` (default: “:”)

  This command is used to execute any command you would normally put in a configuration file. A common use is to check the settings of variables, or in conjunction with macros to change settings on the fly.

`<extract-keys>` (default: ^K)

  This command extracts PGP public keys from the current or tagged message(s) and adds them to your PGP public key ring.

`<forget-passphrase>` (default: ^F)

  This command wipes the passphrase(s) from memory. It is useful, if you misspelled the passphrase.

`<list-reply>` (default: L)

  Reply to the current or tagged message(s) by extracting any addresses which match the regular expressions given by the lists or subscribe commands, but also honor any `Mail-Followup-To` header(s) if the $honor_followup_to configuration variable is set. In addition, the `List-Post` header field is examined for `mailto:` URLs specifying a mailing list address. Using this when replying to messages posted to mailing lists helps avoid duplicate copies being sent to the author of the message you are replying to.

`<list-subscribe>`

  Send an email to the address specified in the List-Subscribe header as specified in RFC2369.

`<list-unsubscribe>`

  Send an email to the address specified in the List-Unsubscribe header as specified in RFC2369.

`<pipe-message>` (default: |)

  Asks for an external Unix command and pipes the current or tagged message(s) to it. The variables $pipe_decode, $pipe_decode_weed, $pipe_split, $pipe_sep and $wait_key control the exact behavior of this function.

`<resend-message>` (default: Esc e)

  NeoMutt takes the current message as a template for a new message. This function is best described as "recall from arbitrary folders". It can conveniently be used to forward MIME messages while preserving the original mail structure. Note that the amount of headers included here depends on the value of the $weed variable.

  This function is also available from the attachment menu. You can use this to easily resend a message which was included with a bounce message as a `message/rfc822` body part.

`<shell-escape>` (default: !)

  Asks for an external Unix command and executes it. The $wait_key can be used to control whether NeoMutt will wait for a key to be pressed when the command returns (presumably to let the user read the output of the command), based on the return status of the named command. If no command is given, an interactive shell is executed.

`<skip-headers>` (default: H)

  This function will skip to the first line of the body, past the headers of the current message, regardless of current position.

`<view-raw-message>`

  This command (available in the index and pager) opens the raw message read-only in an editor. This command does not allow editing the message, use `<edit-raw-message>` for this.

  See also `<edit-raw-message>`, `<edit-or-view-raw-message>`.

`<skip-quoted>` (default: S)

  This function will make the internal pager go forward to the next segment of non-quoted body text (whether the first line of the body after headers, or following a line of quoted text), or print a message if no further unquoted text can be found.

  The variable $pager_skip_quoted_context can be used to show some quoted context prior to the selected line.

`<toggle-quoted>` (default: T)

  The pager uses the $quote_regex variable to detect quoted text when displaying the body of the message. This function toggles the display of the quoted material in the message. It is particularly useful when being interested in just the response and there is a large amount of quoted text in the way.

  The variable $toggle_quoted_show_levels can be used to show some context by continuing to show that number of levels rather than hiding all quoted levels.

## 6. Sending Mail

### 6.1. Introduction

The bindings shown in Table 2.15, “Most common mail sending keys” are available in the index and pager to start a new message.

Table 2.15. Most common mail sending keys

Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
m | `<mail>` | compose a new message
r | `<reply>` | reply to sender
g | `<group-reply>` | reply to all recipients
| `<group-chat-reply>` | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc
L | `<list-reply>` | reply to a mailing list
L | `<list-subscribe>` | send a subscription email to a mailing list
L | `<list-unsubscribe>` | send an unsubscription email to a mailing list
f | `<forward>` | forward message
b | `<bounce>` | bounce (remail) message
Esc k | `<mail-key>` | mail a PGP public key to someone

Bouncing a message sends the message as-is to the recipient you specify. Forwarding a message allows you to add comments or modify the message you are forwarding. These items are discussed in greater detail in the next section “Forwarding and Bouncing Mail”.

NeoMutt will then enter the compose menu and prompt you for the recipients to place on the “To:” header field when you hit `m` to start a new message. Next, it will ask you for the “Subject:” field for the message, providing a default if you are replying to or forwarding a message. You again have the chance to adjust recipients, subject, and security settings right before actually sending the message. See also $ask_cc, $ask_bcc, $auto_edit, $bounce, $fast_reply, and $include for changing how and if NeoMutt asks these questions.

When replying, NeoMutt fills these fields with proper values depending on the reply type. The types of replying supported are:

Simple reply

  Reply to the author directly.

Group reply

  Reply to the author; cc all other recipients; consults alternates and excludes you.

Group Chat reply

  Reply to the author and other recipients in the To list; cc other recipients in the Cc list; consults alternates and excludes you.

List reply

  Reply to all mailing list addresses found, either specified via configuration or auto-detected. See Section 14, “Mailing Lists” for details.

After getting recipients for new messages, forwards or replies, NeoMutt will then automatically start your $editor on the message body. If the $edit_headers variable is set, the headers will be at the top of the message in your editor; the message body should start on a new line after the existing blank line at the end of headers. Any messages you are replying to will be added in sort order to the message, with appropriate $attribution_intro, $indent_string and $attribution_trailer. When forwarding a message, if the $mime_forward variable is unset, a copy of the forwarded message will be included. If you have specified a $signature, it will be appended to the message.

Once you have finished editing the body of your mail message, you are returned to the compose menu providing the functions shown in Table 2.16, “Most common compose menu keys” to modify, send or postpone the message.

Table 2.16. Most common compose menu keys

Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
a | `<attach-file>` | attach a file
A | `<attach-message>` | attach message(s) to the message
Esc k | `<attach-key>` | attach a PGP public key
d | `<edit-description>` | edit description on attachment
D | `<detach-file>` | detach a file
t | `<edit-to>` | edit the To field
Esc f | `<edit-from>` | edit the From field
r | `<edit-reply-to>` | edit the Reply-To field
c | `<edit-cc>` | edit the Cc field
b | `<edit-bcc>` | edit the Bcc field
y | `<send-message>` | send the message
s | `<edit-subject>` | edit the Subject
S | `<smime-menu>` | select S/MIME options
f | `<edit-fcc>` | specify an “Fcc” mailbox
p | `<pgp-menu>` | select PGP options
P | `<postpone-message>` | postpone this message until later
q | `<quit>` | quit (abort) sending the message
w | `<write-fcc>` | write the message to a folder
i | `<ispell>` | check spelling (if available on your system)
^F | `<forget-passphrase>` | wipe passphrase(s) from memory

The compose menu is also used to edit the attachments for a message which can be either files or other messages. The `<attach-message>` function to will prompt you for a folder to attach messages from. You can now tag messages in that folder and they will be attached to the message you are sending.

### Note

Note that certain operations like composing a new mail, replying, forwarding, etc. are not permitted when you are in that folder. The %r in $status_format will change to a “A” to indicate that you are in attach-message mode.

After exiting the compose menu via `<send-message>`, the message will be sent. If configured and enabled, this can happen via mixmaster or $smtp_url. Otherwise $sendmail will be invoked. Prior to version 2019-11-29, NeoMutt enabled $write_bcc by default, assuming the MTA would automatically remove a `Bcc:` header as part of delivery. Starting with 2019-11-29, the option is unset by default, but no longer affects the fcc copy of the message.

### 6.2. Editing the Message Header

When editing the header because of $edit_headers being set, there are a several pseudo headers available which will not be included in sent messages but trigger special NeoMutt behavior.

#### 6.2.1. Fcc: Pseudo Header

If you specify either of

`Mutt-Fcc:` filename

`Fcc:` filename

as a header, NeoMutt will pick up filename just as if you had used the `<edit-fcc>` function in the compose menu. It can later be changed from the compose menu.

#### 6.2.2. Attach: Pseudo Header

You can also attach files to your message by specifying either of

`Mutt-Attach:` filename [description]

`Attach:` filename [description]

where filename is the file to attach and description is an optional string to use as the description of the attached file. Spaces in filenames have to be escaped using backslash (“\”). The file can be removed as well as more added from the compose menu.

#### 6.2.3. Pgp: Pseudo Header

If you want to use PGP, you can specify either of

`Mutt-PGP:` [ `E` | `S` | `S` <id> ]

`Pgp:` [ `E` | `S` | `S` <id> ]

“E” selects encryption, “S” selects signing and “S<id>” selects signing with the given key, setting $pgp_sign_as for the duration of the message composition session. The selection can later be changed in the compose menu.

#### 6.2.4. Smime: Pseudo Header

If you want to use S/MIME, you can specify either of

`Mutt-SMIME:` [ `E` | `S` | `S` <id> ]

`Smime:` [ `E` | `S` | `S` <id> ]

“E” selects encryption, “S” selects signing and “S<id>” selects signing with the given key, setting $smime_sign_as for the duration of the message composition session. The selection can later be changed in the compose menu.

#### 6.2.5. In-Reply-To: Header

When replying to messages, the In-Reply-To: header contains the Message-Id of the message(s) you reply to. If you remove or modify its value, NeoMutt will not generate a References: field, which allows you to create a new message thread, for example to create a new message to a mailing list without having to enter the mailing list's address.

If you intend to start a new thread by replying, please make really sure you remove the In-Reply-To: header in your editor. Otherwise, though you'll produce a technically valid reply, some netiquette guardians will be annoyed by this so-called “thread hijacking”.

#### 6.2.6. Mutt-Mix: Pseudo Header

If you want to use Mixmaster, you can specify the chain via:

`Mutt-Mix:` [ remailer1 [ remailer2 [ ... ] ] ]

The chain can later be changed in the mixmaster menu.

### 6.3. Sending Cryptographically Signed/Encrypted Messages

If you have told NeoMutt to PGP or S/MIME encrypt a message, it will guide you through a key selection process when you try to send the message. NeoMutt will not ask you any questions about keys which have a certified user ID matching one of the message recipients' mail addresses. However, there may be situations in which there are several keys, weakly certified user ID fields, or where no matching keys can be found.

In these cases, you are dropped into a menu with a list of keys from which you can select one. When you quit this menu, or NeoMutt can't find any matching keys, you are prompted for a user ID. You can, as usually, abort this prompt using `^G`. When you do so, NeoMutt will return to the compose screen.

Once you have successfully finished the key selection, the message will be encrypted using the selected public keys when sent out.

To ensure you can view encrypted messages you have sent, you may wish to set $pgp_self_encrypt and $pgp_default_key for PGP, or $smime_self_encrypt and $smime_default_key for S/MIME.

Most fields of the entries in the key selection menu (see also $pgp_entry_format) have obvious meanings. But some explanations on the capabilities, flags, and validity fields are in order.

The flags sequence (“%f”) will expand to one of the flags in Table 2.17, “PGP key menu flags”.

Table 2.17. PGP key menu flags

Flag | Description
--- | ---
R | The key has been revoked and can't be used.
X | The key is expired and can't be used.
d | You have marked the key as disabled.
c | There are unknown critical self-signature packets.

The capabilities field (“%c”) expands to a two-character sequence representing a key's capabilities. The first character gives the key's encryption capabilities: A minus sign (“-”) means that the key cannot be used for encryption. A dot (“.”) means that it's marked as a signature key in one of the user IDs, but may also be used for encryption. The letter “e” indicates that this key can be used for encryption.

The second character indicates the key's signing capabilities. Once again, a “-” implies “not for signing”, “.” implies that the key is marked as an encryption key in one of the user-ids, and “s” denotes a key which can be used for signing.

Finally, the validity field (“%t”) indicates how well-certified a user-id is. Its values depend on the backend used. Note that S/MIME (which uses X509 certificates) has no concept of validity, so this field simply shows `x`. The possible values listed in Table 2.18, “PGP key menu validity”.

Table 2.18. PGP key menu validity

Flag (classic PGP) | Flag (GPGME) | Description
--- | --- | ---
N/A | ? | indicates unknown validity
? | q | indicates undefined validity
- | n | indicates a never valid key (untrusted association)
space | m | indicates marginal validity (partially trusted)
+ | f | indicates full validity (fully trusted)
N/A | u | indicates ultimate validity
N/A | x | the entry is an X509 certificate (S/MIME)

### 6.4. Sending Format=Flowed Messages

#### 6.4.1. Concept

`format=flowed`-style messages (or `f=f` for short) are `text/plain` messages that consist of paragraphs which a receiver's mail client may reformat to its own needs, which mostly means to customize line lengths regardless of what the sender sent. Technically this is achieved by letting lines of a “flowable” paragraph end in spaces except for the last line.

While for text-mode clients like NeoMutt it's best to assume only a standard 80x24 character cell terminal, it may be desired to let the receiver decide completely how to view a message.

#### 6.4.2. NeoMutt Support

NeoMutt only supports setting the required `format=flowed` MIME parameter on outgoing messages if the $text_flowed variable is set, specifically it does not add the trailing spaces.

After editing, NeoMutt properly space-stuffs the message. Space-stuffing is required by RFC3676, defining `format=flowed`, and means to prepend a space to:

- all lines starting with a space

- lines starting with the word “`From`” followed by space

- all lines starting with “`>`”, which is not intended to be a quote character

### Note

NeoMutt only supports space-stuffing for the first two types of lines but not for the third: It is impossible to safely detect whether a leading `>` character starts a quote or not.

All leading spaces are to be removed by receiving clients to restore the original message prior to further processing.

#### 6.4.3. Editor Considerations

As NeoMutt provides no additional features to compose `f=f` messages, it's completely up to the user and his editor to produce proper messages. Please consider your editor's documentation if you intend to send `f=f` messages.

For example, vim provides the `w` flag for its `formatoptions` setting to assist in creating `f=f` messages, see `:help fo-table` for details.

#### 6.4.4. Reformatting

NeoMutt has some support for reformatting when viewing and replying to `format=flowed` messages. In order to take advantage of these, $reflow_text must be set.

- Paragraphs are automatically reflowed and wrapped at a width specified by $reflow_wrap.

- In its original format, the quoting style of `format=flowed` messages can be difficult to read, and doesn't intermix well with non-flowed replies. Setting $reflow_space_quotes adds spaces after each level of quoting when in the pager and replying in a non-flowed format (i.e. with $text_flowed unset).

- If $reflow_space_quotes is unset, NeoMutt will still add one trailing space after all the quotes in the pager (but not when replying).

## 7. Forwarding and Bouncing Mail

Bouncing and forwarding let you send an existing message to recipients that you specify. Bouncing a message sends a verbatim copy of a message to alternative addresses as if they were the message's original recipients specified in the Bcc header. Forwarding a message, on the other hand, allows you to modify the message before it is resent (for example, by adding your own comments). Bouncing is done using the `<bounce>` function and forwarding using the `<forward>` function bound to “b” and “f” respectively.

Forwarding can be done by including the original message in the new message's body (surrounded by indicating lines) or including it as a MIME attachment, depending on the value of the $mime_forward variable. Decoding of attachments, like in the pager, can be controlled by the $forward_decode and $mime_forward_decode variables, respectively. The desired forwarding format may depend on the content, therefore $mime_forward is a quadoption which, for example, can be set to “ask-no”.

NeoMutt's default ($mime_forward=“no” and $forward_decode=“yes”) is to use standard inline forwarding. In that mode all text-decodable parts are included in the new message body. Other attachments from the original email can also be attached to the new message, based on the quadoption $forward_attachments.

The inclusion of headers is controlled by the current setting of the $weed variable, unless $mime_forward is set.

By default a forwarded message does not reference the messages it contains. When $forward_references is set, a forwarded message includes the “In-Reply-To:” and “References:” headers, just like a reply would. Hence the forwarded message becomes part of the original thread instead of starting a new one.

Editing the message to forward follows the same procedure as sending or replying to a message does, but can be disabled via the quadoption $forward_edit.

## 8. Postponing Mail

At times it is desirable to delay sending a message that you have already begun to compose. When the `<postpone-message>` function is used in the compose menu, the body of your message and attachments are stored in the mailbox specified by the $postponed variable. This means that you can recall the message even if you exit NeoMutt and then restart it at a later time.

Once a message is postponed, there are several ways to resume it. From the command line you can use the “-p” option, or if you compose a new message from the index or pager you will be prompted if postponed messages exist. If multiple messages are currently postponed, the postponed menu will pop up and you can select which message you would like to resume.

### Note

If you postpone a reply to a message, the reply setting of the message is only updated when you actually finish the message and send it. Also, you must be in the same folder with the message you replied to for the status of the message to be updated.

See also the $postpone quad-option.

## 9. Logging

NeoMutt has different types of logging/error messages

- Primitive Errors: errors emitted by C library functions such as `fopen()`.

- Errors

- Warnings

- Message: Informational messages such as `Sorting mailbox...`.

- Debug: Debug messages usually only interesting while debugging.

These log messages are shown in the command bar at the bottom of the UI (usually below the status line) and errors are shown in a different colour than the other message types. The colours used for displaying can be adjusted with `color error ...` and `color message ...`, respectively. See the description of `color` for the precise syntax.

The command bar shows only the last message. To show the last 100 messages (this includes all types of messages from debug to error) the function `<show-log-messages>` can be used.

Debug messages are not shown by default. To enable them NeoMutt must be compiled with `+debug`. Furthermore, the debug log level must be set with the `-d` command line parameter at startup. The `-d` parameter expects a debug level which can range from 1 to 5 and affects verbosity of the debug messages. A value of 2 is recommended for the start. If debug logging is enabled, all log messages (i.e. errors, warnings, ..., debug) are additionally written to the file `~/.neomuttdebug0`.

## 10. Encryption and Signing

NeoMutt supports encrypting and signing emails when used interactively. In batch mode, cryptographic operations are disabled, so these options can't be used to sign an email sent via a cron job, for instance.

The recommended way to enable OpenPGP and S/MIME is to use GPGME. This library is integrated into NeoMutt and can perform all the common crypto functions the user will need.

    # Enable GPGME
    set crypt_use_gpgme

If you have complex crypto needs, then you can enable the “classic mode” by disabling GPGME and setting all `pgp_command_*` and `smime_command_*` config variables.

For example config, see: `gpg.rc` and `smime.rc` in the Contrib repository.

    # Use manual crypto functions
    unset crypt_use_gpgme
    set pgp_clear_sign_command = "..."
    ...
    set smime_decrypt_command = "..."
    ...

### 10.1. OpenPGP Configuration

The two most important settings are $pgp_default_key and $pgp_sign_as. To perform encryption, you must set the first variable. If you have a separate signing key, or only have a signing key, then set the second. Most people will only need to set $pgp_default_key.

Starting with version 2.1.0, GnuPG automatically uses an `agent` to prompt for your passphrase. If you are using a version older than that, you'll need to ensure an agent is running (alternatively, you can unset $pgp_use_gpg_agent and NeoMutt will prompt you for your passphrase). The agent in turn uses a `pinentry` program to display the prompt. There are many different kinds of pinentry programs that can be used: qt, gtk2, gnome3, fltk, and curses. However, NeoMutt does not work properly with the tty pinentry program. Please ensure you have one of the GUI or curses pinentry programs installed and configured to be the default for your system.

### 10.2. S/MIME Configuration

As with OpenPGP, the two most important settings are $smime_default_key and $smime_sign_as. To perform encryption and decryption, you must set the first variable. If you have a separate signing key, or only have a signing key, then set the second. Most people will only need to set $smime_default_key.

When using GPGME as S/MIME backend, keys and certificates are managed by GnuPG. You can add your key (or certificates) to GnuPG with the command “`gpgsm --import mykey.p12`”. Note that in order to use the key for signing or encrypting, the root certificate of that key must be trusted, which might involve editing `~/.gnupg/trustlist.txt`. Consult your documentation of GnuPG for details, in particular `gpgsm`.

In “classic mode”, keys and certificates are managed by the `smime_keys` program that comes with NeoMutt. By default they are stored under `~/.smime/`. (This is set by the `smime.rc` file with $smime_certificates and $smime_keys.) To initialize this directory, use the command “`smime_keys init`” from a shell prompt. The program can be then be used to import and list certificates. You may also want to periodically run “`smime_keys refresh`” to update status flags for your certificates.

# Chapter 3. Configuration

## 1. Location of Initialization Files

When NeoMutt starts up it looks for two configuration files – one “system” file and one “user” file.

NeoMutt first reads the system configuration file, then the user configuration file. The two files are merged in the sense that "last setting wins". That is, if a setting is defined in both files, the user configuration file's value for that setting is the one that takes precedence and becomes effective.

NeoMutt searches for several different file names when looking for config. It looks for NeoMutt config files before Mutt config files and versioned config before plain config. For example:

Table 3.1. NeoMutt config file search order

neomuttrc
muttrc

This allows the user to create separate NeoMutt and Mutt config files on the same system.

### 1.1. Location of system config files

NeoMutt will search for a system config file in a `neomutt` directory in several places. First it searches the locations specified in the `XDG_CONFIG_DIRS` environment variable, which defaults to `/etc/xdg`. Next, it looks in `/etc`. Finally, it tries `/opt/local/share`.

The system config file will not be read if the “-n” option is used on the command line.

NeoMutt will read just one file, the first file it finds, from the list below.

Table 3.2. NeoMutt system config file locations

File Location | Notes
--- | ---
/etc/xdg/neomutt/neomuttrc |
/etc/xdg/neomutt/Muttrc | Note the case of the filename
/etc/neomuttrc |
/etc/Muttrc | Note the case of the filename
/opt/local/share/neomutt/neomuttrc |
/opt/local/share/neomutt/Muttrc | Note the case of the filename

### 1.2. Location of user config files

NeoMutt will search for a user config file in several places. First it looks in the directory specified in the `XDG_CONFIG_HOME` environment variable, which defaults to `~/.config/neomutt`. Next, it looks in `~` (your home directory). Finally, it tries `~/.neomutt`.

You may specify your own location for the user config file using the “-F” option on the command line.

NeoMutt will read just one file, the first file it finds, from the list below.

Table 3.3. NeoMutt user config file locations

File Location
~/.config/neomutt/neomuttrc
~/.config/neomutt/muttrc
~/.config/mutt/neomuttrc
~/.config/mutt/muttrc
~/.neomutt/neomuttrc
~/.neomutt/muttrc
~/.mutt/neomuttrc
~/.mutt/muttrc
~/.neomuttrc
~/.muttrc

### 1.3. Config Priority

The majority of NeoMutt's config will be read from two files: the system config in `/etc` and the user config in, e.g. `~/.neomuttrc`

The last file that gets read will overwrite any settings from previous config files. This means that an administrator can set some defaults which the user can override.

Additionally, there are a handful of config items which can be set using an environment variable. They have a lower priority than the NeoMutt config files: $editor, $from, $mailcap_path, $news_server, shell, $spool_file, $tmp_dir,

Finally, it's possible to set some variables directly on the command-line using the `-e` option.

Table 3.4. Config Priority

Priority | Where | Example
--- | --- | ---
Highest | Command line | `neomutt -e 'set from="John Doe <john@example.com>"'`
| User Config | `~/.neomuttrc`
| System Config | `/etc/neomuttrc`
| Environment | `export EDITOR="/opt/local/bin/vim"`
Lowest | Built-in | Defaults hard-coded into NeoMutt

## 2. Starter NeoMuttrc

NeoMutt is highly configurable because it's meant to be customized to your needs and preferences. However, this configurability can make it difficult when just getting started. A few sample neomuttrc files are available in the Contrib Repo.

## 3. Syntax of Initialization Files

An initialization file consists of a series of commands. Each line of the file may contain one or more commands. When multiple commands are used, they must be separated by a semicolon (“;”).

Example 3.1. Multiple configuration commands per line

    set real_name='John Smith' ; ignore x-

The hash mark, or pound sign (“#”), is used as a “comment” character. You can use it to annotate your initialization file. All text after the comment character to the end of the line is ignored.

Example 3.2. Commenting configuration files

    my_hdr X-Disclaimer: Why are you listening to me?   # This is a comment

Single quotes (“'”) and double quotes (“"”) can be used to quote strings which contain spaces or other special characters. The difference between the two types of quotes is similar to that of many popular shell programs, namely that a single quote is used to specify a literal string (one that is not interpreted for shell variables or quoting with a backslash [see next paragraph]), while double quotes indicate a string for which should be evaluated. For example, backticks are evaluated inside of double quotes, but not for single quotes.

“\” quotes the next character, just like in a shell. For example, if want to put quotes “"” inside of a string, you can use “\” to force the next character to be a literal instead of interpreted character.

Example 3.3. Escaping quotes in configuration files

    set real_name="John \"anonymous\" Doe"

“\\” means to insert a literal “\” into the line. “\n” and “\r” have their usual C meanings of linefeed and carriage-return, respectively.

A “\” at the end of a line can be used to split commands over multiple lines as it “escapes” the line end, provided that the split points don't appear in the middle of command names. Lines are first concatenated before interpretation so that a multi-line can be commented by commenting out the first line only.

Example 3.4. Splitting long configuration commands over several lines

    set status_format="some very \
    long value split \
    over several lines"

### Note

Using “\” at the end of a line only removes the newline character.

Any leading whitespace on the following lines will be part of the configuration.

It is also possible to substitute the output of a Unix command in an initialization file. This is accomplished by enclosing the command in backticks (``). In Example 3.5, “Using external command's output in configuration files”, the output of the Unix command “uname -a” will be substituted before the line is parsed. Since initialization files are line oriented, only the first line of output from the Unix command will be substituted.

Example 3.5. Using external command's output in configuration files

    my_hdr X-Operating-System: `uname -a`

To avoid the output of backticks being parsed, place them inside double quotes. In Example 3.6, “Preventing the output of backticks from being parsed”, the output of the gpg decryption is assigned directly to $imap_pass, so that special characters in the password (e.g.“'”, “#”, “$”) are not parsed and interpreted specially by neomutt.

Example 3.6. Preventing the output of backticks from being parsed

    set imap_pass="`gpg --batch -q --decrypt ~/.neomutt/account.gpg`"

Both environment variables and NeoMutt variables can be accessed by prepending “$” to the name of the variable. For example,

Example 3.7. Using environment variables in configuration files

    set record = "+sent_on_$HOSTNAME"

If NeoMutt can't find a matching config variable, it will try to find a matching environment variable.

will cause NeoMutt to save outgoing messages to a folder named “sent_on_kremvax” if the environment variable `$HOSTNAME` is set to “kremvax.” (See $record for details.)

NeoMutt expands the variable when it is assigned, not when it is used. If the value of a variable on the right-hand side of an assignment changes after the assignment, the variable on the left-hand side will not be affected.

The commands understood by NeoMutt are explained in the next paragraphs. For a complete list, see the command reference.

All configuration files are expected to be in the current locale as specified by the $charset variable which doesn't have a default value since it's determined by NeoMutt at startup. If a configuration file is not encoded in the same character set the $config_charset variable should be used: all lines starting with the next are recoded from $config_charset to $charset.

This mechanism should be avoided if possible as it has the following implications:

- These variables should be set early in a configuration file with $charset preceding $config_charset so NeoMutt knows what character set to convert to.

- If $config_charset is set, it should be set in each configuration file because the value is global and not per configuration file.

- Because NeoMutt first recodes a line before it attempts to parse it, a conversion introducing question marks or other characters as part of errors (unconvertible characters, transliteration) may introduce syntax errors or silently change the meaning of certain tokens (e.g. inserting question marks into regular expressions).

## 4. Address Groups

Usage:

`group` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `-rx` `regex` ... | `-addr` `address` ... }
`ungroup` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `-rx` `regex` ... | `-addr` `address` ... }

NeoMutt supports grouping addresses logically into named groups. An address or regular expression can appear in several groups at the same time. These groups can be used in patterns (for searching, limiting and tagging) and in hooks by using group patterns. This can be useful to classify mail and take certain actions depending on in what groups the message is. For example, the NeoMutt user's mailing list would fit into the categories “mailing list” and “NeoMutt-related”. Using `send-hook`, the sender can be set to a dedicated one for writing mailing list messages, and the signature could be set to a NeoMutt-related one for writing to a NeoMutt list – for other lists, the list sender setting still applies but a different signature can be selected. Or, given a group only containing recipients known to accept encrypted mail, “auto-encryption” can be achieved easily.

The group command is used to directly add either addresses or regular expressions to the specified group or groups. The different categories of arguments to the group command can be in any order. The flags `-rx` and `-addr` specify what the following strings (that cannot begin with a hyphen) should be interpreted as: either a regular expression or an email address, respectively.

These address groups can also be created implicitly by the alias, lists, subscribe and alternates commands by specifying the optional `-group` option. For example,

    alternates -group me address1 address2
    alternates -group me -group work address3

would create a group named “me” which contains all three addresses and a group named “work” which contains only your work address address3. Besides many other possibilities, this could be used to automatically mark your own messages in a mailing list folder as read or use a special signature for work-related messages.

The ungroup command is used to remove addresses or regular expressions from the specified group or groups. The syntax is similar to the group command, however the special character `*` can be used to empty a group of all of its contents. As soon as a group gets empty because all addresses and regular expressions have been removed, it'll internally be removed, too (i.e. there cannot be an empty group). When removing regular expressions from a group, the regex must be specified exactly as given to the group command or `-group` argument.

## 5. Defining/Using Aliases

Usage:

`alias` [ `-group` `name` ...] `key` `address` [ `, address` ...] [ `# comment` ]
`unalias` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `key` ... }

It's usually very cumbersome to remember or type out the address of someone you are communicating with. NeoMutt allows you to create “aliases” which map a short string to a full address.

### Note

If you want to create an alias for more than one address, you must separate the addresses with a comma (“,”).

The optional `-group` argument to alias causes the aliased address(es) to be added to the named group.

To add an alias:

    # Some aliases, one with a comment
    alias alan   Alan Jones <alan@example.com>
    alias briony Briony Williams <bw@example.com>
    alias jim    James Smith <js@example.com> # Pointy-haired boss

    # An alias that references two other aliases
    alias friends alan, briony

To remove an alias or aliases (“*” means all aliases):

    unalias muttdude
    unalias *

Note: The alias key is matched case insensitively when creating (checking for duplicates), removing, or expanding aliases.

Unlike other mailers, NeoMutt doesn't require aliases to be defined in a special file. The alias command can appear anywhere in a configuration file, as long as this file is sourced. Consequently, you can have multiple alias files, or you can have all aliases defined in your `.neomuttrc`.

On the other hand, the `<create-alias>` function can use only one file, the one pointed to by the $alias_file variable (which is `~/.neomuttrc` by default). This file is not special either, in the sense that NeoMutt will happily append aliases to any file, but in order for the new aliases to take effect you need to explicitly source this file too.

Example 3.8. Configuring external alias files

    source /opt/local/share/NeoMutt.aliases
    source ~/.mail_aliases
    set alias_file=~/.mail_aliases

To use aliases, you merely use the alias at any place in NeoMutt where NeoMutt prompts for addresses, such as the To: or Cc: prompt. You can also enter aliases in your editor at the appropriate headers if you have the $edit_headers variable set.

In addition, at the various address prompts, you can use the tab character to expand a partial alias to the full alias. If there are multiple matches, NeoMutt will bring up a menu with the matching aliases. In order to be presented with the full list of aliases, you must hit tab without a partial alias, such as at the beginning of the prompt or after a comma denoting multiple addresses.

In the alias menu, you can select as many aliases as you want with the `tag-entry` key (default: <Space> or t), and use the exit key (default: q) to return to the address prompt.

## 6. Changing the Default Key Bindings

Usage:

`bind` `map` [ `,map` ...] `key` `function`
`unbind` { `*` | `map` [ `,map` ...] } [ `key` ]

This command allows you to change the default key bindings (operation invoked when pressing a key).

### 6.1. Binding a Key Sequence to a Function

The `bind` command allows to assign a new effect to a key (e.g. `a`) or a keysequence (e.g. `gh` – that is pressing `g` followed by a press of `h`). Its syntax is:

`bind` `map` [ `,map` ...] `key` `function`

map specifies in which menu the binding belongs. Multiple maps may be specified by separating them with commas (no additional whitespace is allowed). The currently defined maps are:

generic

  This is not a real menu, but is used as a fallback for all of the other menus except for the pager and editor modes. If a key is not defined in another menu, NeoMutt will look for a binding to use in this menu. This allows you to bind a key to a certain function in multiple menus instead of having multiple bind statements to accomplish the same task.

alias

  The alias menu is the list of your personal aliases as defined in your `.neomuttrc`. It is the mapping from a short alias name to the full email address(es) of the recipient(s).

attach

  The attachment menu is used to access the attachments on received messages.

browser

  The browser is used for both browsing the local directory structure, and for listing all of your incoming mailboxes.

editor

  The editor is used to allow the user to enter a single line of text, such as the To or Subject prompts in the `compose` menu.

index

  The index is the list of messages contained in a mailbox.

compose

  The compose menu is the screen used when sending a new message.

pager

  The pager is the mode used to display message/attachment data, and help listings.

pgp

  The pgp menu is used to select the OpenPGP keys used to encrypt outgoing messages.

smime

  The smime menu is used to select the OpenSSL certificates used to encrypt outgoing messages.

postpone

  The postpone menu is similar to the index menu, except is used when recalling a message the user was composing, but saved until later.

query

  The query menu is the browser for results returned by $query_command.

mix

  The mixmaster screen is used to select remailer options for outgoing messages (if NeoMutt is compiled with Mixmaster support).

key is the key (or key sequence) you wish to bind. To specify a control character, use the sequence \Cx, where x is the letter of the control character (for example, to specify control-A use “\Ca”). Note that the case of x as well as \C is ignored, so that \CA, \Ca, \cA and \ca are all equivalent. An alternative form is to specify the key as a three digit octal number prefixed with a “\” (for example \177 is equivalent to \c?). In addition, key may be a symbolic name as shown in Table 3.5, “Symbolic key names”.

Table 3.5. Symbolic key names

Symbolic name | Meaning
--- | ---
\t | tab
<tab> | tab
<backtab> | backtab / shift-tab
\r | carriage return
\n | newline
\e | escape/alt
<esc> | escape/alt
<up> | up arrow
<down> | down arrow
<left> | left arrow
<right> | right arrow
<pageup> | Page Up
<pagedown> | Page Down
<backspace> | Backspace
<delete> | Delete
<insert> | Insert
<enter> | Enter
<return> | Return
<keypadenter> | Enter key on numeric keypad
<home> | Home
<end> | End
<space> | Space bar
<f1> | function key 1
<f10> | function key 10

The `<what-key>` function can be used to explore keycode and symbolic names for other keys on your keyboard. Executing this function will display information about each key pressed, until terminated by `^G`.

key does not need to be enclosed in quotes unless it contains a space (“ ”) or semi-colon (“;”).

function specifies which action to take when key is pressed. For a complete list of functions, see the reference. Note that the bind expects function to be specified without angle brackets.

The special function `<noop>` unbinds the specified key sequence. It is recommended to use `unbind` instead.

### 6.2. Unbinding a Key Sequence

To remove a binding of a key or key sequence `unbind` can be used. Its syntax is:

`unbind` { `*` | `map` [ `,map` ...] } [ `key` ]

map specifies from which menus the key sequence should be removed. Multiple maps may be specified by separating them with commas (no additional whitespace is allowed). If `*` is given, then the key sequence is removed from all menus. Valid menu names and their description are listed in the `bind` section.

key is the key or key sequence to be unbound. It may be omitted in which case all keybindings in the given menus are removed. To prevent NeoMutt from becoming unusable some fallback key bindings are added afterwards. The fallback keybindings added depend on the menu, they are listed in Table 3.6, “Fallback key bindings”.

Table 3.6. Fallback key bindings

Menu | Key | Bound Function
--- | --- | ---
generic | <enter> | `<select-entry>`
generic | <return> | `<select-entry>`
generic | : | `<enter-command>`
generic | ? | `<help>`
generic | q | `<exit>`
alias | ? | `<help>`
alias | q | `<exit>`
attach | ? | `<help>`
attach | q | `<exit>`
browser | ? | `<help>`
browser | q | `<exit>`
editor | <backspace> | `<backspace>`
editor | \177 | `<backspace>`
index | <enter> | `<display-message>`
index | <return> | `<display-message>`
index | ? | `<help>`
index | q | `<exit>`
compose | ? | `<help>`
compose | q | `<exit>`
pager | ? | `<help>`
pager | q | `<exit>`
pager | : | `<enter-command>`
pgp | ? | `<help>`
pgp | q | `<exit>`
smime | ? | `<help>`
smime | q | `<exit>`
postpone | ? | `<help>`
postpone | q | `<exit>`
query | ? | `<help>`
query | q | `<exit>`
mix | ? | `<help>`
mix | q | `<exit>`

A key binding can also be unbound by mapping it to the special function `<noop>`. It is, however, recommended to use `unbind` instead.

### 6.3. Enter versus Return

Prior to 2022, NeoMutt used a default ncurses mode (“`nl()`”). This mode maps keyboard input of either `<Enter>` or `<Return>` to the same value, which NeoMutt interpreted as `<Return>` internally.

However, starting in version 2.2, this mode is turned off, allowing `<Return>` and `<Enter>` to be mapped separately, if desired. The default keyboard mappings set both, but you can override this or create new bindings with one or the other (or both).

Note that in terminal application, such as NeoMutt, `<Enter>` is the same as “\n” and `^J`; while `<Return>` is the same as “\r” and `^M`.

### 6.4. Warnings about Duplicated Bindings

Due to a limitation of NeoMutt, creating key bindings, or macros, will overwrite existing mappings with similar, shorter, names.

    bind index g  group-reply
    bind index gg first-entry

In this example, the `g` binding will be overwritten and cannot be used. Newer versions of NeoMutt will warn the user about this.

To avoid warnings on startup, first set the shorter binding to `noop` (no operation).

    bind index g  noop
    bind index gg first-entry

The same is also possible using `unbind`.

    unbind index g
    bind index gg first-entry

### 6.5. Terminal Keybindings

Some key bindings are controlled by the terminal, and so by default can't be bound inside NeoMutt. These may include `^C`, `^\`, `^Q`, `^S`, `^Z`, and on BSD/Mac `^Y`. These terminal settings can be viewed and changed using the `stty` program.

“`stty -a`” will list the bound characters (not all of them affect NeoMutt), and what actions they take when pressed. For example, you may see “`intr = ^C`” in its output. This means typing `^C` will send an interrupt signal. “`quit = ^\`” means typing `^\` (commonly also `^4`) will send a quit signal.

To unbind a key from an action, you invoke “stty action undef”. For example, “`stty quit undef`” will unbind `^\` (and `^4`) from sending the quit signal. Once unbound (e.g, by placing that line in your .profile, or in a NeoMutt wrapper script/function) you can use the key sequence in your NeoMutt bindings.

## 7. Changing the current working directory

Usage:

`cd` `directory`

The `cd` command changes NeoMutt's current working directory. This affects commands and functions like `source`, `change-folder`, and `save-entry` that use relative paths. Using `cd` without directory changes to your home directory.

## 8. Defining Aliases for Character Sets

Usage:

`charset-hook` `alias` `charset`
`iconv-hook` `charset` `local-charset`

The charset-hook command defines an alias for a character set. This is useful to properly display messages which are tagged with a character set name not known to NeoMutt.

The iconv-hook command defines a system-specific name for a character set. This is helpful when your systems character conversion library insists on using strange, system-specific names for character sets.

## 9. Setting Variables Based Upon Mailbox

Usage:

`folder-hook` [ `-noregex` ] `regex` `command`

It is often desirable to change settings based on which mailbox you are reading. The folder-hook command provides a method by which you can execute any configuration command. The command is executed before loading any mailboxes matching regex. The -noregex switch controls whether regex is matched using a simple string comparison or a full regex match. If a mailbox matches multiple folder-hooks, they are executed in the order given in the `.neomuttrc`.

The regex parameter has mailbox shortcut expansion performed on the first character. See Mailbox Matching in Hooks for more details.

### Note

If you use the “!” shortcut for $spool_file at the beginning of regex, you must place it inside of double or single quotes in order to distinguish it from the logical not operator for the expression.

### Note

Settings are not restored when you leave the mailbox. For example, a command action to perform is to change the sorting method based upon the mailbox being read:

    folder-hook work "set sort=threads"

However, the sorting method is not restored to its previous value when reading a different mailbox. To specify a default command, use the regex “.” before other folder-hooks adjusting a value on a per-folder basis because folder-hooks are evaluated in the order given in the configuration file.

### Note

The keyboard buffer will not be processed until after all hooks are run; multiple push or exec commands will end up being processed in reverse order.

The following example will set the sort variable to `date-sent` for all folders but to `threads` for all folders containing “work” in their name.

Example 3.9. Setting sort method based on mailbox name

    folder-hook . "set sort=date-sent"
    folder-hook work "set sort=threads"

## 10. Keyboard Macros

Usage:

`macro` `menu` [ `,menu` ...] `key` `sequence` [ `description` ]
`unmacro` { `*` | `map` | [ `,map` ...]} [ `key` ]

Macros are a convenient way to automate various actions.

### 10.1. Creating a Key Macro

This command allows you to create a macro.

`macro` `menu` [ `,menu` ...] `key` `sequence` [ `description` ]

Macros are useful when you would like a single key to perform a series of actions. When you press key in menu menu, NeoMutt will behave as if you had typed sequence. So if you have a common sequence of commands you type, you can create a macro to execute those commands with a single key or fewer keys.

menu is the map which the macro will be bound in. Multiple maps may be specified by separating multiple menu arguments by commas. Whitespace may not be used in between the menu arguments and the commas separating them.

key and sequence are expanded by the same rules as the key bindings with some additions. The first is that control characters in sequence can also be specified as ^x. In order to get a caret (“^”) you need to use ^^. Secondly, to specify a certain key such as up or to invoke a function directly, you can use the format <key name> and <function name>. For a listing of key names see the section on key bindings. Functions are listed in the reference.

The advantage with using function names directly is that the macros will work regardless of the current key bindings, so they are not dependent on the user having particular key definitions. This makes them more robust and portable, and also facilitates defining of macros in files used by more than one user (e.g., the system neomuttrc).

Optionally you can specify a descriptive text after sequence, which is shown in the help screens if they contain a description.

### Note

Macro definitions (if any) listed in the help screen(s), are silently truncated at the screen width, and are not wrapped.

### 10.2. Removing a Key Macro

This command will remove a macro.

`macro` `menu` [ `,menu` ...] `key` `sequence` [ `description` ]

map specifies from which menus the macro should be removed. Multiple maps may be specified by separating them with commas (no additional whitespace is allowed). If `*` is given, then the macro is removed from all menus. Valid menu names and their description are listed in the `bind` section.

key is the key or key sequence to be unbound. It may be omitted in which case all macros in the given menus are removed.

### Note

Missing key sequence in unmacro command means unmacro all macros in menus given in menu.

## 11. Using Color and Mono Video Attributes

Usage:

`color` [ `compose` ] `object` [ `attribute` ...] `foreground` `background`
`color` `pattern-object` [ `attribute` ...] `foreground` `background` `pattern`
`color` `regex-object` [ `attribute` ...] `foreground` `background` `regex`
`color` `status` [ `attribute` ...] `foreground` `background` [ `regex` [ `num` ]]
`uncolor` [ `compose` ] `object`
`uncolor` `pattern-object` { `pattern` | `*` }
`uncolor` `regex-object` { `regex` | `*` }
`uncolor` `status` { `regex` | `*` }

If your terminal supports color, you can spice up NeoMutt by creating your own color scheme.

### Note

The config variable $color_directcolor must be set to its final value before using any `color` command.

The types of objects that can be colored fall into two categories: Simple Colors such as the highlight in the index, and Color Lists such as the status bar. These lists can created complexing coloring rules.

### 11.1. Color Style

Objects in NeoMutt can be given colors and attributes to make things easier to find and use.

### Note

Objects must be given both a foreground and background color (it is not possible to specify one or the other). Note that `default` can be used as transparent color (see below).

Colors can be specified in up to three ways, using their name such as `green`, `blue`; by their number in the palette, such as `color12`, `color207` (the palette consists of the 256 Xterm colors); or by using hexadecimal RGB codes `#RRGGBB`, where `RR`, `GG`, `BB` are the red, green, and blue components given as a hexadecimal number between 00 and FF (=255), e.g. `#00FFFF` (bright cyan) or `#12af84` (greenish). The last syntax is only accepted if $color_directcolor is set.

Named colours may also be prefixed by a modifier. `bright` or `light` will make the color boldfaced or light (e.g., `brightred`). `alert` to make a blinking/alert color (e.g., `alertred`).

The precise behavior depends on the terminal and its configuration. In particular, the boldfaced/light difference and such background colors may be available only for terminals configured with at least 16 colors, as specified by the `$TERM` environment variable.

foreground and background can be one of the following:

- white

- black

- green

- magenta

- blue

- cyan

- yellow

- red

- default

In addition to the colors, objects may have their attributes set:

- none

- bold

- italic

- reverse

- standout

- underline

If your terminal supports it, the special keyword default can be used as a transparent color. In this case default can be used to only set the foreground or background color. The following sets the foreground and background color individually: the first command leaves the foreground untouched while the second one leaves the background untouched:

    # Make error messages white text on a red background
    color error default red
    color error white   default

On startup NeoMutt tries to detect whether the terminal it is running in supports directcolor (aka TrueColor aka 24-bit color). If the terminal does, NeoMutt enables the config variable $color_directcolor otherwise it disables it. Furthermore, NeoMutt allows to use the RGB colors syntax with the `color` command to colour elements with 24-bit colors.

For the detection to work the TERM environment variable must be set up properly to advertise the terminals directcolor capability. TERM-values which do that usually end in `-direct`, e.g. `xterm-direct`.

If NeoMutt does not detect directcolor color support, but you are sure your terminal supports it, you may try to explicitly set the TERM environment variable by starting NeoMutt from the terminal as follows:

    TERM=xterm-direct neomutt

If that still does not help, you can additionally force NeoMutt to use directcolors by setting $color_directcolor. Setting this variable manually is strongly discouraged since it usually leads to wrong colors.

### 11.2. Simple Colors

Most of NeoMutt's colorable objects follow simple rules. They don't use a pattern and any new configuration will overwrite the old colours.

Simple colors can be undone by setting the foreground and background to `default`, or by using the `uncolor` command.

These are general NeoMutt objects:

Table 3.7. Simple Colours

Colour Name | Description
--- | ---
attachment | Colour for attachment headers
bold | Highlighting bold patterns in the body of messages
error | Error messages printed by NeoMutt
hdrdefault | Default colour of the message header in the pager
indicator | Arrow or bar used to indicate the current item in a menu
markers | The "+" markers at the beginning of wrapped lines in the pager
message | Informational messages
normal | Default colour for all text
options | The key letters in multi-choice questions
progress | Visual progress bar
prompt | A question
search | Highlighting of words in the pager
signature | Email's signature lines (.sig)
tilde | The "~" used to pad blank lines in the pager
tree | Thread tree drawn in the message index and attachment menu
underline | Highlighting underlined patterns in the body of messages
warning | Warning messages

    # Make error messages white text on a red background
    color error white red
    # Make questions bold, underlined, with light blue text (with default background)
    color prompt bold underline cyan default

    uncolor error
    uncolor prompt

These are sidebar objects. See Sidebar Intro for more details.

Table 3.8. Simple Sidebar Colours

Colour Name | Description
--- | ---
sidebar_background | The entire sidebar panel
sidebar_divider | The dividing line between the Sidebar and the Index/Pager panels
sidebar_flagged | Mailboxes containing flagged mail
sidebar_highlight | Cursor to select a mailbox
sidebar_indicator | The mailbox open in the Index panel
sidebar_new | Mailboxes containing new mail
sidebar_ordinary | Mailboxes that have no new/flagged mails, etc
sidebar_spool_file | Mailbox that receives incoming mail
sidebar_unread | Mailboxes containing unread mail

    color sidebar_divider brightblack default

    uncolor sidebar_divider

These are compose objects.

### Note

The compose objects use a slightly different format of command. They prefix the style with the word `compose`.

Table 3.9. Simple Compose Colours

Colour Name | Description
--- | ---
header | Header labels, e.g. From:
security_encrypt | Mail will be encrypted
security_sign | Mail will be signed
security_both | Mail will be encrypted and signed
security_none | Mail will not be encrypted or signed

    color compose header bold white default

    uncolor compose header

The quoted objects refer to quoted lines in an email reply. They are defined using the `$reply_regex` config variable.

The quoted email colours don't use pattern. The first colour, `quoted` provides a default colour for all quoted text. Also, each different level of quoting can be given a different colour using, `quoted1`, `quoted2`, `quoted3` up to `quoted9`.

Table 3.10. Quoted Email Colours

Colour Name | Description
--- | ---
quoted | Text matching $quote_regex in the body of a message
quoted1 | 1 level deeper quoted text, e.g. `> > text`
quoted2 | 2 level deeper quoted text, e.g. `> > > text`
... | ...
quoted9 | 9 level deeper quoted text

    color quoted brightblue default
    color quoted1 brightgreen default
    color quoted2 yellow default

    uncolor quoted
    uncolor quoted1
    uncolor quoted2

### 11.3. Color Lists

Some objects in NeoMutt support lists of color rules. Each rule has a pattern and a color. Each is checked in turn and any matching rules are applied cumulatively (overlaid).

When applying the colours, each pattern will be tested against the field to be colored. All of the matching patterns will have their colors applied in the order they are configured.

The color lists work in slightly different ways to each other.

`attach_headers`, `body` and `header` match a regular expression (regex) in the header/body of a email.

`index` objects match a pattern in the email index (see Section 3, “Patterns: Searching, Limiting and Tagging”) Note that IMAP server-side searches (=b, =B, =h) are not supported for color index patterns.

When $header_color_partial is unset (the default), a `header` matched by regex will have color applied to the entire header. When set, color is applied only to the exact text matched by regex.

For the `status` list, the regular expression is optional. Without one, the command will set the default style for the status bar. With a regex (and an optional number), it's possible to style parts of the status bar. See: Status-Color feature for more detail.

Color lists can be undone by using the `uncolor` command and the pattern or `*` to match.

Table 3.11. Colour Regex Lists

Colour Name | Match | Description
--- | --- | ---
attach_headers | regex | Attachment headers
body | regex | Email body
header | regex | Email headers
index | pattern | Default highlighting of the entire index line
index_author | pattern | Author in the index: `%A`, `%a`, `%F`, `%L`, `%n`
index_collapsed | pattern | Number of messages in a collapsed thread: `%M`
index_date | pattern | Date field: `%d`, `%D`, `%{fmt}`, `%[fmt]`, `%(fmt)`
index_flags | pattern | Flags in the index: `%S`, `%Z`
index_label | pattern | Message label: `%y`, `%Y`
index_number | pattern | Message number: `%C`
index_size | pattern | Message size: `%c`, `%cr`, `%l`
index_subject | pattern | Subject in the index: `%s`
index_tag | pattern | Tags in the index: `%G`
index_tags | pattern | Transformed message tags: `%g`, `%J`
status | regex | Status bar

    # Highlight emails from work (entire line)
    color index          cyan default "~f @work.com"
    # Extra highlighting for the boss (just the author column)
    color index_author   cyan red     "~f boss@work.com"

    uncolor index          "~f @work.com"
    # Clear all index_author colors
    uncolor index_author   *

    # Add some highlights to the body of an email
    color body    bold red    default "(urgent|important)"
    color body         yellow default "(warning|notice)"
    # Make the label header red
    color header       cyan   default "X-Label"

    uncolor body    "(urgent|important)"
    # Clear all body colors
    uncolor body    *
    uncolor header  "X-Label"

    # Set the default color for the entire status line
    color status blue white
    # Highlight New, Deleted, or Flagged emails
    color status brightred white '(New|Del|Flag):[0-9]+'
    # Highlight the contents of the []s but not the [] themselves
    color status red default '\[([^]]+)\]' 1

    uncolor status '(New|Del|Flag):[0-9]+'
    uncolor status *

### 11.4. Mono Color

If your terminal does not support color, it is still possible change the video attributes through the use of the “mono” command. Usage:

`mono` `object` `attribute`
`mono` { `header` | `body` } `attribute` `regex`
`mono` `index-object` `attribute` `pattern`
`unmono` { `index-object` | `header` | `body` } { `*` | `pattern` ... }

For object, composeobject, and attribute, see the color command.

## 12. Message Header Display

### 12.1. Header Display

When displaying a message in the pager, NeoMutt folds long header lines at $wrap columns. Though there're precise rules about where to break and how, NeoMutt always folds headers using a tab for readability. (Note that the sending side is not affected by this, NeoMutt tries to implement standards compliant folding.)

Despite not being a real header, NeoMutt will also display an mbox "From_" line in the pager along with other headers. This line can be manipulated with ignore/unignore and hdr_order/unhdr_order commands.

### 12.2. Selecting Headers

Usage:

`ignore` `string` [ `string` ...]
`unignore` { `*` | `string` ... }

Messages often have many header fields added by automatic processing systems, or which may not seem useful to display on the screen. This command allows you to specify header fields which you don't normally want to see in the pager.

You do not need to specify the full header field name. For example, “ignore content-” will ignore all header fields that begin with the string “content-”. “ignore *” will ignore all headers.

To remove a previously added token from the list, use the “unignore” command. The “unignore” command will make NeoMutt display headers matching the given string. For example, if you do “ignore x-” it is possible to “unignore x-mailer”.

“unignore *” will remove all tokens from the ignore list.

Example 3.10. Header weeding

    # Sven's draconian header weeding
    ignore *
    unignore from date subject to cc
    unignore organization organisation x-mailer: x-newsreader: x-mailing-list:
    unignore posted-to:

The above example will show "From:" headers as well as mbox "From_" lines. To hide the latter, instead use "`unignore from: date subject to cc`" on the second line.

### 12.3. Ordering Displayed Headers

Usage:

`hdr_order` `header` [ `header` ...]
`unhdr_order` { `*` | `header` ... }

With the hdr_order command you can specify an order in which NeoMutt will attempt to present these headers to you when viewing messages.

“unhdr_order*” will clear all previous headers from the order list, thus removing the header order effects set by the system-wide startup file.

Example 3.11. Configuring header display order

    hdr_order From Date: From: To: Cc: Subject:

## 13. Alternative Addresses

Usage:

`alternates` [ `-group` `name` ...] `regex` [ `regex` ...]
`unalternates` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `regex` ... }

With various functions, NeoMutt will treat messages differently, depending on whether you sent them or whether you received them from someone else. For instance, when replying to a message that you sent to a different party, NeoMutt will automatically suggest to send the response to the original message's recipients – responding to yourself won't make much sense in many cases. (See $reply_to.)

Many users receive e-mail under a number of different addresses. To fully use NeoMutt's features here, the program must be able to recognize what e-mail addresses you receive mail under. That's the purpose of the alternates command: It takes a list of regular expressions, each of which can identify an address under which you receive e-mail.

As addresses are matched using regular expressions and not exact strict comparisons, you should make sure you specify your addresses as precise as possible to avoid mismatches. For example, if you specify:

    alternates user@example

NeoMutt will consider “`some-user@example`” as being your address, too which may not be desired. As a solution, in such cases addresses should be specified as:

    alternates '^user@example$'

The `-group` flag causes all of the subsequent regular expressions to be added to the named group.

The unalternates command can be used to write exceptions to alternates regex. If an address matches something in an alternates command, but you nonetheless do not think it is from you, you can list a more precise regex under an unalternates command.

To remove a regular expression from the alternates list, use the unalternates command with exactly the same regex. Likewise, if the regex for an alternates command matches an entry on the unalternates list, that unalternates entry will be removed. If the regex for unalternates is “*”, all entries on alternates will be removed.

## 14. Mailing Lists

Usage:

`lists` [ `-group` `name` ...] `regex` [ `regex` ...]
`unlists` { `*` | `regex` ... }
`subscribe` [ `-group` `name` ...] `regex` [ `regex` ...]
`unsubscribe` { `*` | `regex` ... }

NeoMutt has a few nice features for handling mailing lists. In order to take advantage of them, you must specify which addresses belong to mailing lists, and which mailing lists you are subscribed to. NeoMutt also has limited support for auto-detecting mailing lists: it supports parsing `mailto:` links in the common `List-Post:` header which has the same effect as specifying the list address via the lists command (except the group feature). Once you have done this, the `<list-reply>` function will work for all known lists. Additionally, when you send a message to a known list and $followup_to is set, NeoMutt will add a Mail-Followup-To header. For unsubscribed lists, this will include your personal address, ensuring you receive a copy of replies. For subscribed mailing lists, the header will not, telling other users' mail user agents not to send copies of replies to your personal address.

### Note

The Mail-Followup-To header is a non-standard extension which is not supported by all mail user agents. Adding it is not bullet-proof against receiving personal CCs of list messages. Also note that the generation of the Mail-Followup-To header is controlled by the $followup_to configuration variable since it's common practice on some mailing lists to send Cc upon replies (which is more a group- than a list-reply).

More precisely, NeoMutt maintains lists of regular expressions for the addresses of known and subscribed mailing lists. Every subscribed mailing list is known. To mark a mailing list as known, use the list command. To mark it as subscribed, use subscribe.

You can use regular expressions with both commands. To mark all messages sent to a specific bug report's address on Debian's bug tracking system as list mail, for instance, you could say

    subscribe [0-9]+.*@bugs.debian.org

as it's often sufficient to just give a portion of the list's e-mail address.

Specify as much of the address as you need to to remove ambiguity. For example, if you've subscribed to the NeoMutt mailing list, you will receive mail addressed to `neomutt-users@neomutt.org`. So, to tell NeoMutt that this is a mailing list, you could add `lists neomutt-users@` to your initialization file. To tell NeoMutt that you are subscribed to it, add `subscribe neomutt-users` to your initialization file instead. If you also happen to get mail from someone whose address is `neomutt-users@example.com`, you could use `lists ^neomutt-users@neomutt\\.org$` or `subscribe ^neomutt-users@neomutt\\.org$` to match only mail from the actual list.

The `-group` flag adds all of the subsequent regular expressions to the named address group in addition to adding to the specified address list.

The “unlists” command is used to remove a token from the list of known and subscribed mailing-lists. Use “unlists *” to remove all tokens.

To remove a mailing list from the list of subscribed mailing lists, but keep it on the list of known mailing lists, use unsubscribe.

## 15. Using Multiple Spool Mailboxes

Usage:

`mbox-hook` [ `-noregex` ] `regex` `mailbox`

This command is used to move read messages from a specified mailbox to a different mailbox automatically when you quit or change folders. regex is used to specifying the mailbox to treat as a “spool” mailbox and mailbox specifies where mail should be saved when read. The -noregex switch controls whether regex is matched using a simple string comparison or a full regex match.

The regex parameter has mailbox shortcut expansion performed on the first character. See Mailbox Matching in Hooks for more details.

Note that execution of mbox-hooks is dependent on the $move configuration variable. If set to “no” (the default), mbox-hooks will not be executed.

Unlike some of the other hook commands, only the first matching regex is used (it is not possible to save read mail in more than a single mailbox).

## 16. Monitoring Incoming Mail

Usage:

`mailboxes` [ [ `-label` `label` | `-nolabel` ] [ `-notify` | `-nonotify` ] [ `-poll` | `-nopoll` ] `mailbox` ] [...]
`named-mailboxes` `label` `mailbox` { `label` `mailbox` ...}
`unmailboxes` { `*` | `mailbox` ... }

This command specifies folders which can receive mail and which will be checked for new messages periodically.

The `-label` argument can be used to specify an alternative label to print in the sidebar or mailbox browser instead of the mailbox path. A label may be removed via the `-nolabel` argument. If unspecified, an existing mailbox label will be unchanged.

Use `-nonotify` to disable notifying when new mail arrives. The `-notify` argument can be used to re-enable notifying for an existing mailbox. If unspecified: a new mailbox will notify by default, while an existing mailbox will be unchanged.

To disable polling, specify `-nopoll` before the mailbox name. The `-poll` argument can be used to re-enable polling for an existing mailbox. If unspecified: a new mailbox will poll by default, while an existing mailbox will be unchanged.

folder can either be a local file or directory (Mbox/Mmdf or Maildir/Mh). If NeoMutt was built with POP and/or IMAP support, folder can also be a POP/IMAP folder URL. The URL syntax is described in Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”, POP and IMAP are described in Section 3, “POP3 Support” and Section 4, “IMAP Support” respectively.

NeoMutt provides a number of advanced features for handling (possibly many) folders and new mail within them, please refer to Section 13, “New Mail Detection” for details (including in what situations and how often NeoMutt checks for new mail). Additionally, $new_mail_command can be used to run a command when new mail is detected.

The “unmailboxes” command is used to remove a token from the list of folders which receive mail. “unmailboxes” can be used on the mailbox path, “$folder”-abbreviated path, or description. Use “unmailboxes *” to remove all tokens.

### Note

The folders in the mailboxes command are resolved when the command is executed, so if these names contain shortcut characters (such as “=” and “!”), any variable definition that affects these characters (like $folder and $spool_file) should be set before the mailboxes command. If none of these shortcuts are used, a local path should be absolute as otherwise NeoMutt tries to find it relative to the directory from where NeoMutt was started which may not always be desired.

## 17. User-Defined Headers

Usage:

`my_hdr` `string`
`unmy_hdr` { `*` | `field` ... }

The my_hdr command allows you to create your own header fields which will be added to every message you send and appear in the editor if $edit_headers is set.

For example, if you would like to add an “Organization:” header field to all of your outgoing messages, you can put the command something like shown in Example 3.12, “Defining custom headers” in your `.neomuttrc`.

Example 3.12. Defining custom headers

    my_hdr Organization: A Really Big Company, Anytown, USA

### Note

Space characters are not allowed between the keyword and the colon (“:”). The standard for electronic mail (RFC2822) says that space is illegal there, so NeoMutt enforces the rule.

If you would like to add a header field to a single message, you should either set the $edit_headers variable, or use the `<edit-headers>` function (default: “E”) in the compose menu so that you can edit the header of your message along with the body.

To remove user defined header fields, use the unmy_hdr command. You may specify an asterisk (“*”) to remove all header fields, or the fields to remove. For example, to remove all “To” and “Cc” header fields, you could use:

    unmy_hdr to cc

## 18. Specify Default Fcc: and/or Save Mailbox

Usage:

`fcc-save-hook` `pattern` `mailbox`
`fcc-hook` `pattern` `mailbox`
`save-hook` `pattern` `mailbox`

fcc-save-hook is a shortcut, equivalent to doing both a fcc-hook and a save-hook with its arguments, including %-expansion on mailbox according to $index_format.

If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.

fcc-hook is used to save outgoing mail in a mailbox other than $record. NeoMutt searches the initial list of message recipients for the first matching pattern and uses mailbox as the default “Fcc:” mailbox. If no match is found the message will be saved to $record mailbox.

    fcc-hook [@.]aol\\.com$ +spammers

...will save a copy of all messages going to the aol.com domain to the “+spammers” mailbox by default.

save-hook is used to override the default mailbox used when saving messages. mailbox will be used as the default if the message matches pattern.

Example 3.13. Using %-expandos in save-hook

    # default: save all to ~/Mail/<author name>
    save-hook . ~/Mail/%F
    # save from john@turing.ox.ac.uk and john@ox.ac.uk to $folder/smith
    save-hook john@(turing\\.)?ox\\.ac\\.uk$ +smith
    # save from aol.com to $folder/spam
    save-hook aol\\.com$ +spam

Also see the fcc-save-hook command.

To provide more flexibility and good defaults, NeoMutt applies the expandos of $index_format to mailbox after it was expanded. See Message Matching in Hooks for information on the exact format of pattern.

## 19. Change Settings Based Upon Message Recipients

Usage:

`reply-hook` `pattern` `command`
`send-hook` `pattern` `command`
`send2-hook` `pattern` `command`

These commands can be used to execute arbitrary configuration commands based upon recipients of the message. pattern is used to match the message, see Message Matching in Hooks for details. command is executed when pattern matches.

If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.

reply-hook is matched against the message you are replying to, instead of the message you are sending. send-hook is matched against all messages, both new and replies.

### Note

reply-hooks are matched before the send-hook, regardless of the order specified in the user's configuration file. However, you can inhibit send-hook in the reply case by using the pattern `'! ~Q'` (not replied, see Message Matching in Hooks) in the send-hook to tell when reply-hook have been executed.

send2-hook is matched every time a message is changed, either by editing it, or by using the compose menu to change its recipients or subject. send2-hook is executed after send-hook, and can, e.g., be used to set parameters such as the $sendmail variable depending on the message's sender address.

For each type of send-hook or reply-hook, when multiple matches occur, commands are executed in the order they are specified in the `.neomuttrc` (for that type of hook).

Example: `send-hook work "set mime_forward signature=''"`

Another typical use for this command is to change the values of the $attribution_intro, $attribution_locale, and $signature variables in order to change the language of the attributions and signatures based upon the recipients.

### Note

send-hook's are only executed once after getting the initial list of recipients. They are not executed when resuming a postponed draft. Adding a recipient after replying or editing the message will not cause any send-hook to be executed, similarly if $auto_edit is set (as then the initial list of recipients is empty). Also note that my_hdr commands which modify recipient headers, or the message's subject, don't have any effect on the current message when executed from a send-hook.

## 20. Change Settings Before Formatting a Message

Usage:

`message-hook` `pattern` `command`

This command can be used to execute arbitrary configuration commands before viewing or formatting a message based upon information about the message. command is executed if the pattern matches the message to be displayed. When multiple matches occur, commands are executed in the order they are specified in the `.neomuttrc`.

If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.

See Message Matching in Hooks for information on the exact format of pattern.

Example:

    message-hook ~A 'set pager=builtin'
    message-hook '~f freshmeat-news' 'set pager="less \"+/^  subject: .*\""'

## 21. Choosing the Cryptographic Key of the Recipient

Usage:

`crypt-hook` `regex` `keyid`

When encrypting messages with PGP/GnuPG or OpenSSL, you may want to associate a certain key with a given e-mail address automatically, either because the recipient's public key can't be deduced from the destination address, or because, for some reasons, you need to override the key NeoMutt would normally use. The crypt-hook command provides a method by which you can specify the ID of the public key to be used when encrypting messages to a certain recipient. You may use multiple crypt-hooks with the same regex; multiple matching crypt-hooks result in the use of multiple keyids for a recipient. During key selection, NeoMutt will confirm whether each crypt-hook is to be used (unless the $crypt_confirm_hook option is unset). If all crypt-hooks for a recipient are declined, NeoMutt will use the original recipient address for key selection instead.

The meaning of keyid is to be taken broadly in this context: You can either put a numerical key ID or fingerprint here, an e-mail address, or even just a real name.

## 22. Dynamically Changing $index_format using Patterns

Usage:

`index-format-hook` `name` `[!]pattern` `format-string`

This command is used to inject format strings dynamically into $index_format based on pattern matching against the current message.

If the pattern is a plain string, or a regex, it will be expanded to a pattern using $default_hook.

The $index_format expando %@name@ specifies a placeholder for the injection. Index-format-hooks with the same name are matched using pattern against the current message. Matching is done in the order specified in the .muttrc, with the first match being used. The hook's format-string is then substituted and evaluated.

Because the first match is used, best practice is to put a catch-all ~A pattern as the last hook. Here is an example showing how to implement dynamic date formatting:

    set index_format="%4C %-6@date@ %-15.15F %Z (%4c) %s"

    index-format-hook  date  "~d<1d"    "%[%H:%M]"
    index-format-hook  date  "~d<1m"    "%[%a %d]"
    index-format-hook  date  "~d<1y"    "%[%b %d]"
    index-format-hook  date  "~A"       "%[%m/%y]"

Another example, showing a way to prepend to the subject. Note that without a catch-all ~A pattern, no match results in the expando being replaced with an empty string.

    set index_format="%4C %@subj_flags@%s"

    index-format-hook  subj_flags  "~f boss@example.com"    "** BOSS ** "
    index-format-hook  subj_flags  "~f spouse@example.com"  ":-) "

## 23. Adding Key Sequences to the Keyboard Buffer

Usage:

`push` `string`

This command adds the named string to the beginning of the keyboard buffer. The string may contain control characters, key names and function names like the sequence string in the macro command. You may use it to automatically run a sequence of commands at startup, or when entering certain folders. For example, Example 3.14, “Embedding push in folder-hook” shows how to automatically collapse all threads when entering a folder.

Example 3.14. Embedding push in folder-hook

    folder-hook . 'push <collapse-all>'

For using functions like shown in the example, it's important to use angle brackets (“<” and “>”) to make NeoMutt recognize the input as a function name. Otherwise it will simulate individual just keystrokes, i.e. “`push collapse-all`” would be interpreted as if you had typed “c”, followed by “o”, followed by “l”, ..., which is not desired and may lead to very unexpected behavior.

Keystrokes can be used, too, but are less portable because of potentially changed key bindings. With default bindings, this is equivalent to the above example:

    folder-hook . 'push \eV'

because it simulates that Esc+V was pressed (which is the default binding of `<collapse-all>`).

## 24. Executing Functions

Usage:

`exec` `function` [ `function` ...]

This command can be used to execute any function. Functions are listed in the function reference. “exec `function`” is equivalent to “`push <function>`”.

## 25. Message Scoring

Usage:

`score` `pattern` `value`
`unscore` { `*` | `pattern` ... }

The score commands adds value to a message's score if pattern matches it. pattern is a string in the format described in the patterns section (note: For efficiency reasons, patterns which scan information not available in the index, such as `~b`, `~B`, `~h`, `~M`, or `~X` may not be used). value is a positive or negative integer. A message's final score is the sum total of all matching score entries. However, you may optionally prefix value with an equal sign (“=”) to cause evaluation to stop at a particular entry if there is a match. Negative final scores are rounded up to 0.

The unscore command removes score entries from the list. You must specify the same pattern specified in the score command for it to be removed. The pattern “*” is a special token which means to clear the list of all score entries.

Scoring occurs as the messages are read in, before the mailbox is sorted. Because of this, patterns which depend on threading, such as ~=, ~$, and ~(), will not work by default. A workaround is to push the scoring command in a folder hook. This will cause the mailbox to be rescored after it is opened and input starts being processed:

    folder-hook . 'push "<enter-command>score ~= 10<enter>"'

## 26. Spam Detection

Usage:

`spam` `regex` `format`
`nospam` { `*` | `regex` }

NeoMutt has generalized support for external spam-scoring filters. By defining your spam regular expressions with the spam and `nospam` commands, you can limit, search, and sort your mail based on its spam attributes, as determined by the external filter. You also can display the spam attributes in your index display using the `%H` selector in the $index_format variable. (Tip: try `%<H?[%H] >` to display spam tags only when they are defined for a given message.)

Note: the value displayed by `%H` and searched by `~H` is stored in the header cache. NeoMutt isn't smart enough to invalidate a header cache entry based on changing `spam` rules, so if you aren't seeing correct `%H` values, try temporarily turning off the header cache. If that fixes the problem, then once your spam rules are set to your liking, remove your stale header cache files and turn the header cache back on.

Your first step is to define your external filter's spam headers using the spam command. regex should be a regular expression that matches a header in a mail message. If any message in the mailbox matches this regular expression, it will receive a “spam tag” or “spam attribute” (unless it also matches a nospam regular expression – see below.) The appearance of this attribute is entirely up to you, and is governed by the format parameter. format can be any static text, but it also can include back-references from the regex expression. (A regular expression “back-reference” refers to a sub-expression contained within parentheses.) `%1` is replaced with the first back-reference in the regex, `%2` with the second, etc.

To match spam tags, NeoMutt needs the corresponding header information which is always the case for local and POP folders but not for IMAP in the default configuration. Depending on the spam header to be analyzed, $imap_headers may need to be adjusted.

If you're using multiple spam filters, a message can have more than one spam-related header. You can define spam rules for each filter you use. If a message matches two or more of these regular expressions, and the $spam_separator variable is set to a string, then the message's spam tag will consist of all the format strings joined together, with the value of $spam_separator separating them.

For example, suppose one uses DCC, SpamAssassin, and PureMessage, then the configuration might look like in Example 3.15, “Configuring spam detection”.

Example 3.15. Configuring spam detection

    spam "X-DCC-.*-Metrics:.*(....)=many"         "90+/DCC-%1"
    spam "X-Spam-Status: Yes"                     "90+/SA"
    spam "X-PerlMX-Spam: .*Probability=([0-9]+)%" "%1/PM"
    set spam_separator=", "

If then a message is received that DCC registered with “many” hits under the “Fuz2” checksum, and that PureMessage registered with a 97% probability of being spam, that message's spam tag would read `90+/DCC-Fuz2, 97/PM`. (The four characters before “=many” in a DCC report indicate the checksum used – in this case, “Fuz2”.)

If the $spam_separator variable is unset, then each spam rule match supersedes the previous one. Instead of getting joined format strings, you'll get only the last one to match.

The spam tag is what will be displayed in the index when you use `%H` in the $index_format variable. It's also the string that the `~H` pattern-matching expression matches against for `<search>` and `<limit>` functions. And it's what sorting by spam attribute will use as a sort key.

That's a pretty complicated example, and most people's actual environments will have only one spam filter. The simpler your configuration, the more effective NeoMutt can be, especially when it comes to sorting.

Generally, when you sort by spam tag, NeoMutt will sort lexically – that is, by ordering strings alphanumerically. However, if a spam tag begins with a number, NeoMutt will sort numerically first, and lexically only when two numbers are equal in value. (This is like UNIX's `sort -n`.) A message with no spam attributes at all – that is, one that didn't match any of your spam rules – is sorted at lowest priority. Numbers are sorted next, beginning with 0 and ranging upward. Finally, non-numeric strings are sorted, with “a” taking lower priority than “z”. Clearly, in general, sorting by spam tags is most effective when you can coerce your filter to give you a raw number. But in case you can't, NeoMutt can still do something useful.

The nospam command can be used to write exceptions to spam rules. If a header field matches something in a spam command, but you nonetheless do not want it to receive a spam tag, you can list a more precise regular expression under a nospam command.

If the regex given to nospam is exactly the same as the regex on an existing spam rule entry, the effect will be to remove the entry from the spam rules list, instead of adding an exception. Likewise, if the regex for a spam command matches an entry on the nospam rule list, that nospam entry will be removed. If the regex for nospam is “*”, all entries on both lists will be removed. This might be the default action if you use spam and nospam in conjunction with a folder-hook.

You can have as many spam or nospam commands as you like. You can even do your own primitive spam detection within NeoMutt – for example, if you consider all mail from `MAILER-DAEMON` to be spam, you can use a spam command like this:

    spam "^From: .*MAILER-DAEMON"       "999"

## 27. Setting and Querying Variables

### 27.1. Variable Types

NeoMutt supports these types of configuration variables:

boolean

  A boolean expression, either “yes” or “no”.

number

  A signed integer number in the range -32768 to 32767.

number (long)

  A signed integer number in the range -2147483648 to 2147483647.

string

  Arbitrary text.

path

  A specialized string for representing paths including support for mailbox shortcuts (see Section 10, “Mailbox Shortcuts”) as well as tilde (“~”) for a user's home directory and more.

quadoption

  Like a boolean but triggers a prompt when set to “ask-yes” or “ask-no” with “yes” and “no” preselected respectively.

sort order

  A specialized string allowing only particular words as values depending on the variable.

regular expression

  A regular expression, see Section 2, “Regular Expressions” for an introduction.

folder type

  Specifies the type of folder to use: mbox, mmdf, mh or maildir. Currently only used to determine the type for newly created folders.

e-mail address

  An email address either with or without real_name. The older “`user@example.org (Joe User)`” form is supported but strongly deprecated.

user-defined

  Arbitrary text, see Section 27.3, “User-Defined Variables” for details.

### 27.2. Commands

The following commands are available to manipulate and query variables:

Usage:

`set` { [ `no` | `inv` | `&` | `?` ] `variable` } [...]
`set` { `variable=value` | `variable+=increment` | `variable-=decrement` } [...]
`unset` `variable` [ `variable` ...]
`reset` `variable` [ `variable` ...]
`toggle` `variable` [ `variable` ...]
`set` `variable` `?`

This command is used to set (and unset) configuration variables. There are several basic types of variables: boolean, number, string, string list and quadoption. boolean variables can be set (true) or unset (false). number variables can be assigned a positive integer value. The value of numeric variables can be incremented += and decremented -=. String list variables use += for appending to the string list and -= for removal from the string list. string variables consist of any number of printable characters and must be enclosed in quotes if they contain spaces or tabs. You may also use the escape sequences “\n” and “\t” for newline and tab, respectively. Content of a string variable can be extended using +=. quadoption variables are used to control whether or not to be prompted for certain actions, or to specify a default action. A value of yes will cause the action to be carried out automatically as if you had answered yes to the question. Similarly, a value of no will cause the action to be carried out as if you had answered “no.” A value of ask-yes will cause a prompt with a default answer of “yes” and ask-no will provide a default answer of “no.”

Prefixing a variable with “no” will unset it. Example: `set noask_bcc`.

For boolean variables, you may optionally prefix the variable name with `inv` to toggle the value (on or off). This is useful when writing macros. Example: `set invsmart_wrap`.

The toggle command automatically prepends the `inv` prefix to all specified variables.

The unset command automatically prepends the `no` prefix to all specified variables.

Using the `<enter-command>` function in the index menu, you can query the value of a variable by suffixing the name of the variable with a question mark:

    set allow_8bit?

The old prefix query syntax (`set ?allow_8bit`) is also still supported.

The question mark is actually only required for boolean and quadoption variables.

The reset command resets all given variables to the compile time defaults (hopefully mentioned in this manual). If you use the command set and prefix the variable with “&” this has the same behavior as the reset command.

With the reset command there exists the special variable “all”, which allows you to reset all variables to their system defaults.

### 27.3. User-Defined Variables

#### 27.3.1. Introduction

Along with the variables listed in the Configuration variables section, NeoMutt supports user-defined variables with names starting with `my_` as in, for example, `my_cfgdir`.

The set command either creates a custom `my_` variable or changes its value if it exists already. Use of += will adjust a custom variable using the same behavior as a string variable, by appending additional characters (this is true even if the current contents of the variable resemble an integer, which is different than the behavior of += on built-in numeric variables). The unset and reset commands remove the variable entirely.

Since user-defined variables are expanded in the same way that environment variables are (except for the shell-escape command and backtick expansion), this feature can be used to make configuration files more readable.

#### 27.3.2. Examples

The following example defines and uses the variable `my_cfgdir` to abbreviate the calls of the source command:

Example 3.16. Using user-defined variables for config file readability

    set my_cfgdir = $HOME/neomutt/config
    source $my_cfgdir/hooks $my_cfgdir/macros
    # more source commands...

A custom variable can also be used in macros to backup the current value of another variable. In the following example, the value of the $delete is changed temporarily while its original value is saved as `my_delete`. After the macro has executed all commands, the original value of $delete is restored.

Example 3.17. Using user-defined variables for backing up other config option values

    macro pager ,x '\
    <enter-command>set my_delete=$delete<enter>\
    <enter-command>set delete=yes<enter>\
    ...\
    <enter-command>set delete=$my_delete<enter>'

Since NeoMutt expands such values already when parsing the configuration file(s), the value of `$my_delete` in the last example would be the value of $delete exactly as it was at that point during parsing the configuration file. If another statement would change the value for $delete later in the same or another file, it would have no effect on `$my_delete`. However, the expansion can be deferred to runtime, as shown in the next example, when escaping the dollar sign.

Example 3.18. Deferring user-defined variable expansion to runtime

    macro pager <PageDown> "\
    <enter-command> set my_old_pager_stop=\$pager_stop pager_stop<Enter>\
    <next-page>\
    <enter-command> set pager_stop=\$my_old_pager_stop<Enter>\
    <enter-command> unset my_old_pager_stop<Enter>"

Note that there is a space between `<enter-command>` and the set configuration command, preventing NeoMutt from recording the macro's commands into its history.

### 27.4. Type Conversions

Variables are always assigned string values which NeoMutt parses into its internal representation according to the type of the variable, for example an integer number for numeric types. For all queries (including $-expansion) the value is converted from its internal type back into string. As a result, any variable can be assigned any value given that its content is valid for the target. This also counts for custom variables which are of type string. In case of parsing errors, NeoMutt will print error messages. Example 3.19, “Type conversions using variables” demonstrates type conversions.

Example 3.19. Type conversions using variables

    set my_lines = "5"                # value is string "5"
    set pager_index_lines = $my_lines # value is integer 5
    set my_sort = "date-received"     # value is string "date-received"
    set sort = "last-$my_sort"        # value is sort last-date-received
    set my_inc = $read_inc            # value is string "10" (default of $read_inc)
    set my_foo = $my_inc              # value is string "10"

These assignments are all valid. If, however, the value of `$my_lines` would have been “five” (or something else that cannot be parsed into a number), the assignment to `$pager_index_lines` would have produced an error message.

Type conversion applies to all configuration commands which take arguments. But please note that every expanded value of a variable is considered just a single token. A working example is:

    set my_pattern = "~A"
    set my_number = "10"
    # same as: score ~A +10
    score $my_pattern +$my_number

What does not work is:

    set my_mx = "+mailbox1 +mailbox2"
    mailboxes $my_mx +mailbox3

because the value of `$my_mx` is interpreted as a single mailbox named “+mailbox1 +mailbox2” and not two distinct mailboxes.

## 28. Reading Initialization Commands From Another File

Usage:

`source` `filename` [ `filename` ...]

This command allows the inclusion of initialization commands from other files. For example, I place all of my aliases in `~/.mail_aliases` so that I can make my `~/.neomuttrc` readable and keep my aliases private.

If the filename begins with a tilde (“~”), it will be expanded to the path of your home directory.

If the filename is relative and the command source is executed from the context of a configuration file, then the filename is interpreted relative to the directory of that configuration file. If the command is executed outside of a configuration file, e.g. from the prompt, then the filename is interpreted relative to the current working directory (see cd on how to change the current working directory at runtime).

### Note

A hook remembers the configuration file it was defined in and sets the context to that file when executing its commands. As a result a source command inside a hook is executed in the context of the configuration file the hook was defined in. Thus relative filenames are interpreted relative to the configuration file the hook is defined in.

If the filename ends with a vertical bar (“|”), then filename is considered to be an executable program from which to read input (e.g. `source ~/bin/myscript|`).

## 29. Removing Hooks

Usage:

`unhook` { `*` | `hook-type` }

This command permits you to flush hooks you have previously defined. You can either remove all hooks by giving the “*” character as an argument, or you can remove all hooks of a specific type by saying something like `unhook send-hook`.

## 30. Format Strings

### 30.1. Basic usage

Format strings are a general concept you'll find in several locations through the NeoMutt configuration, especially in the $index_format, $pager_format, $status_format, and other related variables. These can be very straightforward, and it's quite possible you already know how to use them.

The most basic format string element is a percent symbol followed by another character. For example, `%s` represents a message's Subject: header in the $index_format variable. The “expandos” available are documented with each format variable, but there are general modifiers available with all formatting expandos, too. Those are our concern here.

Some of the modifiers are borrowed right out of C (though you might know them from Perl, Python, shell, or another language). These are the `[-]m.n` modifiers, as in `%-12.12s`. As with such programming languages, these modifiers allow you to specify the minimum and maximum size of the resulting string, as well as its justification. If the “-” sign follows the percent, the string will be left-justified instead of right-justified. If there's a number immediately following that, it's the minimum amount of space the formatted string will occupy – if it's naturally smaller than that, it will be padded out with spaces. If a decimal point and another number follow, that's the maximum space allowable – the string will not be permitted to exceed that width, no matter its natural size. Each of these three elements is optional, so that all these are legal format strings: `%-12s`, `%4c`, `%.15F` and `%-12.15L`.

NeoMutt adds some other modifiers to format strings. If you use an equals symbol (`=`) as a numeric prefix (like the minus above), it will force the string to be centered within its minimum space range. For example, `%=14y` will reserve 14 characters for the %y expansion – that's the set of message keywords (formerly X-Label). If the expansion results in a string less than 14 characters, it will be centered in a 14-character space. If the X-Label for a message were “test”, that expansion would look like “ test ”.

There are two very little-known modifiers that affect the way that an expando is replaced. If there is an underline (“_”) character between any format modifiers (as above) and the expando letter, it will expands in all lower case. And if you use a colon (“:”), it will replace all decimal points with underlines.

### 30.2. Conditionals

Depending on the format string variable, some of its sequences can be used to optionally print a string if their value is nonzero. For example, you may only want to see the number of flagged messages if such messages exist, since zero is not particularly meaningful. To optionally print a string based upon one of the above sequences, the following construct is used:

    %<sequence_char?optional_string>

where sequence_char is an expando, and optional_string is the string you would like printed if sequence_char is nonzero. optional_string may contain other sequences as well as normal text, but you may not nest optional strings.

Here is an example illustrating how to optionally print the number of new messages (`%n`) in a mailbox in $status_format:

    %<n?%n new messages>

You can also switch between two strings using the following construct:

    %<sequence_char?if_string&else_string>

If the value of sequence_char is non-zero, if_string will be expanded, otherwise else_string will be expanded.

The conditional sequences can also be nested by using the %< and > operators. The %? notation can still be used but requires quoting. For example:

    %<x?true&false>
    %<x?%<y?%<z?xyz&xy>&x>&none>

For more examples, see Section 28, “Nested If Feature”

### 30.3. Filters

Any format string ending in a vertical bar (“|”) will be expanded and piped through the first word in the string, using spaces as separator. The string returned will be used for display. If the returned string ends in %, it will be passed through the formatter a second time. This allows the filter to generate a replacement format string including % expandos.

All % expandos in a format string are expanded before the script is called so that:

Example 3.20. Using external filters in format strings

    set status_format="script.sh '%r %f (%L)'|"

will make NeoMutt expand `%r`, `%f` and `%L` before calling the script. The example also shows that arguments can be quoted: the script will receive the expanded string between the single quotes as the only argument.

A practical example is the `mutt_xtitle` script installed in the `samples` subdirectory of the NeoMutt documentation: it can be used as filter for $status_format to set the current terminal's title, if supported.

### 30.4. Padding

In most format strings, NeoMutt supports different types of padding using special %-expandos:

`%|X`

  When this occurs, NeoMutt will fill the rest of the line with the character `X`. For example, filling the rest of the line with dashes is done by setting:

      set status_format = "%v on %h: %B: %<n?%n&no> new messages %|-"

`%>X`

  Since the previous expando stops at the end of line, there must be a way to fill the gap between two items via the `%>X` expando: it puts as many characters `X` in between two items so that the rest of the line will be right-justified. For example, to not put the version string and hostname the above example on the left but on the right and fill the gap with spaces, one might use (note the space after `%>`):

      set status_format = "%B: %<n?%n&no> new messages %> (%v on %h)"

`%*X`

  Normal right-justification will print everything to the left of the `%>`, displaying padding and whatever lies to the right only if there's room. By contrast, “soft-fill” gives priority to the right-hand side, guaranteeing space to display it and showing padding only if there's still room. If necessary, soft-fill will eat text leftwards to make room for rightward text. For example, to right-justify the subject making sure as much as possible of it fits on screen, one might use (note two spaces after `%*`: the second ensures there's a space between the truncated right-hand side and the subject):

      set index_format="%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>)%*  %s"

### 30.5. Conditional Dates

This feature allows the format of dates in the index to vary based on how recent the message is. This is especially useful in combination with the nested-if feature.

For example, using `%<[y?%<[d?%[%H:%M]&%[%m/%d]>&%[%y.%m]>` for the date in the `$index_format` will produce a display like:

       1   + 14.12 Grace Hall      (   13) Gulliver's Travels
       2   + 10/02 Callum Harrison (   48) Huckleberry Finn
       3     12:17 Rhys Lee        (   42) The Lord Of The Rings

### 30.6. Bytes size display

Various format strings contain expandos that display the size of messages in bytes. This includes `%s` in $attach_format, `%l` in $compose_format, `%s` in $folder_format, `%c` and `%cr` in $index_format, and %l and %L in $status_format. There are four configuration variables that can be used to customize how the numbers are displayed.

$size_show_bytes will display the number of bytes when the size is < 1 kilobyte. When unset, kilobytes will be displayed instead.

$size_show_mb will display the number of megabytes when the size is >= 1 megabyte. When unset, kilobytes will be displayed instead (which could be a large number).

$size_show_fractions, will display numbers with a single decimal place for values from 0 to 10 kilobytes, and 1 to 10 megabytes.

$size_units_on_left will display the unit (“K” or “M”) to the left of the number, instead of the right if unset.

These variables also affect size display in a few other places, such as progress indicators and attachment delimiters in the pager.

## 31. Control allowed header fields in a mailto: URL

Usage:

`mailto_allow` { `*` | `header-field` ... }
`unmailto_allow` { `*` | `header-field` ... }

As a security measure, NeoMutt will only add user-approved header fields from a `mailto:` URL. This is necessary since NeoMutt will handle certain header fields, such as `Attach:`, in a special way. The `mailto_allow` and `unmailto_allow` commands allow the user to modify the list of approved headers.

NeoMutt initializes the default list to contain only the `Subject` and `Body` header fields, which are the only requirement specified by the `mailto:` specification in RFC2368, and the `Cc`, `In-Reply-To`, `References` headers to aid with replies to mailing lists.

# Chapter 4. Advanced Usage

## 1. Character Set Handling

A “character set” is basically a mapping between bytes and glyphs and implies a certain character encoding scheme. For example, for the ISO 8859 family of character sets, an encoding of 8bit per character is used. For the Unicode character set, different character encodings may be used, UTF-8 being the most popular. In UTF-8, a character is represented using a variable number of bytes ranging from 1 to 4.

Since NeoMutt is a command-line tool run from a shell, and delegates certain tasks to external tools (such as an editor for composing/editing messages), all of these tools need to agree on a character set and encoding. There exists no way to reliably deduce the character set a plain text file has. Interoperability is gained by the use of well-defined environment variables. The full set can be printed by issuing `locale` on the command line.

Upon startup, NeoMutt determines the character set on its own using routines that inspect locale-specific environment variables. Therefore, it is generally not necessary to set the `$charset` variable in NeoMutt. It may even be counter-productive as NeoMutt uses system and library functions that derive the character set themselves and on which NeoMutt has no influence. It's safest to let NeoMutt work out the locale setup itself.

If you happen to work with several character sets on a regular basis, it's highly advisable to use Unicode and an UTF-8 locale. Unicode can represent nearly all characters in a message at the same time. When not using a Unicode locale, it may happen that you receive messages with characters not representable in your locale. When displaying such a message, or replying to or forwarding it, information may get lost possibly rendering the message unusable (not only for you but also for the recipient, this breakage is not reversible as lost information cannot be guessed).

A Unicode locale makes all conversions superfluous which eliminates the risk of conversion errors. It also eliminates potentially wrong expectations about the character set between NeoMutt and external programs.

The terminal emulator used also must be properly configured for the current locale. Terminal emulators usually do not derive the locale from environment variables, they need to be configured separately. If the terminal is incorrectly configured, NeoMutt may display random and unexpected characters (question marks, octal codes, or just random glyphs), format strings may not work as expected, you may not be abled to enter non-ascii characters, and possible more. Data is always represented using bytes and so a correct setup is very important as to the machine, all character sets “look” the same.

Warning: A mismatch between what system and library functions think the locale is and what NeoMutt was told what the locale is may make it behave badly with non-ascii input: it will fail at seemingly random places. This warning is to be taken seriously since not only local mail handling may suffer: sent messages may carry wrong character set information the receiver has too deal with. The need to set `$charset` directly in most cases points at terminal and environment variable setup problems, not NeoMutt problems.

A list of officially assigned and known character sets can be found at IANA, a list of locally supported locales can be obtained by running `locale -a`.

## 2. Regular Expressions

All string patterns in NeoMutt including those in more complex patterns must be specified using regular expressions (regex) in the “POSIX extended” syntax (which is more or less the syntax used by egrep and GNU awk). For your convenience, we have included below a brief description of this syntax.

The search is case sensitive if the regular expression contains at least one upper case letter, and case insensitive otherwise.

### Note

“\” must be quoted if used for a regular expression in an initialization command: “\\”.

A regular expression is a pattern that describes a set of strings. Regular expressions are constructed analogously to arithmetic expressions, by using various operators to combine smaller expressions.

### Note

The regular expression can be enclosed/delimited by either " or ' which is useful if the regular expression includes a white-space character. See Syntax of Initialization Files for more information on " and ' delimiter processing. To match a literal " or ' you must preface it with \ (backslash).

The fundamental building blocks are the regular expressions that match a single character. Most characters, including all letters and digits, are regular expressions that match themselves. Any metacharacter with special meaning may be quoted by preceding it with a backslash.

The following matches a literal dot “.” in an address:

Example 4.1. Matching a literal dot

    # no quotes
    alternates only\\.dot@example\\.org

    # single quotes
    lists 'only\.dot@example\.org'

    # Double quotes
    subscribe "only\\.dot@example\\.org"

The period “.” matches any single character. The caret “^” and the dollar sign “$” are metacharacters that respectively match the empty string at the beginning and end of a line.

A list of characters enclosed by “[” and “]” matches any single character in that list; if the first character of the list is a caret “^” then it matches any character not in the list. For example, the regular expression [0123456789] matches any single digit. A range of ASCII characters may be specified by giving the first and last characters, separated by a hyphen “-”. Most metacharacters lose their special meaning inside lists. To include a literal “]” place it first in the list. Similarly, to include a literal “^” place it anywhere but first. Finally, to include a literal hyphen “-” place it last.

Certain named classes of characters are predefined. Character classes consist of “[:”, a keyword denoting the class, and “:]”. The following classes are defined by the POSIX standard in Table 4.1, “POSIX regular expression character classes”

Table 4.1. POSIX regular expression character classes

Character class | Description
--- | ---
[:alnum:] | Alphanumeric characters
[:alpha:] | Alphabetic characters
[:blank:] | Space or tab characters
[:cntrl:] | Control characters
[:digit:] | Numeric characters
[:graph:] | Characters that are both printable and visible. (A space is printable, but not visible, while an “a” is both)
[:lower:] | Lower-case alphabetic characters
[:print:] | Printable characters (characters that are not control characters)
[:punct:] | Punctuation characters (characters that are not letter, digits, control characters, or space characters)
[:space:] | Space characters (such as space, tab and formfeed, to name a few)
[:upper:] | Upper-case alphabetic characters
[:xdigit:] | Characters that are hexadecimal digits

A character class is only valid in a regular expression inside the brackets of a character list.

### Note

Note that the brackets in these class names are part of the symbolic names, and must be included in addition to the brackets delimiting the bracket list. For example, [[:digit:]] is equivalent to [0-9].

Two additional special sequences can appear in character lists. These apply to non-ASCII character sets, which can have single symbols (called collating elements) that are represented with more than one character, as well as several characters that are equivalent for collating or sorting purposes:

Collating Symbols

  A collating symbol is a multi-character collating element enclosed in “[.” and “.]”. For example, if “ch” is a collating element, then [[.ch.]] is a regex that matches this collating element, while [ch] is a regex that matches either “c” or “h”.

Equivalence Classes

  An equivalence class is a locale-specific name for a list of characters that are equivalent. The name is enclosed in “[=” and “=]”. For example, the name “e” might be used to represent all of “e” with grave (“è”), “e” with acute (“é”) and “e”. In this case, [[=e=]] is a regex that matches any of: “e” with grave (“è”), “e” with acute (“é”) and “e”.

A regular expression matching a single character may be followed by one of several repetition operators described in Table 4.2, “Regular expression repetition operators”.

Table 4.2. Regular expression repetition operators

Operator | Description
--- | ---
? | The preceding item is optional and matched at most once
* | The preceding item will be matched zero or more times
+ | The preceding item will be matched one or more times
{n} | The preceding item is matched exactly n times
{n,} | The preceding item is matched n or more times
{,m} | The preceding item is matched at most m times
{n,m} | The preceding item is matched at least n times, but no more than m times

Two regular expressions may be concatenated; the resulting regular expression matches any string formed by concatenating two substrings that respectively match the concatenated subexpressions.

Two regular expressions may be joined by the infix operator “|”; the resulting regular expression matches any string matching either subexpression.

Repetition takes precedence over concatenation, which in turn takes precedence over alternation. A whole subexpression may be enclosed in parentheses to override these precedence rules.

### Note

If you compile NeoMutt with the included regular expression engine, the following operators may also be used in regular expressions as described in Table 4.3, “GNU regular expression extensions”.

Table 4.3. GNU regular expression extensions

Expression | Description
--- | ---
\y | Matches the empty string at either the beginning or the end of a word
\B | Matches the empty string within a word
\< | Matches the empty string at the beginning of a word
\> | Matches the empty string at the end of a word
\w | Matches any word-constituent character (letter, digit, or underscore)
\W | Matches any character that is not word-constituent
\` | Matches the empty string at the beginning of a buffer (string)
\' | Matches the empty string at the end of a buffer

Please note however that these operators are not defined by POSIX, so they may or may not be available in stock libraries on various systems.

## 3. Patterns: Searching, Limiting and Tagging

### 3.1. Pattern Modifier

Many of NeoMutt's commands allow you to specify a pattern to match (`limit`, `tag-pattern`, `delete-pattern`, etc.). Table 4.4, “Pattern modifiers” shows several ways to select messages while Table 4.5, “Alias pattern modifiers” shows ways of selecting aliases.

Table 4.4. Pattern modifiers

Pattern modifier | Notes | Description
--- | --- | ---
~A |  | all messages
~b EXPR | d) | messages which contain EXPR in the message body
=b STRING |  | If IMAP is enabled, like ~b but searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally.
~B EXPR | d) | messages which contain EXPR in the whole message
=B STRING |  | If IMAP is enabled, like ~B but searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally.
~c EXPR |  | messages carbon-copied to EXPR
%c GROUP |  | messages carbon-copied to any member of GROUP
~C EXPR |  | messages either to:, cc: or bcc: EXPR
%C GROUP |  | messages either to:, cc: or bcc: to any member of GROUP
~d [MIN]-[MAX] |  | messages with “date-sent” in a Date range
~D |  | deleted messages
~e EXPR |  | messages which contains EXPR in the “Sender” field
%e GROUP |  | messages which contain a member of GROUP in the “Sender” field
~E |  | expired messages
~F |  | flagged messages
~f EXPR |  | messages originating from EXPR
%f GROUP |  | messages originating from any member of GROUP
~g |  | cryptographically signed messages
~G |  | cryptographically encrypted messages
~h EXPR | d) | messages which contain EXPR in the message header
=h STRING |  | If IMAP is enabled, like ~h but searches for STRING on the server, rather than downloading each message and searching it locally; STRING must be of the form “header: substring”(see below).
~H EXPR |  | messages with a spam attribute matching EXPR
~i EXPR |  | messages which match EXPR in the “Message-ID” field
~I QUERY |  | messages whose “Message-ID” field is included in the results returned from an external search program, when the program is run with QUERY as its argument. This is explained in greater detail in the variable reference entry Section 3.94, “external_search_command”,
~k |  | messages which contain PGP key material
~K EXPR |  | messages blind carbon-copied to EXPR
~L EXPR |  | messages either originated or received by EXPR
%L GROUP |  | message either originated or received by any member of GROUP
~l |  | messages addressed to a known mailing list
~m [MIN]-[MAX] | c) | messages with numbers in the range MIN to MAX
~m <[MAX] | c) | messages with numbers less than MAX
~m >[MIN] | c) | messages with numbers greater than MIN
~m [M] | c) | just message number M
~m [MIN],[MAX] | c) | messages with offsets (from selected message) in the range MIN to MAX
~M EXPR | d) | messages which contain a mime Content-Type matching EXPR
~n [MIN]-[MAX] | a) | messages with a score in the range MIN to MAX
~N |  | new messages
~O |  | old messages
~p |  | messages addressed to you (consults $from, alternates, and local account/hostname information)
~P |  | messages from you (consults $from, alternates, and local account/hostname information)
~Q |  | messages which have been replied to
~r [MIN]-[MAX] |  | messages with “date-received” in a Date range
~R |  | read messages
~s EXPR |  | messages having EXPR in the “Subject” field.
~S |  | superseded messages
~t EXPR |  | messages addressed to EXPR
~T |  | tagged messages
~u |  | messages addressed to a subscribed mailing list
~U |  | unread messages
~v |  | messages part of a collapsed thread.
~V |  | cryptographically verified messages
~w EXPR |  | newsgroups matching EXPR
~x EXPR |  | messages which contain EXPR in the “References” or “In-Reply-To” field
~X [MIN]-[MAX] | a), d) | messages with MIN to MAX attachments
~y EXPR |  | messages which contain EXPR in their keywords
~Y EXPR |  | messages whose tags match EXPR
~z [MIN]-[MAX] | a), b) | messages with a size in the range MIN to MAX
=/ STRING |  | IMAP custom server-side search for STRING. Currently only defined for Gmail. See: Gmail Patterns
~= |  | duplicated messages (see $duplicate_threads)
~# |  | broken threads (see $strict_threads)
~$ |  | unreferenced messages (requires threaded view)
~(PATTERN) |  | messages in threads containing messages matching PATTERN, e.g. all threads containing messages from you: ~(~P)
~<(PATTERN) |  | messages whose immediate parent matches PATTERN, e.g. replies to your messages: ~<(~P)
~>(PATTERN) |  | messages having an immediate child matching PATTERN, e.g. messages you replied to: ~>(~P)

Table 4.5. Alias pattern modifiers

Pattern modifier | Notes | Description
--- | --- | ---
~c EXPR |  | aliases which contain EXPR in the alias comment
~f EXPR |  | aliases which contain EXPR in the alias name (From part of alias)
~t EXPR |  | aliases which contain EXPR in the alias address (To part of alias)

Where EXPR is a regular expression, and GROUP is an address group.

a) The forms “<[MAX]”, “>[MIN]”, “[MIN]-” and “-[MAX]” are allowed, too.

b) The suffixes “K” and “M” are allowed to specify kilobyte and megabyte respectively.

c) The message number ranges (introduced by `~m`) are even more general and powerful than the other types of ranges. Read on and see Section 3.1.1, “Message Ranges” below.

d) These patterns read each message in, and can therefore be much slower. Over IMAP this will entail downloading each message. They can not be used for message scoring, and it is recommended to avoid using them for index coloring.

Special attention has to be paid when using regular expressions inside of patterns. Specifically, NeoMutt's parser for these patterns will strip one level of backslash (“\”), which is normally used for quoting. If it is your intention to use a backslash in the regular expression, you will need to use two backslashes instead (“\\”).

Example 4.2. Using `\s` and matching a literal dot in patterns

    # no quotes
    save-hook ~h\ list-id:\\\\s*<only\\\\.dot>    '=archive'
    save-hook ~hlist-id:\\\\s*<only\\\\.dot-here> '=archive'

    # single quotes
    save-hook '~h list-id:\\s<only\\.dot>'        '=archive'
    save-hook ~h'list-id:\\s*<only\\.dot-here>'   '=archive'

    # Double quotes
    save-hook "~h list-id:\\\\s<only\\\\.dot>"    '=archive'
    save-hook ~h"list-id:\\\\s*<only\\\\.dot>"    '=archive'

You can force NeoMutt to treat EXPR as a simple substring instead of a regular expression by using = instead of ~ in the pattern name. For example, `=b *.*` will find all messages that contain the literal string “*.*”. Simple string matches are less powerful than regular expressions but can be considerably faster.

For IMAP folders, string matches `=b`, `=B`, and `=h` will be performed on the server instead of by fetching every message. IMAP treats `=h` specially: it must be of the form “header: substring” and will not partially match header names. The substring part may be omitted if you simply wish to find messages containing a particular header without regard to its value.

Patterns matching lists of addresses (notably c, C, p, P and t) match if there is at least one match in the whole list. If you want to make sure that all elements of that list match, you need to prefix your pattern with “^”. This example matches all mails which only has recipients from Germany.

Example 4.3. Matching all addresses in address lists

    ^~C \.de$

You can restrict address pattern matching to aliases that you have defined with the "@" modifier. This example matches messages whose recipients are all from Germany, and who are known to your alias list.

Example 4.4. Matching restricted to aliases

    ^@~C \.de$

To match any defined alias, use a regular expression that matches any string. This example matches messages whose senders are known aliases.

Example 4.5. Matching any defined alias

    @~f .

#### 3.1.1. Message Ranges

If a message number range (from now on: MNR) contains a comma (`,`), it is a relative MNR. That means the numbers denote offsets from the highlighted message. For example:

Table 4.6. Relative Message Number Ranges

Pattern | Explanation
--- | ---
`~m -2,2` | Previous 2, highlighted and next 2 emails
`~m 0,1` | Highlighted and next email

In addition to numbers, either side of the range can also contain one of the special characters (shortcuts) `.^$`. The meaning is:

Table 4.7. Message Number Shortcuts

Shortcut | Explanation | Example | Meaning
--- | --- | --- | ---
`.` | Current / Highlighted | `~m -3,.` | Previous 3 emails plus the highlighted one
`$` | Last | `~m .,$` | Highlighted email and all the later ones
`^` | First | `~m ^,1` | Highlighted, next and all preceding ones

Lastly, you can also leave either side of the range blank, to make it extend as far as possible. For example, `~m ,1` has the same meaning as the last example in Table 4.7, “Message Number Shortcuts”.

Otherwise, if a MNR doesn't contain a comma, the meaning is similar to other ranges, except that the shortcuts are still available. Examples:

Table 4.8. Absolute Message Number Ranges

Pattern | Explanation
--- | ---
`~m 3-10` | Emails 3 to 10
`~m -10` | Emails 1 to 10
`~m 10-` | Emails 10 to last
`~m <3` | First and second email
`~m ^-2` | First and second email
`~m >1` | Everything but first email
`~m 2-$` | Everything but first email
`~m 2` | Just the second email

### 3.2. Simple Searches

NeoMutt supports two versions of so called “simple searches”. These are issued if the query entered for searching, limiting and similar operations does not seem to contain a valid pattern modifier (i.e. it does not contain one of these characters: “~”, “=” or “%”). If the query is supposed to contain one of these special characters, they must be escaped by prepending a backslash (“\”).

The first type is by checking whether the query string equals a keyword case-insensitively from Table 4.9, “Simple search keywords”: If that is the case, NeoMutt will use the shown pattern modifier instead. If a keyword would conflict with your search keyword, you need to turn it into a regular expression to avoid matching the keyword table. For example, if you want to find all messages matching “flag” (using $simple_search) but don't want to match flagged messages, simply search for “`[f]lag`”.

Table 4.9. Simple search keywords

Keyword | Pattern modifier
--- | ---
all | ~A
. | ~A
^ | ~A
del | ~D
flag | ~F
new | ~N
old | ~O
repl | ~Q
read | ~R
tag | ~T
unread | ~U

The second type of simple search is to build a complex search pattern using $simple_search as a template. NeoMutt will insert your query properly quoted and search for the composed complex query.

### 3.3. Nesting and Boolean Operators

Logical AND is performed by specifying more than one criterion. For example:

    ~t work ~f smith

would select messages which contain the word “work” in the list of recipients and that have the word “smith” in the “From” header field.

NeoMutt also recognizes the following operators to create more complex search patterns:

- ! – logical NOT operator

- | – logical OR operator

- () – logical grouping operator

Here is an example illustrating a complex search pattern. This pattern will select all messages which do not contain “work” in the “To” or “Cc” field and which are from “smith”.

Example 4.6. Using boolean operators in patterns

    !(~t work|~c work) ~f smith

Here is an example using white space in the regular expression (note the “'” and “"” delimiters). For this to match, the mail's subject must match the “^Junk +From +Me$” and it must be from either “Jim +Somebody” or “Ed +SomeoneElse”:

    '~s "^Junk +From +Me$" ~f ("Jim +Somebody"|"Ed +SomeoneElse")'

### Note

If a regular expression contains parenthesis, or a vertical bar ("|"), you must enclose the expression in double or single quotes since those characters are also used to separate different parts of NeoMutt's pattern language. For example: `~f "user@(home\.org|work\.com)"` Without the quotes, the parenthesis wouldn't end. This would be separated to two OR'd patterns: ~f user@(home\.org and work\.com). They are never what you want.

### 3.4. Searching by Date

NeoMutt supports two types of dates, absolute and relative.

#### 3.4.1. Absolute Dates

Dates must be in DD/MM/YY format (month and year are optional, defaulting to the current month and year) or YYYYMMDD. An example of a valid range of dates is:

    Limit to messages matching: ~d 20/1/95-31/10
    Limit to messages matching: ~d 19950120-19951031

If you omit the minimum (first) date, and just specify “-DD/MM/YY” or “-YYYYMMDD”, all messages before the given date will be selected. If you omit the maximum(second) date, and specify “DD/MM/YY-”, all messages after the given date will be selected. If you specify a single date with no dash (“-”), only messages sent on the given date will be selected.

You can add error margins to absolute dates. An error margin is a sign (+ or -), followed by a digit, followed by one of the units in Table 4.10, “Date units”. As a special case, you can replace the sign by a “*” character, which is equivalent to giving identical plus and minus error margins.

Table 4.10. Date units

Unit | Description
--- | ---
y | Years
m | Months
w | Weeks
d | Days

Example: To select any messages two weeks around January 15, 2001, you'd use the following pattern:

    Limit to messages matching: ~d 15/1/2001*2w

#### 3.4.2. Relative Dates

This type of date is relative to the current date, and may be specified as:

- > offset for messages older than offset units

- < offset for messages newer than offset units

- = offset for messages exactly offset units old

offset is specified as a positive number with one of the units from Table 4.11, “Relative date units”.

Table 4.11. Relative date units

Unit | Description
--- | ---
y | Years
m | Months
w | Weeks
d | Days
H | Hours
M | Minutes
S | Seconds

Example: to select messages less than 1 month old, you would use

    Limit to messages matching: ~d <1m

### Note

All dates used when searching are relative to the local time zone, so unless you change the setting of your $index_format to include a `%[...]` format, these are not the dates shown in the main index.

### 3.5. Gmail Patterns

`=/ "search terms"` invokes server-side search, passing along the search terms provided. Search results are constrained by IMAP to be within the current folder. At present this only supports Gmail's search API IMAP extension. The search language is entirely up to the mail provider and changes at their discretion. Using `~/` will silently fail.

For up-to-date information about searching, see: Gmail's Support Page. You will need to (once) use a web-browser to visit Settings/Labels and enable "Show in IMAP" for "All Mail". When searching, visit that folder in NeoMutt to most closely match Gmail search semantics.

Table 4.12. Gmail Example Patterns

Pattern | Matches
--- | ---
`=/ "list:foo.example.org has:attachment is:important"` | the foo.example.org mailing-list per Gmail's definitions, and has an attachment, and has been marked as important
`=/ "{has:purple-star has:yellow-star} older_than:2m"` | is older than two months and has either a purple-star or a yellow-star

## 4. Marking Messages

There are times that it's useful to ask NeoMutt to "remember" which message you're currently looking at, while you move elsewhere in your mailbox. You can do this with the “mark-message” operator, which is bound to the “~” key by default. Press this key to enter an identifier for the marked message. When you want to return to this message, press “'” and the name that you previously entered.

(Message marking is really just a shortcut for defining a macro that returns you to the current message by searching for its Message-ID. You can choose a different prefix by setting the $mark_macro_prefix variable.)

## 5. Using Tags

Sometimes it is desirable to perform an operation on a group of messages all at once rather than one at a time. An example might be to save messages to a mailing list to a separate folder, or to delete all messages with a given subject. To tag all messages matching a pattern, use the `<tag-pattern>` function, which is bound to “shift-T” by default. Patterns are completable in the editor menu. Invoke the `<complete>` function (by default bound to “Tab”) after typing “~” to get a selectable list. Or you can select individual messages by hand using the `<tag-message>` function, which is bound to “t” by default. See patterns for NeoMutt's pattern matching syntax.

Once you have tagged the desired messages, you can use the “tag-prefix” operator, which is the “;” (semicolon) key by default. When the “tag-prefix” operator is used, the next operation will be applied to all tagged messages if that operation can be used in that manner. If the $auto_tag variable is set, the next operation applies to the tagged messages automatically, without requiring the “tag-prefix”.

In macros or push commands, you can use the `<tag-prefix-cond>` operator. If there are no tagged messages, NeoMutt will “eat” the rest of the macro to abort its execution. NeoMutt will stop “eating” the macro when it encounters the `<end-cond>` operator; after this operator the rest of the macro will be executed as normal.

## 6. Using Hooks

A hook is a concept found in many other programs which allows you to execute arbitrary commands before performing some operation. For example, you may wish to tailor your configuration based upon which mailbox you are reading, or to whom you are sending mail. In the NeoMutt world, a hook consists of a regular expression or pattern along with a configuration option/command. See:

- account-hook

- charset-hook

  iconv-hook

- index-format-hook

- crypt-hook

- fcc-save-hook

  fcc-hook

  save-hook

- folder-hook

- mbox-hook

- message-hook

- open-hook

  close-hook

  append-hook

- reply-hook

  send-hook

  send2-hook

- timeout-hook

  startup-hook

  shutdown-hook

- unhook

for specific details on each type of hook available. Also see Message Composition Flow for an overview of the composition process.

### Note

If a hook changes configuration settings, these changes remain effective until the end of the current NeoMutt session. As this is generally not desired, a “default” hook needs to be added before all other hooks of that type to restore configuration defaults.

Example 4.7. Specifying a “default” hook

    send-hook . 'unmy_hdr From:'
    send-hook ~C'^b@b\\.b$' my_hdr from: c@c.c

In Example 4.7, “Specifying a “default” hook”, by default the value of $from and $real_name is not overridden. When sending messages either To: or Cc: to `<b@b.b>`, the From: header is changed to `<c@c.c>`.

### 6.1. Message Matching in Hooks

Hooks that act upon messages (message-hook, reply-hook, send-hook, send2-hook, save-hook, fcc-hook, index-format-hook) are evaluated in a slightly different manner. For the other types of hooks, a regular expression is sufficient. But in dealing with messages a finer grain of control is needed for matching since for different purposes you want to match different criteria.

NeoMutt allows the use of the search pattern language for matching messages in hook commands. This works in exactly the same way as it would when limiting or searching the mailbox, except that you are restricted to those operators which match information NeoMutt extracts from the header of the message (i.e., from, to, cc, date, subject, etc.).

For example, if you wanted to set your return address based upon sending mail to a specific address, you could do something like:

    send-hook '~t ^user@work\\.com$' 'my_hdr From: John Smith <user@host>'

which would execute the given command when sending mail to user@work.com.

However, it is not required that you write the pattern to match using the full searching language. You can still specify a simple regular expression like the other hooks, in which case NeoMutt will translate your pattern into the full language, using the translation specified by the $default_hook variable. The pattern is translated at the time the hook is declared, so the value of $default_hook that is in effect at that time will be used.

### 6.2. Mailbox Matching in Hooks

Hooks that match against mailboxes (folder-hook, mbox-hook) apply both regular expression syntax as well as mailbox shortcut expansion on the regex parameter. There is some overlap between these, so special attention should be paid to the first character of the regex.

    # Here, ^ will expand to "the current mailbox" not "beginning of string":
    folder-hook ^/home/user/Mail/bar "set sort=threads"
    # If you want ^ to be interpreted as "beginning of string", one workaround
    # is to enclose the regex in parenthesis:
    folder-hook (^/home/user/Mail/bar) "set sort=threads"
    # This will expand to the default save folder for the alias "imap.example.com", which
    # is probably not what you want:
    folder-hook @imap\\.example\\.com "set sort=threads"
    # A workaround is to use parenthesis or a backslash:
    folder-hook (@imap\\.example\\.com) "set sort=threads"
    folder-hook '\@imap\.example\.com' "set sort=threads"

Keep in mind that mailbox shortcut expansion on the regex parameter takes place when the hook is initially parsed, not when the hook is matching against a mailbox. When NeoMutt starts up and is reading the .neomuttrc, some mailbox shortcuts may not be usable. For example, the "current mailbox" shortcut, ^, will expand to an empty string because no mailbox has been opened yet. NeoMutt will issue an error for this case or if the mailbox shortcut results in an empty regex.

## 7. Managing the Environment

You can alter the environment that NeoMutt passes on to its child processes using the “setenv” and “unsetenv” commands. You can also query current environment values by adding a “?” character.

### Note

These follow NeoMutt-style syntax, not shell-style!

    setenv TERM vt100
    setenv ORGANIZATION "The NeoMutt Development Team"
    unsetenv DISPLAY
    setenv LESS?

Running setenv with no parameters will show a list of all the environment variables.

## 8. External Address Queries

NeoMutt supports connecting to external directory databases such as LDAP, ph/qi, bbdb, or NIS through a wrapper script which connects to NeoMutt using a simple interface. Using the $query_command variable, you specify the wrapper command to use. For example:

    set query_command = "mutt_ldap_query.pl %s"

The wrapper script should accept the query on the command-line. It should return a one line message, then each matching response on a single line, each line containing a tab separated address then name then some other optional information. On error, or if there are no matching addresses, return a non-zero exit code and a one line error message.

An example multiple response output:

    Searching database ... 70 entries ... 5 matching:
    ji@papaya.com   Jeremy Irons    Emmy, Oscar, Tony
    jc@damson.com   James Cagney    Oscar
    mr@ilama.com    Meg Ryan
    mjf@kumquat.com Michael J Fox
    ma@yew.com      Murray Abraham  Oscar

There are two mechanisms for accessing the query function of NeoMutt. One is to do a query from the index menu using the `<query>` function (default: Q). This will prompt for a query, then bring up the query menu which will list the matching responses. From the query menu, you can select addresses to create aliases, or to mail. You can tag multiple addresses to mail, start a new query, or have a new query appended to the current responses.

The other mechanism for accessing the query function is for address completion, similar to the alias completion. In any prompt for address entry, you can use the `<complete-query>` function (default: ^T) to run a query based on the current address you have typed. Like aliases, NeoMutt will look for what you have typed back to the last space or comma. If there is a single response for that query, NeoMutt will expand the address in place. If there are multiple responses, NeoMutt will activate the query menu. At the query menu, you can select one or more addresses to be added to the prompt.

### Note

The query menu is affected by $sort_alias, thus overruling the order of entries as generated by $query_command.

## 9. Mailbox Formats

NeoMutt supports reading and writing of four different local mailbox formats: mbox, MMDF, MH and Maildir. The mailbox type is auto detected, so there is no need to use a flag for different mailbox types. When creating new mailboxes, NeoMutt uses the default specified with the $mbox_type variable. A short description of the formats follows.

mbox. This is a widely used mailbox format for UNIX. All messages are stored in a single file. Each message has a line of the form:

    From me@ox.ac.uk Fri, 11 Apr 1997 11:44:56 PST

to denote the start of a new message (this is often referred to as the “From_” line). The mbox format requires mailbox locking, is prone to mailbox corruption with concurrently writing clients or misinterpreted From_ lines. Depending on the environment, new mail detection can be unreliable. Mbox folders are fast to open and easy to archive.

MMDF. This is a variant of the mbox format. Each message is surrounded by lines containing “^A^A^A^A” (four times control-A's). The same problems as for mbox apply (also with finding the right message separator as four control-A's may appear in message bodies).

MH. A radical departure from mbox and MMDF, a mailbox consists of a directory and each message is stored in a separate file. The filename indicates the message number (however, this is may not correspond to the message number NeoMutt displays). Deleted messages are renamed with a comma (“,”) prepended to the filename. NeoMutt detects this type of mailbox by looking for either `.mh_sequences` or `.xmhcache` files (needed to distinguish normal directories from MH mailboxes). MH is more robust with concurrent clients writing the mailbox, but still may suffer from lost flags; message corruption is less likely to occur than with mbox/mmdf. It's usually slower to open compared to mbox/mmdf since many small files have to be read (NeoMutt provides Section 8.1, “Header Caching” to greatly speed this process up). Depending on the environment, MH is not very disk-space efficient.

Maildir. The newest of the mailbox formats, used by the Qmail MTA (a replacement for sendmail). Similar to MH, except that it adds three subdirectories of the mailbox: tmp, new and cur. Filenames for the messages are chosen in such a way they are unique, even when two programs are writing the mailbox over NFS, which means that no file locking is needed and corruption is very unlikely. Maildir maybe slower to open without caching in NeoMutt, it too is not very disk-space efficient depending on the environment. Since no additional files are used for metadata (which is embedded in the message filenames) and Maildir is locking-free, it's easy to sync across different machines using file-level synchronization tools.

## 10. Mailbox Shortcuts

There are a number of built in shortcuts which refer to specific mailboxes. These shortcuts can be used anywhere you are prompted for a file or mailbox path or in path-related configuration variables. Note that these only work at the beginning of a string.

Table 4.13. Mailbox shortcuts

Shortcut | Refers to...
--- | ---
`!` | your $spool_file (incoming) mailbox
`>` | your $mbox file
`<` | your $record file
`^` | the current mailbox
`-` or `!!` | the file you've last visited
`~` | your home directory
`=` or `+` | your $folder directory
@alias | to the default save folder as determined by the address of the alias

For example, to store a copy of outgoing messages in the folder they were composed in, a folder-hook can be used to set $record:

    folder-hook . 'set record=^'

Note: the current mailbox shortcut, “`^`”, has no value in some cases. No mailbox is opened when NeoMutt is invoked to send an email from the command-line. In interactive mode, NeoMutt reads the muttrc before opening the mailbox, so immediate expansion won't work as expected either. This can be an issue when trying to directly assign to $record, but also affects the fcc-hook mailbox, which is expanded immediately too. The folder-hook example above works because the command is executed later, when the folder-hook fires.

## 11. Handling Mailing Lists

NeoMutt has a few configuration options that make dealing with large amounts of mail easier. The first thing you must do is to let NeoMutt know what addresses you consider to be mailing lists (technically this does not have to be a mailing list, but that is what it is most often used for), and what lists you are subscribed to. This is accomplished through the use of the lists and subscribe commands in your `.neomuttrc`. Alternatively or additionally, you can set $auto_subscribe to automatically subscribe addresses found in a `List-Post` header.

Now that NeoMutt knows what your mailing lists are, it can do several things, the first of which is the ability to show the name of a list through which you received a message (i.e., of a subscribed list) in the index menu display. This is useful to distinguish between personal and list mail in the same mailbox. In the $index_format variable, the expando “%L” will print the string “To <list>” when “list” appears in the “To” field, and “Cc <list>” when it appears in the “Cc” field (otherwise it prints the name of the author).

Often times the “To” and “Cc” fields in mailing list messages tend to get quite large. Most people do not bother to remove the author of the message they reply to from the list, resulting in two or more copies being sent to that person. The `<list-reply>` function, which by default is bound to “L” in the index menu and pager, helps reduce the clutter by only replying to the known mailing list addresses instead of all recipients (except as specified by `Mail-Followup-To`, see below).

NeoMutt also supports the `Mail-Followup-To` header. When you send a message to a list of recipients which includes one or several known mailing lists, and if the $followup_to option is set, NeoMutt will generate a Mail-Followup-To header. If any of the recipients are subscribed mailing lists, this header will contain all the recipients to whom you send this message, but not your address. This indicates that group-replies or list-replies (also known as “followups”) to this message should only be sent to the original recipients of the message, and not separately to you - you'll receive your copy through one of the mailing lists you are subscribed to. If none of the recipients are subscribed mailing lists, the header will also contain your address, ensuring you receive a copy of replies.

Conversely, when group-replying or list-replying to a message which has a `Mail-Followup-To` header, NeoMutt will respect this header if the $honor_followup_to configuration variable is set. Using list-reply will in this case also make sure that the reply goes to the mailing list, even if it's not specified in the list of recipients in the `Mail-Followup-To`.

### Note

When header editing is enabled, you can create a `Mail-Followup-To` header manually. NeoMutt will only auto-generate this header if it doesn't exist when you send the message.

The other method some mailing list admins use is to generate a “Reply-To” field which points back to the mailing list address rather than the author of the message. This can create problems when trying to reply directly to the author in private, since most mail clients will automatically reply to the address given in the “Reply-To” field. NeoMutt uses the $reply_to variable to help decide which address to use. If set to ask-yes or ask-no, you will be prompted as to whether or not you would like to use the address given in the “Reply-To” field, or reply directly to the address given in the “From” field. When set to yes, the “Reply-To” field will be used when present.

You can change or delete the “X-Label:” field within NeoMutt using the “edit-label” command, bound to the “y” key by default. This works for tagged messages, too. While in the edit-label function, pressing the <complete> binding (TAB, by default) will perform completion against all labels currently in use.

Lastly, NeoMutt has the ability to sort the mailbox into threads. A thread is a group of messages which all relate to the same subject. This is usually organized into a tree-like structure where a message and all of its replies are represented graphically. If you've ever used a threaded news client, this is the same concept. It makes dealing with large volume mailing lists easier because you can easily delete uninteresting threads and quickly find topics of value.

## 12. Display Munging

Working within the confines of a console or terminal window, it is often useful to be able to modify certain information elements in a non-destructive way – to change how they display, without changing the stored value of the information itself. This is especially so of message subjects, which may often be polluted with extraneous metadata that either is reproduced elsewhere, or is of secondary interest.

`subjectrx` `regex` `replacement`
`unsubjectrx` { `*` | `regex` }

`subjectrx` specifies a regular expression which, if detected in a message subject, causes the subject to be replaced with the “replacement” value. The replacement is subject to substitutions in the same way as for the spam command: `%L` for the text to the left of the match, `%R` for text to the right of the match, and `%1` for the first subgroup in the match (etc). If you simply want to erase the match, set it to “%L%R”. Any number of `subjectrx` commands may coexist.

Note this well: the “replacement” value replaces the entire subject, not just the match!

`unsubjectrx` removes a given subjectrx from the substitution list. If `*` is used as the argument, all substitutions will be removed.

Example 4.8. Subject Munging

    # Erase [rt #12345] tags from Request Tracker (RT) e-mails
    subjectrx '\[rt #[0-9]+\] *' '%L%R'
    # Servicedesk is another RT that sends more complex subjects.
    # Keep the ticket number.
    subjectrx '\[servicedesk #([0-9]+)\] ([^.]+)\.([^.]+) - (new|open|pending|update) - ' '%L[#%1] %R'
    # Strip out annoying [listname] prefixes in subjects
    subjectrx '\[[^]]*\]:? *' '%L%R'

## 13. New Mail Detection

NeoMutt supports setups with multiple folders, allowing all of them to be monitored for new mail (see Section 16, “Monitoring Incoming Mail” for details).

### 13.1. How New Mail Detection Works

For Mbox and Mmdf folders, new mail is detected by comparing access and/or modification times of files: NeoMutt assumes a folder has new mail if it wasn't accessed after it was last modified. Utilities like `biff` or `frm` or any other program which accesses the mailbox might cause NeoMutt to never detect new mail for that mailbox if they do not properly reset the access time. Other possible causes of NeoMutt not detecting new mail in these folders are backup tools (updating access times) or filesystems mounted without access time update support (for Linux systems, see the `relatime` option).

### Note

Contrary to older NeoMutt releases, it now maintains the new mail status of a folder by properly resetting the access time if the folder contains at least one message which is neither read, nor deleted, nor marked as old.

In cases where new mail detection for Mbox or Mmdf folders appears to be unreliable, the $check_mbox_size option can be used to make NeoMutt track and consult file sizes for new mail detection instead which won't work for size-neutral changes.

New mail for Maildir is assumed if there is one message in the `new/` subdirectory which is not marked deleted (see $maildir_trash). For MH folders, a mailbox is considered having new mail if there's at least one message in the “unseen” sequence as specified by $mh_seq_unseen. Optionally, $new_mail_command can be configured to execute an external program every time new mail is detected in the current inbox.

NeoMutt does not poll POP3 folders for new mail, it only periodically checks the currently opened folder (if it's a POP3 folder).

For IMAP, by default NeoMutt uses recent message counts provided by the server to detect new mail. If the $imap_idle option is set, it'll use the IMAP IDLE extension if advertised by the server.

The $mail_check_recent option changes whether NeoMutt will notify you of new mail in an already visited mailbox. When set (the default) it will only notify you of new mail received since the last time you opened the mailbox. When unset, NeoMutt will notify you of any new mail in the mailbox.

### 13.2. Polling For New Mail

When in the index menu and being idle (also see $timeout), NeoMutt periodically checks for new mail in all folders which have been configured via the mailboxes command. The interval depends on the folder type: for local/IMAP folders it consults $mail_check and $pop_check_interval for POP folders.

Outside the index menu the directory browser supports checking for new mail using the `<check-new>` function which is unbound by default. Pressing TAB will bring up a menu showing the files specified by the mailboxes command, and indicate which contain new messages. NeoMutt will automatically enter this mode when invoked from the command line with the `-y` option, or from the index/pager via the `<browse-mailboxes>` function.

For the pager, index and directory browser menus, NeoMutt contains the `<mailbox-list>` function (bound to “.” by default) which will print a list of folders with new mail in the command line at the bottom of the screen.

For the index, by default NeoMutt displays the number of mailboxes with new mail in the status bar, please refer to the $status_format variable for details.

When changing folders, NeoMutt fills the prompt with the first folder from the mailboxes list containing new mail (if any), pressing `<Space>` will cycle through folders with new mail. The (by default unbound) function `<next-unread-mailbox>` in the index can be used to immediately open the next folder with unread mail (if any).

### 13.3. Monitoring New Mail

When the Inotify mechanism for monitoring of files is supported (Linux only) and not disabled at compilation time, NeoMutt immediately notifies about new mail for all folders configured via the mailboxes command. Dependent on mailbox format also added old mails are tracked (not for Maildir).

No configuration variables are available. Trace output is given when debugging is enabled via command line option `-d3`. The lower level 2 only shows errors, the higher level 5 all including raw Inotify events.

### Note

Getting events about new mail is limited to the capabilities of the underlying mechanism. inotify only reports local changes, i. e. new mail notification works for mails delivered by an agent on the same machine as NeoMutt, but not when delivered remotely on a network file system as nfs. also the monitoring handles might fail in rare conditions, so you better don't completely rely on this feature.

### Note

When using Maildir, you don't have to manually specify all your mailboxes. You can use this command instead:

    mailboxes `find ~/.mail/ -type d -name cur | sed -e 's:/cur/*$::' -e 's/ /\\ /g' | sort | tr '\n' ' '`

### 13.4. Calculating Mailbox Message Counts

If $mail_check_stats is set, NeoMutt will periodically calculate the unread, flagged, and total message counts for each mailbox watched by the mailboxes command. This calculation takes place at the same time as new mail polling, but is controlled by a separate timer: $mail_check_stats_interval.

The sidebar can display these message counts. See $sidebar_format.

## 14. Editing Threads

NeoMutt has the ability to dynamically restructure threads that are broken either by misconfigured software or bad behavior from some correspondents. This allows to clean your mailboxes from these annoyances which make it hard to follow a discussion.

### 14.1. Linking Threads

Some mailers tend to “forget” to correctly set the “In-Reply-To:” and “References:” headers when replying to a message. This results in broken discussions because NeoMutt has not enough information to guess the correct threading. You can fix this by tagging a number of replies, then moving to the parent message and using the `<link-threads>` function (bound to & by default). The replies will then be connected to this parent message.

### 14.2. Breaking Threads

On mailing lists, some people are in the bad habit of starting a new discussion by hitting “reply” to any message from the list and changing the subject to a totally unrelated one. You can fix such threads by using the `<break-thread>` function (bound by default to #), which will turn the subthread starting from the current message into a whole different thread.

## 15. Delivery Status Notification (DSN) Support

RFC1894 defines a set of MIME content types for relaying information about the status of electronic mail messages. These can be thought of as “return receipts.”

To support DSN, there are two variables. $dsn_notify is used to request receipts for different results (such as failed message, message delivered, etc.). $dsn_return requests how much of your message should be returned with the receipt (headers or full message).

When using $sendmail for mail delivery, you need to use either Berkeley sendmail 8.8.x (or greater) a MTA supporting DSN command line options compatible to Sendmail: The -N and -R options can be used by the mail client to make requests as to what type of status messages should be returned. Please consider your MTA documentation whether DSN is supported.

For SMTP delivery using $smtp_url, it depends on the capabilities announced by the server whether NeoMutt will attempt to request DSN or not.

## 16. Start a WWW Browser on URLs

If a message contains URLs, it is efficient to get a menu with all the URLs and start a WWW browser on one of them. This functionality is provided by the external urlview program which can be retrieved at ftp://ftp.mutt.org/mutt/contrib/ and the configuration commands:

    macro index \cb |urlview\n
    macro pager \cb |urlview\n

## 17. Echoing Text

Usage:

`echo` `message`

You can print messages to the message window using the "echo" command. This might be useful after a macro finishes executing. After printing the message, echo will pause for the number of seconds specified by $sleep_time.

    echo "Sourcing muttrc file"
    unset confirm_append
    macro index ,a "<save-message>=archive<enter><enter-command>echo 'Saved to archive'<enter>"

## 18. Message Composition Flow

This is a brief overview of the steps NeoMutt takes during message composition. It also shows the order and timing of hook execution.

- Reply envelope settings. $reverse_name processing. To, Cc, Subject, References header defaults.

- my_hdr processing for To, Cc, Bcc, Subject headers.

- Prompts for To, Cc, Bcc, Subject headers. See $ask_cc, $ask_bcc, $fast_reply.

- From header setting. Note: this is so send-hooks below can match ~P, but From is re-set further below in case a send-hook changes the value.

- reply-hook

- send-hook

- From header setting.

- my_hdr processing for From, Reply-To, Message-ID and user-defined headers. The To, Cc, Bcc, Subject, and Return-Path headers are ignored at this stage.

- Message body and signature generation.

- send2-hook

- $real_name part of From header setting.

- $editor invocation for the message.

- send2-hook

- Cryptographic settings.

- fcc-hook. Fcc setting.

- Compose menu. Note: send2-hook is evaluated each time the headers are changed.

- Message encryption and signing. Key selection.

- Fcc saving if $fcc_before_send is set. (Note the variable documentation for caveats of Fcc'ing before sending.)

- Message sending.

- Fcc saving if $fcc_before_send is unset (the default). The Fcc used to be saved before sending the message. It is now by default saved afterwards, but if the saving fails, the user is prompted.

## 19. Miscellany

This section documents various features that fit nowhere else.

Address normalization

  NeoMutt normalizes all e-mail addresses to the simplest form possible. If an address contains a real_name, the form Joe User <joe@example.com> is used and the pure e-mail address without angle brackets otherwise, i.e. just joe@example.com.

  This normalization affects all headers NeoMutt generates including aliases.

Initial folder selection

  The folder NeoMutt opens at startup is determined as follows: the folder specified in the `$MAIL` environment variable if present. Otherwise, the value of `$MAILDIR` is taken into account. If that isn't present either, NeoMutt takes the user's mailbox in the mailspool as determined at compile-time (which may also reside in the home directory). The $spool_file setting overrides this selection. Highest priority has the mailbox given with the `-f` command line option.

# Chapter 5. NeoMutt's MIME Support

Quite a bit of effort has been made to make NeoMutt the premier text-mode MIME MUA. Every effort has been made to provide the functionality that the discerning MIME user requires, and the conformance to the standards wherever possible. When configuring NeoMutt for MIME, there are two extra types of configuration files which NeoMutt uses. One is the `mime.types` file, which contains the mapping of file extensions to IANA MIME types. The other is the `mailcap` file, which specifies the external commands to use for handling specific MIME types.

## 1. Using MIME in NeoMutt

### 1.1. MIME Overview

MIME is short for “Multipurpose Internet Mail Extension” and describes mechanisms to internationalize and structure mail messages. Before the introduction of MIME, messages had a single text part and were limited to us-ascii header and content. With MIME, messages can have attachments (and even attachments which itself have attachments and thus form a tree structure), nearly arbitrary characters can be used for sender names, recipients and subjects.

Besides the handling of non-ascii characters in message headers, to NeoMutt the most important aspect of MIME are so-called MIME types. These are constructed using a major and minor type separated by a forward slash. These specify details about the content that follows. Based upon these, NeoMutt decides how to handle this part. The most popular major type is “`text`” with minor types for plain text, HTML and various other formats. Major types also exist for images, audio, video and of course general application data (e.g. to separate cryptographically signed data with a signature, send office documents, and in general arbitrary binary data). There's also the `multipart` major type which represents the root of a subtree of MIME parts. A list of supported MIME types can be found in Table 5.1, “Supported MIME types”.

MIME also defines a set of encoding schemes for transporting MIME content over the network: `7bit`, `8bit`, `quoted-printable`, `base64` and `binary`. There're some rules when to choose what for encoding headers and/or body (if needed), and NeoMutt will in general make a good choice.

NeoMutt does most of MIME encoding/decoding behind the scenes to form messages conforming to MIME on the sending side. On reception, it can be flexibly configured as to how what MIME structure is displayed (and if it's displayed): these decisions are based on the content's MIME type. There are three areas/menus in dealing with MIME: the pager (while viewing a message), the attachment menu and the compose menu.

### 1.2. Viewing MIME Messages in the Pager

When you select a message from the index and view it in the pager, NeoMutt decodes as much of a message as possible to a text representation. NeoMutt internally supports a number of MIME types, including the `text/plain` type, the `message/rfc822` (mail messages) type and some `multipart` types. In addition, it recognizes a variety of PGP MIME and S/MIME types, including PGP/MIME and `application/pgp`, and `application/pkcs7-mime`.

NeoMutt will denote attachments with a couple lines describing them. These lines are of the form:

    [-- Attachment #1: Description --]
    [-- Type: text/plain, Encoding: 7bit, Size: 10000 --]

Where the Description is the description or filename given for the attachment, and the Encoding is one of the already mentioned content encodings.

If NeoMutt cannot deal with a MIME type, it will display a message like:

    [-- image/gif is unsupported (use 'v' to view this part) --]

### 1.3. The Attachment Menu

The default binding for `<view-attachments>` is “v”, which displays the attachment menu for a message. The attachment menu displays a list of the attachments in a message. From the attachment menu, you can save, print, pipe, delete, and view attachments. You can apply these operations to a group of attachments at once, by tagging the attachments and by using the `<tag-prefix>` operator. You can also reply to the current message from this menu, and only the current attachment (or the attachments tagged) will be quoted in your reply. You can view attachments as text, or view them using the mailcap viewer definition (the mailcap mechanism is explained later in detail).

Finally, you can apply the usual message-related functions (like `<resend-message>`, and the `<reply>` and `<forward>` functions) to attachments of type `message/rfc822`.

See table Table 9.7, “Default Attachment Menu Bindings” for all available functions.

#### 1.3.1. Viewing Attachments

There are four(!) ways of viewing attachments, so the functions deserve some extra explanation.

`<view-mailcap>` (default keybinding: m)

  This will use the first matching mailcap entry.

  If no matching mailcap entries are found, it will abort with an error message.

`<view-attach>` (default keybinding: <Enter>)

  NeoMutt will display internally supported MIME types (see Section 1.2, “Viewing MIME Messages in the Pager”) in the pager. This will respect auto_view settings, to determine whether to use a `copiousoutput` mailcap entry or just directly display the attachment.

  Other MIME types will use the first matching mailcap entry.

  If no matching mailcap entries are found, the attachment will be displayed in the pager as raw text.

`<view-pager>`

  NeoMutt will use the first matching `copiousoutput` mailcap entry to display the attachment in the pager (regardless of auto_view settings).

  If no matching mailcap entries are found, the attachment will be displayed in the pager as raw text.

`<view-text>` (default keybinding: T)

  The attachment will always be displayed in the pager as raw text.

### 1.4. The Compose Menu

The compose menu is the menu you see before you send a message. It allows you to edit the recipient list, the subject, and other aspects of your message. It also contains a list of the attachments of your message, including the main body. From this menu, you can print, copy, filter, pipe, edit, compose, review, and rename an attachment or a list of tagged attachments. You can also modifying the attachment information, notably the type, encoding and description.

Attachments appear as follows by default:

    - 1 [text/plain, 7bit, 1K]           /tmp/neomutt-euler-8082-0 <no description>
      2 [applica/x-gunzip, base64, 422K] ~/src/neomutt-0.85.tar.gz <no description>

The “-” denotes that NeoMutt will delete the file after sending (or postponing, or canceling) the message. It can be toggled with the `<toggle-unlink>` command (default: u). The next field is the MIME content-type, and can be changed with the `<edit-type>` command (default: ^T). The next field is the encoding for the attachment, which allows a binary message to be encoded for transmission on 7bit links. It can be changed with the `<edit-encoding>` command (default: ^E). The next field is the size of the attachment, rounded to kilobytes or megabytes. The next field is the filename, which can be changed with the `<rename-file>` command (default: R). The final field is the description of the attachment, and can be changed with the `<edit-description>` command (default: d). See $attach_format for a full list of available expandos to format this display to your needs.

## 2. MIME Type Configuration with `mime.types`

To get most out of MIME, it's important that a MIME part's content type matches the content as closely as possible so that the recipient's client can automatically select the right viewer for the content. However, there's no reliable way for NeoMutt to know how to detect every possible file type. Instead, it uses a simple plain text mapping file that specifies what file extension corresponds to what MIME type. This file is called `mime.types`.

When you add an attachment to your mail message, NeoMutt searches the system `mime.types` file at `/etc/mime.types`, `$SYSCONFDIR/mime.types` or `$PKGDATADIR/mime.types` and then your personal `mime.types` file at `$HOME/.mime.types`.

Where `$HOME` is your home directory. The `$PKGDATADIR` and the `$SYSCONFDIR` directories depend on where NeoMutt is installed: the former is the default for shared data, the latter for system configuration files.

Each line starts with the full MIME type, followed by a space and space-separated list of file extensions. For example you could use:

Example 5.1. `mime.types`

    application/postscript          ps eps
    application/pgp                 pgp
    audio/x-aiff                    aif aifc aiff

A sample `mime.types` file comes with the NeoMutt distribution, and should contain most of the MIME types you are likely to use.

If NeoMutt can not determine the MIME type by the extension of the file you attach, it will run the command specified in $mime_type_query_command. If that command is not specified, NeoMutt will look at the file. If the file is free of binary information, NeoMutt will assume that the file is plain text, and mark it as `text/plain`. If the file contains binary information, then NeoMutt will mark it as `application/octet-stream`. You can change the MIME type that NeoMutt assigns to an attachment by using the `<edit-type>` command from the compose menu (default: ^T), see Table 5.1, “Supported MIME types” for supported major types. NeoMutt recognizes all of these if the appropriate entry is found in the `mime.types` file. Non-recognized mime types should only be used if the recipient of the message is likely to be expecting such attachments.

Table 5.1. Supported MIME types

MIME major type | Standard | Description
--- | --- | ---
`application` | yes | General application data
`audio` | yes | Audio data
`image` | yes | Image data
`message` | yes | Mail messages, message status information
`model` | yes | VRML and other modeling data
`multipart` | yes | Container for other MIME parts
`text` | yes | Text data
`video` | yes | Video data
`chemical` | no | Mostly molecular data

MIME types are not arbitrary, they need to be assigned by IANA.

## 3. MIME Viewer Configuration with Mailcap

NeoMutt supports RFC1524 MIME Configuration, in particular the Unix specific format specified in Appendix A of RFC1524. This file format is commonly referred to as the “mailcap” format. Many MIME compliant programs utilize the mailcap format, allowing you to specify handling for all MIME types in one place for all programs. Programs known to use this format include Firefox, lynx and metamail.

In order to handle various MIME types that NeoMutt doesn't have built-in support for, it parses a series of external configuration files to find an external handler. The default search string for these files is a colon delimited list containing the following files:

1. `$HOME/.mailcap`

2. `$PKGDATADIR/mailcap`

3. `$SYSCONFDIR/mailcap`

4. `/etc/mailcap`

5. `/usr/etc/mailcap`

6. `/opt/local/etc/mailcap`

where `$HOME` is your home directory. The `$PKGDATADIR` and the `$SYSCONFDIR` directories depend on where NeoMutt is installed: the former is the default for shared data, the latter for system configuration files.

The default search path can be obtained by running the following command:

    neomutt -nF /dev/null -Q mailcap_path

In particular, the metamail distribution will install a mailcap file, usually as `/opt/local/etc/mailcap`, which contains some baseline entries.

### 3.1. The Basics of the Mailcap File

A mailcap file consists of a series of lines which are comments, blank, or definitions.

A comment line consists of a # character followed by anything you want.

A blank line is blank.

A definition line consists of a content type, a view command, and any number of optional fields. Each field of a definition line is divided by a semicolon “;” character.

The content type is specified in the MIME standard “type/subtype” notation. For example, `text/plain`, `text/html`, `image/gif`, etc. In addition, the mailcap format includes two formats for wildcards, one using the special “*” subtype, the other is the implicit wild, where you only include the major type. For example, `image/*`, or `video` will match all image types and video types, respectively.

The view command is a Unix command for viewing the type specified. There are two different types of commands supported. The default is to send the body of the MIME message to the command on stdin. You can change this behavior by using `%s` as a parameter to your view command. This will cause NeoMutt to save the body of the MIME message to a temporary file, and then call the view command with the `%s` replaced by the name of the temporary file. In both cases, NeoMutt will turn over the terminal to the view program until the program quits, at which time NeoMutt will remove the temporary file if it exists. This means that mailcap does not work out of the box with programs which detach themselves from the terminal right after starting, like `open` on Mac OS X. In order to nevertheless use these programs with mailcap, you probably need custom shell scripts.

So, in the simplest form, you can send a `text/plain` message to the external pager more on standard input:

    text/plain; more

Or, you could send the message as a file:

    text/plain; more %s

Perhaps you would like to use lynx to interactively view a `text/html` message:

    text/html; lynx %s

In this case, lynx does not support viewing a file from standard input, so you must use the `%s` syntax.

### Note

Some older versions of lynx contain a bug where they will check the mailcap file for a viewer for `text/html`. They will find the line which calls lynx, and run it. This causes lynx to continuously spawn itself to view the object.

On the other hand, maybe you don't want to use lynx interactively, you just want to have it convert the `text/html` to `text/plain`, then you can use:

    text/html; lynx -dump %s | more

Perhaps you wish to use lynx to view `text/html` files, and a pager on all other text formats, then you would use the following:

    text/html; lynx %s
    text/*; more

### 3.2. Secure Use of Mailcap

The interpretation of shell meta-characters embedded in MIME parameters can lead to security problems in general. NeoMutt tries to quote parameters in expansion of `%s` syntaxes properly, and avoids risky characters by substituting them, see the $mailcap_sanitize variable.

Although NeoMutt's procedures to invoke programs with mailcap seem to be safe, there are other applications parsing mailcap, maybe taking less care of it. Therefore you should pay attention to the following rules:

Keep the %-expandos away from shell quoting. Don't quote them with single or double quotes. NeoMutt does this for you, the right way, as should any other program which interprets mailcap. Don't put them into backtick expansions. Be highly careful with eval statements, and avoid them if possible at all. Trying to fix broken behavior with quotes introduces new leaks – there is no alternative to correct quoting in the first place.

If you have to use the %-expandos' values in context where you need quoting or backtick expansions, put that value into a shell variable and reference the shell variable where necessary, as in the following example (using `$charset` inside the backtick expansion is safe, since it is not itself subject to any further expansion):

    text/test-mailcap-bug; cat %s; copiousoutput; test=charset=%{charset} \
            && test "`echo $charset | tr '[A-Z]' '[a-z]'`" != iso-8859-1

### 3.3. Advanced Mailcap Usage

#### 3.3.1. Optional Fields

In addition to the required content-type and view command fields, you can add semi-colon “;” separated fields to set flags and other options. NeoMutt recognizes the following optional fields:

copiousoutput

  This flag tells NeoMutt that the command passes possibly large amounts of text on standard output. This causes NeoMutt to invoke a pager (either the internal pager or the external pager defined by the pager variable) on the output of the view command. Without this flag, NeoMutt assumes that the command is interactive. One could use this to replace the pipe to `more` in the `lynx -dump` example in the Basic section:

      text/html; lynx -dump %s ; copiousoutput

  This will cause lynx to format the `text/html` output as `text/plain` and NeoMutt will use your standard pager to display the results.

  NeoMutt will set the `COLUMNS` environment variable to the width of the pager. Some programs make use of this environment variable automatically. Others provide a command line argument that can use this to set the output width:

      text/html; lynx -dump -width ${COLUMNS:-80} %s; copiousoutput

  Note that when using the built-in pager, only entries with this flag will be considered a handler for a MIME type – all other entries will be ignored.

needsterminal

  NeoMutt uses this flag when viewing attachments with auto_view, in order to decide whether it should honor the setting of the $wait_key variable or not. When an attachment is viewed using an interactive program, and the corresponding mailcap entry has a needsterminal flag, NeoMutt will use $wait_key and the exit status of the program to decide if it will ask you to press a key after the external program has exited. In all other situations it will not prompt you for a key.

compose=<command>

  This flag specifies the command to use to create a new attachment of a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu.

composetyped=<command>

  This flag specifies the command to use to create a new attachment of a specific MIME type. This command differs from the compose command in that NeoMutt will expect standard MIME headers on the data. This can be used to specify parameters, filename, description, etc. for a new attachment. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu.

print=<command>

  This flag specifies the command to use to print a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the attachment and compose menus.

edit=<command>

  This flag specifies the command to use to edit a specific MIME type. NeoMutt supports this from the compose menu, and also uses it to compose new attachments. NeoMutt will default to the defined $editor for text attachments.

nametemplate=<template>

  This field specifies the format for the file denoted by `%s` in the command fields. Certain programs will require a certain file extension, for instance, to correctly view a file. For instance, lynx will only interpret a file as `text/html` if the file ends in `.html`. So, you would specify lynx as a `text/html` viewer with a line in the mailcap file like:

      text/html; lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html

test=<command>

  This field specifies a command to run to test whether this mailcap entry should be used. The command is defined with the command expansion rules defined in the next section. If the command returns 0, then the test passed, and NeoMutt uses this entry. If the command returns non-zero, then the test failed, and NeoMutt continues searching for the right entry. Note that the content-type must match before NeoMutt performs the test. For example:

      text/html; firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX
      text/html; lynx %s

  In this example, NeoMutt will run the program `RunningX` which will return 0 if the X Window manager is running, and non-zero if it isn't. If `RunningX` returns 0, then NeoMutt will run firefox to display the `text/html` object. If RunningX doesn't return 0, then NeoMutt will go on to the next entry and use lynx to display the `text/html` object.

x-neomutt-keep

  `x-neomutt-keep` tells NeoMutt to not delete the temporary file after the program has been run.

  Using it allows you to control the lifespan of the temporary file. Without this option, the file will be deleted after $timeout seconds.

      text/html; firefox %s & x-neomutt-keep

x-neomutt-nowrap

  `x-neomutt-nowrap` tells the NeoMutt pager to ignore the $wrap parameter and to assume the output from the mailcap command to already be correctly wrapped.

      text/html; /opt/local/bin/w3m -s -T text/html -o display_link_number=1 %s; nametemplate=%s.html; copiousoutput; x-neomutt-nowrap;

#### 3.3.2. Search Order

When searching for an entry in the mailcap file, NeoMutt will search for the most useful entry for its purpose. For instance, if you are attempting to print an `image/gif`, and you have the following entries in your mailcap file, NeoMutt will search for an entry with the print command:

    image/*;        xv %s
    image/gif;      ; print=anytopnm %s | pnmtops | lpr; \
                    nametemplate=%s.gif

NeoMutt will skip the `image/*` entry and use the `image/gif` entry with the print command.

In addition, you can use this with auto_view to denote two commands for viewing an attachment, one to be viewed automatically, the other to be viewed interactively from the attachment menu using the `<view-mailcap>` function (bound to “m” by default). In addition, you can then use the test feature to determine which viewer to use interactively depending on your environment.

    text/html;      firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)' ; test=RunningX
    text/html;      lynx %s; nametemplate=%s.html
    text/html;      lynx -dump %s; nametemplate=%s.html; copiousoutput

For auto_view, NeoMutt will choose the third entry because of the `copiousoutput` tag. For interactive viewing, NeoMutt will run the program `RunningX` to determine if it should use the first entry. If the program returns non-zero, NeoMutt will use the second entry for interactive viewing. The last entry is for inline display in the pager and the `<view-attach>` function in the attachment menu.

Entries with the `copiousoutput` tag should always be specified as the last one per type. For non-interactive use, the last entry will then actually be the first matching one with the tag set. For non-interactive use, only `copiousoutput`-tagged entries are considered. For interactive use, NeoMutt ignores this tag and treats all entries equally. Therefore, if not specified last, all following entries without this tag would never be considered for `<view-attach>` because the `copiousoutput` before them matched already.

#### 3.3.3. Command Expansion

The various commands defined in the mailcap files are passed to the `/bin/sh` shell using the `system(3)` function. Before the command is passed to `/bin/sh -c`, it is parsed to expand various special parameters with information from NeoMutt. The keywords NeoMutt expands are:

%s

  As seen in the basic mailcap section, this variable is expanded to a filename specified by the calling program. This file contains the body of the message to view/print/edit or where the composing program should place the results of composition. In addition, the use of this keyword causes NeoMutt to not pass the body of the message to the view/print/edit program on stdin.

%t

  NeoMutt will expand `%t` to the text representation of the content type of the message in the same form as the first parameter of the mailcap definition line, i.e. `text/html` or `image/gif`.

%{<parameter>}

  NeoMutt will expand this to the value of the specified parameter from the Content-Type: line of the mail message. For instance, if your mail message contains:

      Content-Type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1

  then NeoMutt will expand `%{charset}` to “iso-8859-1”. The default metamail mailcap file uses this feature to test the charset to spawn an xterm using the right charset to view the message.

\%

  This will be replaced by a literal `%`.

NeoMutt does not currently support the `%F` and `%n` keywords specified in RFC1524. The main purpose of these parameters is for multipart messages, which is handled internally by NeoMutt.

### 3.4. Example Mailcap Files

This mailcap file is fairly simple and standard:

    # I'm always running X :)
    video/*;        xanim %s > /dev/null
    image/*;        xv %s > /dev/null
    # I'm always running firefox (if my computer had more memory, maybe)
    text/html;      firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)'

These mailcap files shows how to control the lifespan of the temporary file.

    # The `display` program shows an image and doesn't return until the user quits.

    # Display an image, but wait for the user to quit the display program.
    # When the user quits control will return to NeoMutt.
    image/png; display %s;

    # Display an image and return to NeoMutt immediately.
    image/png; display %s &;

    # The file will be automatically deleted after $timeout seconds.

    # Some graphical programs return immediately if they're already running.
    # We'll add an ampersand (&), just in case they're not.

    # View the contents of a 'tar' file.
    # The file will be automatically deleted after $timeout seconds.
    application/x-tar; file-roller %s &;

    # View the contents of a 'tar' file.
    # The file will not be deleted.
    application/x-tar; file-roller %s &; x-neomutt-keep

    # Some programs watch any files they have open.
    # If NeoMutt deleted the file, the program would close prematurely.

    # Use a custom script to manage the file's lifespan.
    application/pdf; my-pdf-script.sh %s; x-neomutt-keep

This mailcap file shows quite a number of examples:

    # Use xanim to view all videos Xanim produces a header on startup,
    # send that to /dev/null so I don't see it
    video/*;        xanim %s > /dev/null
    # Send html to a running firefox by remote
    text/html;      firefox -remote 'openURL(%s)'; test=RunningFirefox
    # If I'm not running firefox but I am running X, start firefox on the
    # object
    text/html;      firefox %s; test=RunningX
    # Else use lynx to view it as text
    text/html;      lynx %s
    # This version would convert the text/html to text/plain
    text/html;      lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput
    # I use enscript to print text in two columns to a page
    text/*;         more %s; print=enscript -2Gr %s
    # Firefox adds a flag to tell itself to view jpegs internally
    image/jpeg;     xv %s; x-mozilla-flags=internal
    # Use xv to view images if I'm running X
    # In addition, this uses the \ to extend the line and set my editor
    # for images
    image/*;        xv %s; test=RunningX; edit=xpaint %s
    # Convert images to text using the netpbm tools
    image/*;        (anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xysize 80 46 | ppmtopgm | pgmtopbm | \
                    pbmtoascii -1x2) 2>&1 ; copiousoutput
    # Send excel spreadsheets to my NT box
    application/ms-excel;   open.pl %s

## 4. MIME Autoview

Usage:

`auto_view` `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]
`unauto_view` { * | [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]}

In addition to explicitly telling NeoMutt to view an attachment with the MIME viewer defined in the mailcap file from the attachments menu, NeoMutt has support for automatically viewing MIME attachments while in the pager.

For this to work, you must define a viewer in the mailcap file which uses the `copiousoutput` option to denote that it is non-interactive. Usually, you also use the entry to convert the attachment to a text representation which you can view in the pager.

You then use the auto_view configuration command to list the content-types that you wish to view automatically. For instance, if you set it to:

    auto_view text/html application/x-gunzip \
      application/postscript image/gif application/x-tar-gz

...NeoMutt would try to find corresponding entries for rendering attachments of these types as text. A corresponding mailcap could look like:

    text/html;              lynx -dump %s; copiousoutput; nametemplate=%s.html
    image/*;                anytopnm %s | pnmscale -xsize 80 -ysize 50 | ppmtopgm | \
                            pgmtopbm | pbmtoascii ; copiousoutput
    application/x-gunzip;   gzcat; copiousoutput
    application/x-tar-gz;   gunzip -c %s | tar -tf - ; copiousoutput
    application/postscript; ps2ascii %s; copiousoutput

unauto_view can be used to remove previous entries from the auto_view list. This can be used with message-hook to autoview messages based on size, etc. “unauto_view *” will remove all previous entries.

## 5. MIME Multipart/Alternative

A `multipart/alternative` email has several parts that represent the same content in different formats, such as `text/plain` and `text/html`. This kind of email is heavily used by many modern mail user agents to send HTML messages which contain an alternative plain text representation. You can read and write `multipart/alternative` emails in NeoMutt.

### 5.1. Reading Multipart/Alternative Emails

NeoMutt has some heuristics for determining which attachment of a `multipart/alternative` type to display:

1. First, NeoMutt will check the alternative_order list to determine if one of the available types is preferred. It consists of a number of MIME types in order, including support for implicit and explicit wildcards. For example:

       alternative_order text/enriched text/plain text application/postscript image/*

2. Next, NeoMutt will check if any of the types have a defined auto_view, and use that.

3. Failing that, NeoMutt will look for any text type.

4. As a last attempt, NeoMutt will look for any type it knows how to handle.

To remove a MIME type from the alternative_order list, use the unalternative_order command.

### 5.2. Composing Multipart/Alternative Emails

Noemutt includes some primitive ability to compose multipart/alternative emails:

1. In the Compose menu, attach the two (or more) alternatives as usual. For example, attach "invitation.html" and then "invitation.txt". (You can reorder them using the `<move-up>` (-) and `<move-down>` (+) bindings, and edit the descriptions).

2. Tag the attachments that are alternatives, and press the `<group-alternatives>` (&) binding to group them together. After this, the separate parts will be displayed in a tree structure. Attachments can still be edited separately and reordered within the group, but must be ungrouped using the `<ungroup-attachment>` (#) binding for more advanced editing before tagging and grouping together again as described above.

3. Send the email as usual.

If all the attachments have been grouped and form a single `multipart/alternative`, part then this message will be sent as a `multipart/alternative` email, otherwise it will be sent as a `multipart/mixed` email.

Be aware that when sending a `multipart/alternative` email, you have to manually prepare the alternative parts and attach them. However, you can use Neomutt's macro to perform all the operations needed, such that you can compose a plain text email as usual and turn that into a `multipart/alternative` email in one single command, with one part being `text/plain` and the other `text/html`. An example macro which adds an HTML part to the main body of an email and sends it could be the following:

    macro compose Y "<first-entry><enter-command>set wait_key=no<enter>\
    <pipe-entry>pandoc -o /tmp/neomutt-alternative.html<enter>\
    <attach-file>/tmp/neomutt-alternative.html<enter>\
    <toggle-unlink><toggle-disposition>\
    <tag-entry><first-entry><tag-entry><group-alternatives>\
    <enter-command>set wait_key=yes<enter><send-message>" \
    "send the message as 'multipart/alternative'"

## 6. MIME Multipart/Multilingual

Neomutt includes supports for reading and writing `multipart/multilingual` emails. A `multipart/multilingual` email is like a `multipart/alternative` email, except that it comes with parts of different versions of languages instead of appearances. Its format is described by RFC8255.

### 6.1. Reading Multipart/Multilingual Emails

Neomutt uses the `$preferred_languages` variable to determine which languages to display when displaying a `multipart/multilingual` email. You can have several preferred languages, separated by `,`

    set preferred_languages="fr,en,de"

Neomutt will try to match these strings again the multilingual header in the received emails "by prefix", e.g., `en` will match both `en` and `en_US`.

If `$preferred_languages` is not set, it default to None, and the first part of the received `multipart/multilingual` email will be displayed.

### 6.2. Composing Multipart/Multilingual Emails

The procedures of composing a `multipart/multilingual` email is similar to those in Composing Multipart/Alternative. You have to prepare every part manually or using some scripts, and then tag and group them together into a `multipart/multilingual` bundle before sending it:

1. Prepare parts of the multilingual emails.

2. Attach them as attachments.

3. Tag them with `<tag-entry>`

4. Edit the `Content-Language` header of every attachment with command `<edit-language>` (default to `Ctrl-L`). This is important, otherwise the recipient of this email will not know the corresponding languages. You can set arbitrary string as `Content-Language`, but it is recommended to set it as some common prefixes such as "en", "zh" and "fr".

5. Group all the tag messages together by `<group-multilingual>` (default to `^`).

6. Send the email as usual.

As in Composing Multipart/Alternative, you can also use Neomutt's macro and some external scripts to combine this procedure into one.

After grouping the separate parts will be displayed in a tree structure. Attachments can still be edited separately and reordered within the group, but must be ungrouped using the `<ungroup-attachment>` (#) binding for more advanced editing before tagging and grouping together again as described above.

## 7. MIME Multipart/Related

Neomutt doesn't include any special support for reading `multipart/related` emails, but it is possible to write a `multipart/related` email. A `multipart/related` attachment is intended for compound objects consisting of several inter-related body parts which are linked together using the `Content-ID` header. Its format is described by RFC2387.

### 7.1. Composing Multipart/Related Emails

The procedure for composing a `multipart/related` email is similar to that in Composing Multipart/Alternative. You have to prepare every part manually or using some scripts, and then tag and group them together into a `multipart/related` bundle before sending it:

1. Prepare parts of the related email.

2. Attach them as attachments.

3. Tag them with `<tag-entry>`

4. One part can reference another using its `Content-ID` header. For example, an HTML part that includes an embedded image needs to contain: `<img src="cid:content-id">` where an attached image has a `Content-ID` header of `content-id`. The `Content-ID` of an attachment can be set using `<edit-content-id>` (default key `Alt-i`). `<edit-content-id>` sets a random ID which can then be changed if desired. Permitted characters for `Content-ID` are: `-.0-9@A-Z_a-z`.

   If the `multipart/related` group is intended to be inline, members of the group should also have their `Content-Disposition` header set to `inline` which can be toggled using `<toggle-disposition>` (default key `Ctrl-D`).

   It can also be desirable to give referenced files in the group a `filename` even when the `Content-Disposition` is set to be `inline`. To do this use `<rename-attachment>` (default key `Ctrl-O`).

5. Group all the tagged messages together with `<group-related>` (default key `%`).

   Top level attachments (excluding `multipart` ones) in the group are automatically given a random `Content-ID` if they do not already have one.

6. Send the email as usual.

Some care needs to be taken with the construction of a `multipart/related` email to ensure it is correctly displayed by the receiving mail client. A typical email with a `multipart/alternative` part containing a `text/plain` part and a `text/html` part with an embedded image, along with a separate attachment might end up like this:

      I     1 <no description>                                         [multipart/related, 7bit, 0K]
      I     2 ├─><no description>                                  [multipart/alternative, 7bit, 0K]
    - I     3 │ ├─>/tmp/neomutt-hostname-XXXX-XXXXXX-XXXXXXXXXX   [text/plain, 7bit, us-ascii, 0.1K]
    - I     4 │ └─>/tmp/neomutt-alternative.html                      [text/html, 8bit, utf-8, 0.6K]
      I     5 └─>image.png                                                  [image/png, base64, 19K]
      A     6 attachment.pdf                                         [application/pdf, quoted, 7.1K]

In the above email `/tmp/neomutt-alternative.html` would reference `image.png` using `<img src="cid:content-id">` and `image.png` has been given an explicit name of `image.png` using `<rename-attachment>` (regardless of its initial filename). `<group-related>` has set its `Content-ID` header to a random value.

## 8. Attachment Searching and Counting

If you ever lose track of attachments in your mailboxes, NeoMutt's attachment-counting and -searching support might be for you. You can make your message index display the number of qualifying attachments in each message, or search for messages by attachment count. You also can configure what kinds of attachments qualify for this feature with the attachments and unattachments commands.

In order to provide this information, NeoMutt needs to fully MIME-parse all messages affected first. This can slow down operation especially for remote mail folders such as IMAP because all messages have to be downloaded first regardless whether the user really wants to view them or not though using Section 8.2, “Body Caching” usually means to download the message just once.

By default, NeoMutt will not search inside `multipart/alternative` containers. This can be changed via the $count_alternatives configuration variable.

The syntax is:

`attachments` { + | - } `disposition` `mime-type` [ `mime-type` ...]
`unattachments` { + | - } `disposition` `mime-type` [ `mime-type` ...]
`attachments` `?`
`unattachments` `*`

disposition is the attachment's Content-Disposition type – either `inline` or `attachment`. You can abbreviate this to `I` or `A`.

Disposition is prefixed by either a “+” symbol or a “-” symbol. If it's a “+”, you're saying that you want to allow this disposition and MIME type to qualify. If it's a “-”, you're saying that this disposition and MIME type is an exception to previous “+” rules. There are examples below of how this is useful.

mime-type is the MIME type of the attachment you want the command to affect. A MIME type is always of the format `major/minor`, where `major` describes the broad category of document you're looking at, and `minor` describes the specific type within that category. The major part of mime-type must be literal text (or the special token “`*`”), but the minor part may be a regular expression. (Therefore, “`*/.*`” matches any MIME type.)

The MIME types you give to the attachments directive are a kind of pattern. When you use the attachments directive, the patterns you specify are added to a list. When you use unattachments, the pattern is removed from the list. The patterns are not expanded and matched to specific MIME types at this time – they're just text in a list. They're only matched when actually evaluating a message.

Note that the first MIME part is treated slightly differently: It is almost always the message text. Thus, it is not counted as an attachment if its disposition is `inline` and it is not a `multipart/*` or `message/*` MIME-type.

Some examples might help to illustrate. The examples that are not commented out define the default configuration of the lists.

Example 5.2. Attachment counting

    # Removing a pattern from a list removes that pattern literally. It
    # does not remove any type matching the pattern.
    #
    #  attachments   +A */.*
    #  attachments   +A image/jpeg
    #  unattachments +A */.*
    #
    # This leaves "attached" image/jpeg files on the allowed attachments
    # list. It does not remove all items, as you might expect, because the
    # second */.* is not a matching expression at this time.
    #
    # Remember: "unattachments" only undoes what "attachments" has done!
    # It does not trigger any matching on actual messages.
    #
    # Qualify any MIME part with an "attachment" disposition, EXCEPT for
    # text/vcard, text/x-vcard, application/pgp.*, application/pkcs7-.* and
    # application/x-pkcs7-.* parts. (PGP and S/MIME parts are already known
    # to NeoMutt, and can be searched for with ~g, ~G, and ~k.)
    #
    # I've added pkcs7/x-pkcs7 to this, since it functions (for S/MIME)
    # analogously to PGP signature attachments. S/MIME isn't supported
    # in a stock NeoMutt build, but we can still treat it specially here.
    #
    attachments  +A */.*
    attachments  -A text/vcard text/x-vcard
    attachments  -A application/pgp.*
    attachments  -A application/pkcs7-.* application/x-pkcs7-.*
    # Discount all MIME parts with an "inline" disposition, unless they're
    # text/plain. (Why inline a text/plain part unless it's external to the
    # message flow?)
    attachments  +I text/plain
    # These two lines make NeoMutt qualify MIME containers. (So, for example,
    # a message/rfc822 forward will count as an attachment.) The first
    # line is unnecessary if you already have "attach-allow */.*", of
    # course. These are off by default! The MIME elements contained
    # within a message/* or multipart/* are still examined, even if the
    # containers themselves don't qualify.
    # Recursion into multipart/alternatives containers is controlled by the
    # $count_alternatives setting.

    #attachments  +A message/.* multipart/.*
    #attachments  +I message/.* multipart/.*
    ## You probably don't really care to know about deleted attachments.
    attachments  -A message/external-body
    attachments  -I message/external-body

Entering the command “attachments ?” as a command will list your current settings in neomuttrc format, so that it can be pasted elsewhere.

Entering the command “unattachments *” as a command will Clear all attachment settings.

## 9. MIME Lookup

Usage:

`mime_lookup` `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]
`unmime_lookup` { * | [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]}

NeoMutt's mime_lookup list specifies a list of MIME types that should not be treated according to their mailcap entry. This option is designed to deal with binary types such as `application/octet-stream`. When an attachment's MIME type is listed in mime_lookup, then the extension of the filename will be compared to the list of extensions in the `mime.types` file. The MIME type associated with this extension will then be used to process the attachment according to the rules in the mailcap file and according to any other configuration options (such as auto_view) specified. Common usage would be:

    mime_lookup application/octet-stream application/X-Lotus-Manuscript

In addition, the `unmime_lookup` command may be used to disable this feature for any particular MIME type if it had been set, for example, in a global `.neomuttrc`.

# Chapter 6. Optional Features

## 1. General Notes

### 1.1. Enabling/Disabling Features

NeoMutt supports several of optional features which can be enabled or disabled at compile-time by giving the configure script certain arguments. These are listed in the “Optional features” section of the configure --help output.

Which features are enabled or disabled can later be determined from the output of `neomutt -v`. If a compile option starts with “+” it is enabled and disabled if prefixed with “-”. For example, if NeoMutt was compiled using GnuTLS for encrypted communication instead of OpenSSL, `neomutt -v` would contain:

    -openssl +gnutls

### 1.2. URL Syntax

NeoMutt optionally supports the IMAP, POP3 and SMTP protocols which require to access servers using URLs. The canonical syntax for specifying URLs in NeoMutt is (an item enclosed in `[]` means it is optional and may be omitted):

    proto[s]://[username[:password]@]server[:port][/path]

proto is the communication protocol: `imap` for IMAP, `pop` for POP3 and `smtp` for SMTP. If “s” for “secure communication” is appended, NeoMutt will attempt to establish an encrypted communication using SSL or TLS.

Since all protocols supported by NeoMutt support/require authentication, login credentials may be specified in the URL. This has the advantage that multiple IMAP, POP3 or SMTP servers may be specified (which isn't possible using, for example, $imap_user). The username may contain the “@” symbol being used by many mail systems as part of the login name. The special characters “/” (`%2F`), “:” (`%3A`) and “%” (`%25`) have to be URL-encoded in usernames using the `%`-notation.

A password can be given, too but is not recommended if the URL is specified in a configuration file on disk.

If no port number is given, NeoMutt will use the system's default for the given protocol (usually consulting `/etc/services`).

The optional path is only relevant for IMAP and ignored elsewhere.

Example 6.1. URLs

    pops://host/
    imaps://user@host/INBOX/Sent
    smtp://user@host:587/

## 2. SSL/TLS Support

If NeoMutt is compiled with IMAP, POP3 and/or SMTP support, it can also be compiled with support for SSL or TLS using either OpenSSL or GnuTLS (by running the configure script with the --ssl=... option for OpenSSL or --gnutls=... for GnuTLS). NeoMutt can then attempt to encrypt communication with remote servers if these protocols are suffixed with “s” for “secure communication”.

### 2.1. STARTTLS

When non-secure URL protocols `imap://`, `pop://`, and `smtp://` are used, the initial connection to the server will be unencrypted. `STARTTLS` can be used to negotiate an encrypted connection after the initial unencrypted connection and exchange.

Two configuration variables control NeoMutt's behavior with `STARTTLS`. $ssl_starttls will initiate `STARTTLS` if the server advertises support for it. $ssl_force_tls will always try to initiate it, whether the server advertises support or not.

NeoMutt highly recommends setting $ssl_force_tls unless you need to connect to an unencrypted server. It's possible for an attacker to spoof interactions during the initial connection and hide support for `STARTTLS`. The only way to prevent these attacks is by forcing `STARTTLS` with the $ssl_force_tls configuration variable.

### 2.2. Tunnel

When connecting through a $tunnel and $tunnel_is_secure is set(the default), NeoMutt will assume the connection to the server through the pipe is already secured. NeoMutt will ignore $ssl_starttls and $ssl_force_tls, behaving as if TLS has already been negotiated.

When $tunnel_is_secure is unset, NeoMutt will respect the values of $ssl_starttls and $ssl_force_tls. It is highly recommended to set $ssl_force_tls in this case, to force `STARTTLS` negotiation. Note that doing so will prevent connection to an IMAP server configured for preauthentication(`PREAUTH`). If you use this configuration, it is recommended to use a secure tunnel.

## 3. POP3 Support

NeoMutt has POP3 support and has the ability to work with mailboxes located on a remote POP3 server and fetch mail for local browsing.

Remote POP3 servers can be accessed using URLs with the `pop` protocol for unencrypted and `pops` for encrypted communication, see Section 1.2, “URL Syntax” for details.

Polling for new mail is more expensive over POP3 than locally. For this reason the frequency at which NeoMutt will check for mail remotely can be controlled by the $pop_check_interval variable, which defaults to every 60 seconds.

POP is read-only which doesn't allow for some features like editing messages or changing flags. However, using Section 8.1, “Header Caching” and Section 8.2, “Body Caching” NeoMutt simulates the new/old/read flags as well as flagged and replied. NeoMutt applies some logic on top of remote messages but cannot change them so that modifications of flags are lost when messages are downloaded from the POP server (either by NeoMutt or other tools).

Another way to access your POP3 mail is the `<fetch-mail>` function (default: G). It allows to connect to $pop_host, fetch all your new mail and place it in the local $spool_file. After this point, NeoMutt runs exactly as if the mail had always been local.

### Note

If you only need to fetch all messages to a local mailbox you should consider using a specialized program, such as `fetchmail(1)`, `getmail(1)` or similar.

## 4. IMAP Support

NeoMutt has IMAP support and has the ability to work with folders located on a remote IMAP server.

You can access the remote inbox by selecting the folder by its URL (see Section 1.2, “URL Syntax” for details) using the `imap` or `imaps` protocol. Alternatively, a pine-compatible notation is also supported, i.e. `{[username@]imapserver[:port][/ssl]}path/to/folder`

Note that not all servers use “/” as the hierarchy separator. NeoMutt should correctly notice which separator is being used by the server and convert paths accordingly.

The IMAP protocol has a subscription feature where the server manages a list of of subscribed folders. To add or remove a folder to the list of subscribed folders use the commands:

`subscribe-to` `imap-folder-uri`
`unsubscribe-from` `imap-folder-uri`

imap-folder-uri must be an IMAP URI, from which the server and the folder is derived, e.g.

    subscribe-to imaps://mail.example.org/inbox

Instead of the above commands you can also use the `<subscribe>` and `<unsubscribe>` functions of the browser (default keys `s` and `u`) to subscribe to or unsubscribe from a folder while browsing the folders on the IMAP server. The browser can be instructed to only display the folders you are subscribed to with the `<toggle-subscribed>` functions. See also the $imap_list_subscribed variable.

Because the list of subscribed folders is managed by the IMAP server, NeoMutt can also ask the server for that list. If $imap_check_subscribed is set, NeoMutt will do that and add those folders to its mailboxes list just as if you had used the mailboxes command on each of them, so that these folders get checked periodically for new mail.

Polling for new mail on an IMAP server can cause noticeable delays. So, you'll want to carefully tune the $mail_check and $timeout variables. Reasonable values are:

    set mail_check=90
    set timeout=15

with relatively good results even over slow modem lines.

### Note

Note that if you are using mbox as the mail store on UW servers prior to v12.250, the server has been reported to disconnect a client if another client selects the same folder.

### 4.1. The IMAP Folder Browser

As of version 1.2, NeoMutt supports browsing mailboxes on an IMAP server. This is mostly the same as the local file browser, with the following differences:

- In lieu of file permissions, NeoMutt displays the string “IMAP”, possibly followed by the symbol “+”, indicating that the entry contains both messages and subfolders. On Cyrus-like servers folders will often contain both messages and subfolders. A mailbox name with a trailing delimiter (usually “/” or “.”) indicates subfolders.

- For the case where an entry can contain both messages and subfolders, the selection key (bound to `enter` by default) will choose to descend into the subfolder view. If you wish to view the messages in that folder, you must use `view-file` instead (bound to `space` by default).

- You can create, delete and rename mailboxes with the `<create-mailbox>`, `<delete-mailbox>`, and `<rename-mailbox>` commands (default bindings: `C`, `d` and `r`, respectively). You may also `<subscribe>` and `<unsubscribe>` to mailboxes (normally these are bound to `s` and `u`, respectively).

### 4.2. Authentication

NeoMutt supports four authentication methods with IMAP servers: SASL, GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, and LOGIN. There is also support for the pseudo-protocol ANONYMOUS, which allows you to log in to a public IMAP server without having an account. To use ANONYMOUS, simply make your username blank or “anonymous”.

SASL is a special super-authenticator, which selects among several protocols (including GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, ANONYMOUS, and DIGEST-MD5) the most secure method available on your host and the server. Using some of these methods (including DIGEST-MD5 and possibly GSSAPI), your entire session will be encrypted and invisible to those teeming network snoops. It is the best option if you have it. To use it, you must have the Cyrus SASL library installed on your system and compile NeoMutt with the --with-sasl flag.

NeoMutt will try whichever methods are compiled in and available on the server, in the following order: SASL, ANONYMOUS, GSSAPI, CRAM-MD5, LOGIN.

There are a few variables which control authentication:

- $imap_user – controls the username under which you request authentication on the IMAP server, for all authenticators. This is overridden by an explicit username in the mailbox path (i.e. by using a mailbox name of the form `{user@host}`).

- $imap_pass – a password which you may preset, used by all authentication methods where a password is needed.

- $imap_authenticators – a colon-delimited list of IMAP authentication methods to try, in the order you wish to try them. If specified, this overrides NeoMutt's default (attempt everything, in the order listed above).

## 5. SMTP Support

Besides supporting traditional mail delivery through a sendmail-compatible program, NeoMutt supports delivery through SMTP.

If the configuration variable $smtp_url is set, NeoMutt will contact the given SMTP server to deliver messages; if it is unset, NeoMutt will use the program specified by $sendmail.

For details on the URL syntax, please see Section 1.2, “URL Syntax”.

The built-in SMTP support supports encryption (the `smtps` protocol using SSL or TLS) as well as SMTP authentication using SASL. The authentication mechanisms for SASL are specified in $smtp_authenticators defaulting to an empty list which makes NeoMutt try all available methods from most-secure to least-secure.

## 6. OAUTHBEARER and XOAUTH2 Support

Preliminary OAUTH support for IMAP, POP, and SMTP is provided via external scripts.

At least for Gmail, you can use the `oauth2.py` script from Google's gmail-oauth2-tools: https://github.com/google/gmail-oauth2-tools/blob/master/python/oauth2.py

You'll need to get your own oauth client credentials for Gmail here: https://console.developers.google.com/apis/credentials

Then, you'd use `oauth2.py` with `--generate_oauth2_token` to get a refresh token, and configure NeoMutt with:

    set imap_authenticators="oauthbearer"
    set imap_oauth_refresh_command="/path/to/oauth2.py --quiet --user=[email_address]\
        --client_id=[client_id] --client_secret=[client_secret]\
        --refresh_token=[refresh_token]"

For Office365, you can use the `mutt_oauth2.py` script written by Alexander Perlis: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/blob/main/contrib/oauth2/mutt_oauth2.py

You'll need to get your own oauth client credentials by following the script instructions: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/blob/main/contrib/oauth2/mutt_oauth2.py.README

    set imap_authenticators="xoauth2"
    set imap_oauth_refresh_command="/path/to/mutt_oauth2.py /path/to/token"

Substitute pop or smtp for imap in the above examples to configure for those. Please note that xoauth2 support has not yet been implemented for pop.

## 7. Managing Multiple Accounts

Usage:

`account-hook` `regex` `command`

If you happen to have accounts on multiple IMAP, POP and/or SMTP servers, you may find managing all the authentication settings inconvenient and error-prone. The account-hook command may help. This hook works like folder-hook but is invoked whenever NeoMutt needs to access a remote mailbox (including inside the folder browser), not just when you open the mailbox. This includes (for example) polling for new mail, storing Fcc messages and saving messages to a folder. As a consequence, account-hook should only be used to set connection-related settings such as passwords or tunnel commands but not settings such as sender address or name (because in general it should be considered unpredictable which account-hook was last used).

Some examples:

    account-hook . 'unset imap_user; unset imap_pass; unset tunnel'
    account-hook imap://host1/ 'set imap_user=me1 imap_pass=foo'
    account-hook imap://host2/ 'set tunnel="ssh host2 /opt/local/libexec/imapd"'
    account-hook smtp://user@host3/ 'set tunnel="ssh host3 /opt/local/libexec/smtpd"'

To manage multiple accounts with, for example, different values of $record or sender addresses, folder-hook has to be be used together with the mailboxes command.

Example 6.2. Managing multiple accounts

    mailboxes imap://user@host1/INBOX
    folder-hook imap://user@host1/ 'set folder=imap://host1/ ; set record=+INBOX/Sent'
    mailboxes imap://user@host2/INBOX
    folder-hook imap://user@host2/ 'set folder=imap://host2/ ; set record=+INBOX/Sent'

In example Example 6.2, “Managing multiple accounts” the folders are defined using mailboxes so NeoMutt polls them for new mail. Each folder-hook triggers when one mailbox below each IMAP account is opened and sets $folder to the account's root folder. Next, it sets $record to the INBOX/Sent folder below the newly set $folder. Please notice that the value the “+” mailbox shortcut refers to depends on the current value of $folder and therefore has to be set separately per account. Setting other values like $from or $signature is analogous to setting $record.

## 8. Local Caching

NeoMutt contains two types of local caching: (1) the so-called “header caching” and (2) the so-called “body caching” which are both described in this section.

Header caching is optional as it depends on external libraries, body caching is always enabled if NeoMutt is compiled with POP and/or IMAP support as these use it (body caching requires no external library).

### 8.1. Header Caching

NeoMutt provides optional support for caching message headers for the following types of folders: IMAP, POP, Maildir and MH. Header caching greatly speeds up opening large folders because for remote folders, headers usually only need to be downloaded once. For Maildir and MH, reading the headers from a single file is much faster than looking at possibly thousands of single files (since Maildir and MH use one file per message.)

Header caching can be enabled by configuring one of the database backends. One of bdb, gdbm, kyotocabinet, lmdb, qdbm, rocksdb, tdb, tokyocabinet.

If enabled, $header_cache can be used to either point to a file or a directory. If set to point to a file, one database file for all folders will be used (which may result in lower performance), but one file per folder if it points to a directory.

Additionally, $header_cache_backend can be set to specify which backend to use. The list of available backends can be specified at configure time with a set of --with-<backend> options. Currently, the following backends are supported: bdb, gdbm, kyotocabinet, lmdb, qdbm, rocksdb, tdb, tokyocabinet.

Take a look at the benchmark script provided in the following repository: contrib-hcache-benchmark. There you can find a way of finding the storage backend for your needs.

### 8.2. Body Caching

Both cache methods can be combined using the same directory for storage (and for IMAP/POP even provide meaningful file names) which simplifies manual maintenance tasks.

In addition to caching message headers only, NeoMutt can also cache whole message bodies. This results in faster display of messages for POP and IMAP folders because messages usually have to be downloaded only once.

For configuration, the variable $message_cache_dir must point to a directory. There, NeoMutt will create a hierarchy of subdirectories named like the account and mailbox path the cache is for.

### 8.3. Cache Directories

For using both, header and body caching, $header_cache and $message_cache_dir can be safely set to the same value.

In a header or body cache directory, NeoMutt creates a directory hierarchy named like: `proto:user@hostname` where `proto` is either “pop” or “imap.” Within there, for each folder, NeoMutt stores messages in single files and header caches in files with the “.hcache” extension. All files can be removed as needed if the consumed disk space becomes an issue as NeoMutt will silently fetch missing items again. Pathnames are always stored in UTF-8 encoding.

For Maildir and MH, the header cache files are named after the MD5 checksum of the path.

### 8.4. Maintenance

NeoMutt does not (yet) support maintenance features for header cache database files so that files have to be removed in case they grow too big. It depends on the database library used for header caching whether disk space freed by removing messages is re-used.

For body caches, NeoMutt can keep the local cache in sync with the remote mailbox if the $message_cache_clean variable is set. Cleaning means to remove messages from the cache which are no longer present in the mailbox which only happens when other mail clients or instances of NeoMutt using a different body cache location delete messages (NeoMutt itself removes deleted messages from the cache when syncing a mailbox). As cleaning can take a noticeable amount of time, it should not be set in general but only occasionally.

## 9. Sending Anonymous Messages via Mixmaster

You may also have compiled NeoMutt to co-operate with Mixmaster, an anonymous remailer. Mixmaster permits you to send your messages anonymously using a chain of remailers. Mixmaster support in NeoMutt is for mixmaster version 2.04 or later.

To use it, you'll have to obey certain restrictions. Most important, you cannot use the `Cc` and `Bcc` headers. To tell NeoMutt to use mixmaster, you have to select a remailer chain, using the mix function on the compose menu.

The chain selection screen is divided into two parts. In the (larger) upper part, you get a list of remailers you may use. In the lower part, you see the currently selected chain of remailers.

You can navigate in the chain using the `<chain-prev>` and `<chain-next>` functions, which are by default bound to the left and right arrows and to the `h` and `l` keys (think vi keyboard bindings). To insert a remailer at the current chain position, use the `<insert>` function. To append a remailer behind the current chain position, use `<select-entry>` or `<append>`. You can also delete entries from the chain, using the corresponding function. Finally, to abandon your changes, leave the menu, or `<accept>` them pressing (by default) the `Return` key.

Note that different remailers do have different capabilities, indicated in the %c entry of the remailer menu lines (see $mix_entry_format). Most important is the “middleman” capability, indicated by a capital “M”: This means that the remailer in question cannot be used as the final element of a chain, but will only forward messages to other mixmaster remailers. For details on the other capabilities, please have a look at the mixmaster documentation.

## 10. Account Command Feature

### Populate account credentials via an external command

### 10.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2022-05-16

Dependencies: None

### 10.2. Introduction

NeoMutt provides dedicated config variables to specify credentials for network servers. These include `imap_user`, `imap_pass`, `smtp_user`, `smtp_pass`, etc. There are a few downsides to this approach. For one thing, their use encourages storing usernames and passwords in plain text inside a NeoMutt config file. People have come up with solutions to this, including using gpg-encrypted files and populating `my_` variables via external scripts through `source "/path/to/script|"`. However, once the variables are set, the secrets can be inspected with the `set` command. Also, because these config variables are not account-specific, they have been the cause of a proliferation of ways to mimic per-account setups using a combination of convoluted hooks and macros to modify them on folder change or on a keypress.

The goal of this feature is to get rid of most `_user` and `_pass` variables. To do so, we provide a way of specifying an external command that NeoMutt will call to populate account credentials for network servers such as IMAP, POP, or SMTP. The external command is called with a number of arguments indicating the known properties of the account such as the account type and hostname; the external command provides NeoMutt with a list of additional properties such as username and password.

### 10.3. Usage

The variable `account_command` configures an external program to be used to gather account credentials.

    set account_command = "/path/to/my/script.sh"

The program specified will be called by NeoMutt with a number of key-value command line arguments.

- `--hostname val`: the network host name of the service

- `--username val`: the username for the account. This might be specified in the URL itself, e.g., `set folder="imaps://me@example.com@example.com"` or with a dedicated existing variable, e.g. `set imap_user=me@example.com`.

- `--type val`: the type of the account, one of `imap`, `pop`, `smtp`, `nntp`, with an optional trailing `s` if SSL/TLS is required.

The program specified will have to respond by printing to stdout a number of `key: value` lines. NeoMutt currently recognizes the following keys.

- login

- username

- password

Because password can contain any characters, including spaces, we expect lines to match the regex `^([[:alpha:]]+): (.*)$` exactly.

### 10.4. Known Bugs

None

### 10.5. Credits

Pietro Cerutti

## 11. Attach Headers Color Feature

### Color attachment headers using regex, just like mail bodies

### 11.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10

Dependencies: None

### 11.2. Introduction

This feature allows specifying regexes to color attachment headers just like the mail body would. The headers are the parts colored by the `attachment` color. Coloring them is useful to highlight the results of GPGME's signature checks or simply the mimetype or size of the attachment. Only the part matched by the regex is colored.

### 11.3. Usage

The `attach_headers` color should be used just like the `body` color.

    color attach_headers foreground background pattern

### 11.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the attach-headers-color feature.

    # Color if the attachment is autoviewed
    color   attach_headers     brightgreen     default    "Autoview"
    # Color only the brackets around the headers
    color   attach_headers     brightyellow    default    "^\\[--"
    color   attach_headers     brightyellow    default    "--]$"
    # Color the mime type and the size
    color   attach_headers     green           default    "Type: [a-z]+/[a-z0-9\-]+"
    color   attach_headers     green           default    "Size: [0-9\.]+[KM]"
    # Color GPGME signature checks
    color   attach_headers     brightgreen     default    "Good signature from.*"
    color   attach_headers     brightred       default    "Bad signature from.*"
    color   attach_headers     brightred       default    "BAD signature from.*"
    color   attach_headers     brightred       default    "Note: This key has expired!"
    color   attach_headers     brightmagenta   default    "Problem signature from.*"
    color   attach_headers     brightmagenta   default    "WARNING: This key is not certified with a trusted signature!"
    color   attach_headers     brightmagenta   default    "         There is no indication that the signature belongs to the owner."
    color   attach_headers     brightmagenta   default    "can't handle these multiple signatures"
    color   attach_headers     brightmagenta   default    "signature verification suppressed"
    color   attach_headers     brightmagenta   default    "invalid node with packet of type"

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 11.5. See Also

- Color command

- Regular Expressions

### 11.6. Known Bugs

None

### 11.7. Credits

Guillaume Brogi

## 12. Command-line Crypto (-C) Feature

### Enable message security in modes that by default don't enable it

### 12.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2024-01-21

Dependencies: Gpgme

### 12.2. Introduction

This feature allows enabling message security in modes that don't enable it by default. Those include batch mode, sending a postponed message, and resending a message.

This allows using NeoMutt as a driver for git-send-email(1), to send patches in signed and/or encrypted mail.

### 12.3. Usage

To send an email from a file, enabling cryptographic operations as when sending interactively, simply use the `-C` flag.

    $ neomutt -C -H - < /mail/to/be/sent

### 12.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the cli-crypto feature.

    set pgp_default_key = "1111111111111111111111111111111111111111"
    # Sign all mail
    set crypt_autosign = yes
    # Encrypt mail if all recipients have valid public keys
    set crypt_opportunistic_encrypt = yes
    # Sign/encrypt protected headers (Subject)
    set crypt_protected_headers_write = yes
    # Self encrypt mail
    set crypt_self_encrypt = yes

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 12.5. gitconfig

    # Example .gitconfig config file for the cli-crypto feature.

    [sendemail]
    sendmailcmd = neomutt -C -H - && true

### 12.6. Credits

Alejandro Colomar, Richard Russon, Jenya Sovetkin

## 13. Compose to Sender Feature

### Send new mail to the sender of the current mail

### 13.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-10-02

Dependencies: None

### 13.2. Introduction

The compose-to-sender feature adds a new command to start composing a new email to the sender of the current message. This is not a reply, but a new, separate, message.

It works on tagged messages too, sending one email to all of the senders of the tagged messages.

### 13.3. Functions

compose-to-sender adds the following function to NeoMutt. By default, it is not bound to a key.

Table 6.1. compose-to-sender Functions

Menus | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
index,pager | `<compose-to-sender>` | compose a new email to the sender of the current email

### 13.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the compose-to-sender feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Compose a new email (not a reply) to the sender
    bind index,pager @ compose-to-sender

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 13.5. Known Bugs

None

### 13.6. Credits

Brian Medley, Guillaume Brogi

## 14. Compressed Folders Feature

### Read from/write to compressed mailboxes

### 14.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-05-30

Dependencies: None

### 14.2. Introduction

The Compressed Folder feature allows NeoMutt to read mailbox files that are compressed. But it isn't limited to compressed files. It works well with encrypted files, too. In fact, if you can create a program/script to convert to and from your format, then NeoMutt can read it.

The feature adds three hooks to NeoMutt: `open-hook`, `close-hook` and `append-hook`. They define commands to: uncompress a file; compress a file; append messages to an already compressed file.

There are some examples of both compressed and encrypted files, later. For now, the documentation will just concentrate on compressed files.

### 14.3. Commands

`open-hook` `regex` `"shell-command"`
`close-hook` `regex` `"shell-command"`
`append-hook` `regex` `"shell-command"`

The shell-command must contain two placeholders for filenames: `%f` and `%t`. These represent “from” and “to” filenames. These placeholders should be placed inside single-quotes to prevent unintended shell expansions.

If you need the exact string “%f” or “%t” in your command, simply double up the “%” character, e.g. “%%f” or “%%t”.

Table 6.2. Not all Hooks are Required

Open | Close | Append | Effect | Useful if
--- | --- | --- | --- | ---
Open | — | — | Folder is readonly | The folder is just a backup
Open | Close | — | Folder is read/write, but the entire folder must be written if anything is changed | Your compression format doesn't support appending
Open | Close | Append | Folder is read/write and emails can be efficiently added to the end | Your compression format supports appending
Open | — | Append | Folder is readonly, but can be appended to | You want to store emails, but never change them

### Note

The command:

- should return a non-zero exit status on failure

- should not delete any files

#### 14.3.1. Read from compressed mailbox

    open-hook regex "shell-command"

If NeoMutt is unable to open a file, it then looks for `open-hook` that matches the filename.

If your compression program doesn't have a well-defined extension, then you can use `.` as the regex.

Example 6.3. Example of `open-hook`

    open-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout --decompress '%f' > '%t'"

- NeoMutt finds a file, “example.gz”, that it can't read

- NeoMutt has an `open-hook` whose regex matches the filename: `\.gz$`

- NeoMutt uses the command `gzip -cd` to create a temporary file that it can read

#### 14.3.2. Write to a compressed mailbox

    close-hook regex "shell-command"

When NeoMutt has finished with a compressed mail folder, it will look for a matching `close-hook` to recompress the file. This hook is optional.

### Note

If the folder has not been modified, the `close-hook` will not be called.

Example 6.4. Example of `close-hook`

    close-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' > '%f'"

- NeoMutt has finished with a folder, “example.gz”, that it opened with `open-hook`

- The folder has been modified

- NeoMutt has a `close-hook` whose regex matches the filename: `\.gz$`

- NeoMutt uses the command `gzip -c` to create a new compressed file

### Note

The `close-hook` can also include extra options, e.g. compression level: `--best`

#### 14.3.3. Append to a compressed mailbox

    append-hook regex "shell-command"

When NeoMutt wants to append an email to a compressed mail folder, it will look for a matching `append-hook`. This hook is optional.

Using the `append-hook` will save time, but NeoMutt won't be able to determine the type of the mail folder inside the compressed file.

NeoMutt will assume the type to be that of the `$mbox_type` variable. NeoMutt also uses this type for temporary files.

NeoMutt will only use the `append-hook` for existing files. The `close-hook` will be used for empty, or missing files.

### Note

If your command writes to stdout, it is vital that you use `>>` in the “append-hook”. If not, data will be lost.

Example 6.5. Example of `append-hook`

    append-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout '%t' >> '%f'"

- NeoMutt wants to append an email to a folder, “example.gz”, that it opened with `open-hook`

- NeoMutt has an `append-hook` whose regex matches the filename: `\.gz$`

- NeoMutt knows the mailbox type from the `$mbox` variable

- NeoMutt uses the command `gzip -c` to append to an existing compressed file

### Note

The `append-hook` can also include extra options, e.g. compression level: `--best`

#### 14.3.4. Empty Files

NeoMutt assumes that an empty file is not compressed. In this situation, unset $save_empty, so that the compressed file will be removed if you delete all of the messages.

#### 14.3.5. Security

Encrypted files are decrypted into temporary files which are stored in the $tmp_dir directory. This could be a security risk.

### 14.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the compress feature.

    # This feature adds three hooks to NeoMutt which allow it to
    # work with compressed, or encrypted, mailboxes.

    # The hooks are of the form:
    #       open-hook   regex "shell-command"
    #       close-hook  regex "shell-command"
    #       append-hook regex "shell-command"
    # The 'append-hook' is optional.

    # Handler for gzip compressed mailboxes
    open-hook   '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout --decompress '%f' >  '%t'"
    close-hook  '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout              '%t' >  '%f'"
    append-hook '\.gz$' "gzip --stdout              '%t' >> '%f'"
    # Handler for bzip2 compressed mailboxes
    open-hook   '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout --decompress '%f' >  '%t'"
    close-hook  '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout              '%t' >  '%f'"
    append-hook '\.bz2$' "bzip2 --stdout              '%t' >> '%f'"
    # Handler for xz compressed mailboxes
    open-hook   '\.xz$' "xz --stdout --decompress '%f' >  '%t'"
    close-hook  '\.xz$' "xz --stdout              '%t' >  '%f'"
    append-hook '\.xz$' "xz --stdout              '%t' >> '%f'"
    # Handler for pgp encrypted mailboxes
    # PGP does not support appending to an encrypted file
    open-hook   '\.pgp$' "pgp -f < '%f' > '%t'"
    close-hook  '\.pgp$' "pgp -fe YourPgpUserIdOrKeyId < '%t' > '%f'"
    # Handler for gpg encrypted mailboxes
    # gpg does not support appending to an encrypted file
    open-hook   '\.gpg$' "gpg --decrypt < '%f' > '%t'"
    close-hook  '\.gpg$' "gpg --encrypt --recipient YourGpgUserIdOrKeyId < '%t' > '%f'"

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 14.5. See Also

- Regular Expressions

- $tmp_dir

- $mbox_type

- $save_empty

- folder-hook

### 14.6. Credits

Roland Rosenfeld, Alain Penders, Christoph “Myon” Berg, Evgeni Golov, Richard Russon

## 15. Conditional Dates Feature

### Use rules to choose date format

### 15.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies:

  nested-if feature

### 15.2. Introduction

The “Conditional Dates” feature allows you to construct $index_format expressions based on the age of the email.

NeoMutt's default `$index_format` displays email dates in the form: abbreviated-month day-of-month – “Jan 14”.

The format is configurable but only per-mailbox. This feature allows you to configure the display depending on the age of the email.

Table 6.3. Potential Formatting Scheme

Email Sent | Format | Example
--- | --- | ---
Today | `%H:%M` | 13:23
This Month | `%a %d` | Thu 17
This Year | `%b %d` | Dec 10
Older than 1 Year | `%m/%y` | 06/14

For an explanation of the date formatting strings, see `strftime(3).`

By carefully picking your formats, the dates can remain unambiguous and compact.

NeoMutt's conditional format strings have the form: (whitespace introduced for clarity)

    %< TEST ? TRUE & FALSE >

The examples below use the test “%[” – the date of the message in the local timezone. They will also work with “%(” – the local time that the message arrived.

The date tests are of the form:

    %<[nX? TRUE & FALSE >

- “n” is an optional count (defaults to 1 if missing)

- “X” is the time period

Table 6.4. Date Formatting Codes

Letter | Time Period
--- | ---
y | Years
m | Months
w | Weeks
d | Days
H | Hours
M | Minutes

Table 6.5. Example Date Tests

Test | Meaning
--- | ---
`%[y` | This year
`%[1y` | This year
`%[6m` | In the last 6 months
`%[w` | This week
`%[d` | Today
`%[4H` | In the last 4 hours

#### 15.2.1. Example 1

We start with a one-condition test.

Table 6.6. Example 1

Test | Date Range | Format String | Example
--- | --- | --- | ---
`%[1m` | This month | `%[%b %d]` | Dec 10
| Older | `%[%Y-%m-%d]` | 2015-04-23

The $index_format string would contain:

    %<[1m?%[%b %d]&%[%Y-%m-%d]>

Reparsed a little, for clarity, you can see the test condition and the two format strings.

    %<[1m?        &           >

          %[%b %d] %[%Y-%m-%d]

#### 15.2.2. Example 2

This example contains three test conditions and four date formats.

Table 6.7. Example 2

Test | Date Range | Format String | Example
--- | --- | --- | ---
`%[d` | Today | `%[%H:%M ]` | 12:34
`%[m` | This month | `%[%a %d]` | Thu 12
`%[y` | This year | `%[%b %d]` | Dec 10
| Older | `%[%m/%y ]` | 06/15

The $index_format string would contain:

    %<[y?%<[m?%<[d?%[%H:%M ]&%[%a %d]>&%[%b %d]>&%[%m/%y ]>

Reparsed a little, for clarity, you can see the test conditions and the four format strings.

    %<[y?                                       &%[%m/%y ]>  Older
         %<[m?                        &%[%b %d]>             This year
              %<[d?         &%[%a %d]>                       This month
                   %[%H:%M ]                                 Today

This a another view of the same example, with some whitespace for clarity.

    %<[y? %<[m? %<[d? AAA & BBB > & CCC > & DDD >

AAA = %[%H:%M ] BBB = %[%a %d] CCC = %[%b %d] DDD = %[%m/%y ]

### 15.3. Variables

The “Conditional Dates” feature doesn't have any config of its own. It modifies the behavior of the format strings.

### 15.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the cond-date feature.

    #
    # The default index_format is:
    #       '%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s'
    #
    # We replace the date field '%{%b %d}', giving:
    set index_format='%4C %Z %<[y?%<[m?%<[d?%[%H:%M ]&%[%a %d]>&%[%b %d]>&%[%m/%y ]> %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s'
    # Test  Date Range  Format String  Example
    # --------------------------------------------
    # %[d   Today       %[%H:%M ]      12:34
    # %[m   This month  %[%a %d]       Thu 12
    # %[y   This year   %[%b %d]       Dec 10
    #  —    Older       %[%m/%y ]      06/15

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 15.5. See Also

- $index_format

- nested-if feature

- `strftime(3)`

### 15.6. Known Bugs

Date parsing doesn't quite do what you expect. “1w” doesn't mean the “in the last 7 days”, but “this week”. This doesn't match the normal NeoMutt behavior: for example `~d>1w` means emails dated in the last 7 days.

### 15.7. Credits

Aaron Schrab, Eric Davis, Richard Russon

## 16. Encrypt-to-Self Feature

### Save a self-encrypted copy of emails

### 16.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-07-23

Dependencies: None

### 16.2. Introduction

Once you encrypt an email to someone you cannot read it. This is good for security, but bad for record-keeping. If you wanted to keep a copy of an encrypted email you could set $fcc_clear.

A better option is to enable $smime_self_encrypt, then set $smime_default_key to your personal S/MIME key id.

    set smime_self_encrypt = yes
    set smime_default_key  = bb345e23.0

Or, if you use PGP, $pgp_self_encrypt, then set $pgp_default_key to your personal PGP key id.

    set pgp_self_encrypt = yes
    set pgp_default_key  = A4AF18C5582473BD35A1E9CE78BB3D480042198E

If you have different key for signing, then you can set $pgp_sign_as or $smime_sign_as respectively.

### 16.3. Variables

Table 6.8. encrypt-self Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`pgp_default_key` | string | (empty)
`pgp_self_encrypt` | boolean | `yes`
`pgp_sign_as` | string | (empty)
`smime_default_key` | string | (empty)
`smime_self_encrypt` | boolean | `yes`
`smime_sign_as` | string | (empty)

### 16.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the encrypt-to-self feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Save a copy of outgoing email, encrypted to yourself
    set pgp_self_encrypt = "yes"
    set pgp_default_key = "PGP-KEY"
    # set pgp_sign_as = "PGP-SIGNING-KEY"

    # Save a copy of outgoing email, encrypted to yourself
    set smime_self_encrypt = "yes"
    set smime_default_key = "SMIME-KEY"
    # set smime_sign_as = "SMIME-SIGNING-KEY"

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 16.5. Known Bugs

None

### 16.6. Credits

Omen Wild, Richard Russon, Guillaume Brogi

## 17. Fmemopen Feature

### Replace some temporary files with memory buffers

### 17.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies:

  `open_memstream()`, `fmemopen()` from glibc

This feature can be enabled by running `configure` with the option `--fmemopen`

### 17.2. Introduction

The “fmemopen” feature speeds up some searches.

This feature changes a few places where NeoMutt creates temporary files. It replaces them with in-memory buffers. This should improve the performance when searching the header or body using the $thorough_search option.

There are no user-configurable parts.

This feature depends on `open_memstream()` and `fmemopen()`. They are provided by glibc. Without them, NeoMutt will simply create temporary files.

### 17.3. See Also

- Compile-Time Features

- `fmemopen(3)`

### 17.4. Known Bugs

debian bug 834408

### 17.5. Credits

Julius Plenz, Richard Russon

## 18. Forgotten Attachment Feature

### Alert user when (s)he forgets to attach a file to an outgoing email.

### 18.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10

Dependencies: None

### 18.2. Introduction

The “forgotten-attachment” feature provides a new setting for NeoMutt that alerts the user if the message body contains a certain keyword but there are no attachments added. This is meant to ensure that the user does not forget to attach a file after promising to do so in the mail. The attachment keyword will not be scanned in text matched by $quote_regex.

### 18.3. Variables

Table 6.9. forgotten-attachment Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`abort_noattach_regex` | regular expression | `\\<(attach|attached|attachments?)\\>`
`abort_noattach` | quadoption | `no`

### 18.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the forgotten-attachment feature.

    # The 'forgotten-attachment' feature provides a new setting for NeoMutt that
    # alerts the user if the message body contains a certain regular expression but there are
    # no attachments added. This is meant to ensure that the user does not forget
    # to attach a file after promising to do so in the mail.

    # Ask if the user wishes to abort sending if $abort_noattach_regex is found in the
    # body, but no attachments have been added
    # It can be set to:
    #    "yes"     : always abort
    #    "ask-yes" : ask whether to abort
    #    "no"      : send the mail
    set abort_noattach = no
    # Search for the following regular expression in the body of the email
    # English: attach, attached, attachment, attachments
    set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<attach(|ed|ments?)\\>"
    # Nederlands:
    # set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<(bijvoegen|bijgevoegd|bijlage|bijlagen)\\>"
    # Deutsch:
    # set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<(anhängen|angehängt|anhang|anhänge|hängt an)\\>"
    # Français:
    # set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<(attaché|attachés|attache|attachons|joint|jointe|joints|jointes|joins|joignons)\\>"

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 18.5. See Also

- The Attachment Menu

- The Attachment Menu key mappings

### 18.6. Known Bugs

None

### 18.7. Credits

Darshit Shah, Richard Russon, Johannes Weißl, Steven Ragnarök

## 19. Global Hooks

### Define actions to run globally within NeoMutt

### 19.1. Introduction

These hooks are called when global events take place in NeoMutt.

Run a command...

- timeout-hook – periodically

- startup-hook – when NeoMutt starts up, before opening the first mailbox

- shutdown-hook – NeoMutt shuts down, before closing the last mailbox

The commands are NeoMutt commands. If you want to run an external shell command, you need to run them like this:

    startup-hook 'echo `action.sh ARGS`'

The single quotes prevent the backticks from being expanded. The `echo` command prevents an empty command error.

#### 19.1.1. Timeout Hook

##### Run a command periodically

Since: NeoMutt 2016-08-08

This feature implements a new hook that is called periodically when NeoMutt checks for new mail. This hook is called every `$timeout` seconds.

#### 19.1.2. Startup Hook

##### Run a command when NeoMutt starts up, before opening the first mailbox

Since: NeoMutt 2016-11-25

This feature implements a new hook that is called when NeoMutt first starts up, but before opening the first mailbox. This is most likely to be useful to users of notmuch.

#### 19.1.3. Shutdown Hook

##### Run a command when NeoMutt shuts down, before closing the last mailbox

Since: NeoMutt 2016-11-25

This feature implements a hook that is called when NeoMutt shuts down, but before closing the last mailbox. This is most likely to be useful to users of notmuch.

### 19.2. Commands

`timeout-hook` `command`

`startup-hook` `command`

`shutdown-hook` `command`

### 19.3. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the global hooks feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # COMMANDS – shown with an example argument
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # After $timeout seconds of inactivity, run this NeoMutt command
    timeout-hook 'exec sync-mailbox'
    # When NeoMutt first loads, run this NeoMutt command
    startup-hook 'exec sync-mailbox'
    # When NeoMutt quits, run this NeoMutt command
    shutdown-hook 'exec sync-mailbox'

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 19.4. See Also

- $timeout

### 19.5. Known Bugs

None

### 19.6. Credits

Armin Wolfermann, Richard Russon, Thomas Adam

## 20. Header Cache Compression Feature

### Options for compressing the header cache files

### 20.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2020-02-22

Dependencies: header cache

### 20.2. Introduction

The Header Cache Compression Feature can be used for speeding up the loading of large mailboxes. Also the space used on disk can be shrunk by about 50% - depending on the compression method being used.

The implementation sits on top of the header caching functions. So the header cache compression can be used together with all available database backends.

### 20.3. Variables

Table 6.10. Header Cache Compression Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`header_cache_compress_method` | string | (empty)
`header_cache_compress_level` | number | `1`

The `header_cache_compress_method` can be (empty) - which means, that no header cache compression should be used. But when set to lz4, zlib or zstd - then the compression is turned on.

The `header_cache_compress_level` defines the compression level, which should be used together with the selected `header_cache_compress_method`. Here is an overview of the possible settings:

Table 6.11. Header Cache Compression Methods and it's Levels

Method Name | Min | Max
--- | --- | ---
`lz4` | 1 | 12
`zlib` | 1 | 9
`zstd` | 1 | 22

### 20.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the header cache compression feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    set header_cache_compress_level = 1
    set header_cache_compress_method = ""

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 20.5. Known Bugs

None

### 20.6. Credits

Tino Reichardt

## 21. Ifdef Feature

### Conditional config options

### 21.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies: None

### 21.2. Introduction

The “ifdef” feature introduces three new commands to NeoMutt and allows you to share one config file between versions of NeoMutt that may have different features compiled in.

    ifdef  symbol "config-command [args...]"  # If a symbol is defined
    ifndef symbol "config-command [args...]"  # If a symbol is not defined
    finish                                    # Finish reading the current file

Table 6.12. ifdef Symbols

Example Symbol | Description
--- | ---
`sidebar_format` | Config variable
`status-color`, `imap` | Compiled-in feature
`pgp-menu`, `group-related` | Function
`index-format-hook`, `tag-transforms` | Command
`my_var` | My variable
`lmdb`, `tokyocabinet` | Store (database)
`HOME`, `COLUMNS` | Environment variable

A list of compile-time symbols can be seen in the output of the command

    neomutt -v

(in the “Compile options” section).

`finish` is particularly useful when combined with `ifndef`. e.g.

    # Sidebar config file
    ifndef sidebar finish

### 21.3. Commands

`ifdef` `symbol` `"config-command [args...]"`
`ifndef` `symbol` `"config-command [args...]"`
`finish`

### 21.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the ifdef feature.

    # This feature introduces three useful commands which allow you to share
    # one config file between versions of NeoMutt that may have different
    # features compiled in.

    #   ifdef  symbol "config-command [args...]"
    #   ifndef symbol "config-command [args...]"
    #   finish
    # The 'ifdef' command tests whether NeoMutt understands the name of
    # a variable, environment variable, function, command or compile-time symbol.

    # If it does, then it executes a config command.

    # The 'ifndef' command tests whether a symbol does NOT exist.

    # The 'finish' command tells NeoMutt to stop reading current config file.

    # If the 'trash' variable exists, set it.
    ifdef trash 'set trash=~/Mail/trash'
    # If the 'PS1' environment variable exists, source config file.
    ifdef PS1 'source .neomutt/interactive.rc'
    # If the 'tag-pattern' function exists, bind a key to it.
    ifdef tag-pattern 'bind index <F6> tag-pattern'
    # If the 'imap-fetch-mail' command exists, read my IMAP config.
    ifdef imap-fetch-mail 'source ~/.neomutt/imap.rc'
    # If the compile-time symbol 'sidebar' does not exist, then
    # stop reading the current config file.
    ifndef sidebar finish

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 21.5. Known Bugs

None

### 21.6. Credits

Cedric Duval, Matteo F. Vescovi, Richard Russon

## 22. Index Color Feature

### Custom rules for theming the email index

### 22.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies:

  status-color feature

### 22.2. Introduction

The “index-color” feature allows you to specify colors for individual parts of the email index. e.g. Subject, Author, Flags.

First choose which part of the index you'd like to color. Then, if needed, pick a pattern to match.

Note: The pattern does not have to refer to the object you wish to color. e.g.

    color index_author red default "~sneomutt"

The author appears red when the subject (~s) contains “neomutt”.

### 22.3. Colors

All the colors default to `default`, i.e. unset.

The index objects can be themed using the `color` command and an optional pattern. A missing pattern is equivalent to a match-all `.*` pattern.

    color index-object foreground background [pattern]

Table 6.13. Index Colors

Object | Highlights
--- | ---
`index` | Entire index line
`index_author` | Author name, %A %a %F %L %n
`index_collapsed` | Number of messages in a collapsed thread, %M
`index_date` | Date field
`index_flags` | Message flags, %S %Z
`index_label` | Message label, %y %Y
`index_number` | Message number, %C
`index_size` | Message size, %c %cr %l
`index_subject` | Subject, %s
`index_tag` | Message tags, `%G`
`index_tags` | Transformed message tags, `%g` `%J`

### 22.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the index-color feature.

    # Entire index line
    color index white black '.*'
    # Author name, %A %a %F %L %n
    # Give the author column a dark grey background
    color index_author default color234 '.*'
    # Highlight a particular from (~f)
    color index_author brightyellow color234 '~fRay Charles'
    # Message flags, %S %Z
    # Highlight the flags for flagged (~F) emails
    color index_flags default red '~F'
    # Subject, %s
    # Look for a particular subject (~s)
    color index_subject brightcyan default '~s\(closes #[0-9]+\)'
    # Number of messages in a collapsed thread, %M
    color index_collapsed default brightblue
    # Date field
    color index_date green default
    # Message label, %y %Y
    color index_label default brightgreen
    # Message number, %C
    color index_number red default
    # Message size, %c %cr %l
    color index_size cyan default

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 22.5. See Also

- Regular Expressions

- Patterns

- $index_format

- Color command

- Status-Color feature

### 22.6. Known Bugs

None

### 22.7. Credits

Christian Aichinger, Christoph “Myon” Berg, Elimar Riesebieter, Eric Davis, Vladimir Marek, Richard Russon

## 23. Initials Expando Feature

### Expando for author's initials

### 23.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies: None

### 23.2. Introduction

The “initials” feature adds an expando (%I) for an author's initials.

The index panel displays a list of emails. Its layout is controlled by the $index_format variable. Using this expando saves space in the index panel. This can be useful if you are regularly working with a small set of people.

### 23.3. Variables

This feature has no config of its own. It adds an expando which can be used in the $index_format variable.

### 23.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the initials feature.

    # The 'initials' feature has no config of its own.

    # It adds an expando for an author's initials,
    # which can be used in the 'index_format' variable.

    # The default 'index_format' is:
    set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s'
    # Where %L represents the author/recipient
    # This might look like:
    #       1   + Nov 17 David Bowie   Changesbowie    ( 689)
    #       2   ! Nov 17 Stevie Nicks  Rumours         ( 555)
    #       3   + Nov 16 Jimi Hendrix  Voodoo Child    ( 263)
    #       4   + Nov 16 Debbie Harry  Parallel Lines  ( 540)
    # Using the %I expando:
    set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %I (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s'
    # This might look like:
    #       1   + Nov 17 DB Changesbowie    ( 689)
    #       2   ! Nov 17 SN Rumours         ( 555)
    #       3   + Nov 16 JH Voodoo Child    ( 263)
    #       4   + Nov 16 DH Parallel Lines  ( 540)

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 23.5. See Also

- $index_format

- index-color feature

- folder-hook

### 23.6. Known Bugs

None

### 23.7. Credits

Vsevolod Volkov, Richard Russon

## 24. Kyoto Cabinet Feature

### Kyoto Cabinet backend for the header cache

### 24.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-10-02

Dependencies:

  Kyoto Cabinet libraries

To check if NeoMutt supports Kyoto Cabinet, look for

- “kyoto” in the NeoMutt version.

- “+hcache” in the compile options

- “hcache backend: kyotocabinet” in the NeoMutt version

### 24.2. Introduction

This feature adds support for using Kyoto Cabinet, the successor to Tokyo Cabinet, as a storage backend for NeoMutt's header cache (hcache). It is enabled at configure time with the --with-kyotocabinet=<path> switch.

### 24.3. See Also

- Local Caching

- Kyoto Cabinet

### 24.4. Known Bugs

None

### 24.5. Credits

Clemens Lang

## 25. Limit Current Thread Feature

### Focus on one Email Thread

### 25.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-28

Dependencies: None

### 25.2. Introduction

This feature adds a new way of using the Limit Command. The `<limit-current-thread>` function restricts the view to just the current thread. Setting the limit (the `l` key) to “all” will restore the full email list.

### 25.3. Functions

Limit-current-thread adds the following function to NeoMutt. By default, it is not bound to a key.

Table 6.14. Limit-Current-Thread Functions

Menus | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
index | `<limit-current-thread>` | Limit view to current thread

### 25.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the limit-current-thread feature.

    # Limit view to current thread
    bind index <esc>L limit-current-thread

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 25.5. Known Bugs

None

### 25.6. Credits

David Sterba, Richard Russon

## 26. LMDB Feature

### LMDB backend for the header cache

### 26.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-07-23

Dependencies: None

### 26.2. Introduction

This feature adds support for using LMDB as a storage backend for NeoMutt's header cache (hcache). It is enabled at configure time with the --with-lmdb=<path> switch.

### Note

It is not recommended to store the lmdb database on a shared drive.

### 26.3. See Also

- Local Caching

### 26.4. Known Bugs

None

### 26.5. Credits

Pietro Cerutti, Jan-Piet Mens, Clemens Lang

## 27. Multiple FCC Feature

### Save multiple copies of outgoing mail

### 27.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-08-08

Dependencies: None

### 27.2. Introduction

This feature allows the user to save outgoing emails in multiple folders.

Folders should be listed separated by commas, but no spaces.

The “fcc” field of an email can be set in two ways:

- The <edit-fcc> command in the compose menu (default key: “f”)

- Creating a `fcc-hook` in your `.neomuttrc`

### 27.3. See Also

- $record

- fcc-hook

### 27.4. Known Bugs

None

### 27.5. Credits

Omen Wild, Richard Russon

## 28. Nested If Feature

### Allow complex nested conditions in format strings

### 28.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies: None

### 28.2. Introduction

NeoMutt's format strings can contain embedded if-then-else conditions. They are of the form:

    %?VAR?TRUE&FALSE?

If the variable “VAR” has a value greater than zero, print the “TRUE” string, otherwise print the “FALSE” string.

e.g. `%?S?Size: %S&Empty?`

Which can be read as:

if (%S > 0) { print "Size: %S" } else { print "Empty" }

These conditions are useful, but in NeoMutt they cannot be nested within one another. This feature uses the notation `%<VAR?TRUE&FALSE>` and allows them to be nested.

The `%<...>` notation was used to format the current local time. but that's not really very useful since NeoMutt has no means of refreshing the screen periodically.

A simple nested condition might be: (Some whitespace has been introduced for clarity)

    %<x? %<y? XY & X > & %<y? Y & NONE > >  Conditions
         %<y? XY & X >                      x>0
              XY                            x>0,y>0
                   X                        x>0,y=0

    %<x? %<y? XY & X > & %<y? Y & NONE > >  Conditions
                         %<y? Y & NONE >    x=0
                              Y             x=0,y>0
                                  NONE      x=0,y=0

Equivalent to:

if (x > 0) {
if (y > 0) {
print 'XY'
} else {
print 'X'
}
} else {
if (y > 0) {
print 'Y'
} else {
print 'NONE'
}
}

Examples:

    set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %s%> %<M?%M Msgs &%<l?%l Lines&%c Bytes>>'

if a thread is folded display the number of messages (%M)
else if we know how many lines in the message display lines in message (%l)
else display the size of the message in bytes (%c)

    set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %<M?[%M] %s&%s%* %<l?%l&%c>>'

if a thread is folded display the number of messages (%M) and the subject (%s)
else if we know how many lines are in the message display subject (%s) and the lines in message (%l)
else display the subject (%s) and the size of the message in bytes (%c)

### Note

If you wish to use angle brackets `< >` in a nested condition, then it's necessary to escape them, e.g.

    set index_format='%<M?\<%M\>&%s>'

### 28.3. Variables

The “nested-if” feature doesn't have any config of its own. It modifies the behavior of the format strings.

### 28.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the nested-if feature.

    # This feature uses the format: '%<VAR?TRUE&FALSE>' for conditional
    # format strings that can be nested.

    # Example 1
    # if a thread is folded
    #       display the number of messages (%M)
    # else if we know how many lines in the message
    #       display lines in message (%l)
    # else display the size of the message in bytes (%c)
    set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %s%> %<M?%M Msgs &%<l?%l Lines&%c Bytes>>'

    # Example 2
    # if a thread is folded
    #       display the number of messages (%M)
    #       display the subject (%s)
    # else if we know how many lines in the message
    #       display lines in message (%l)
    # else
    #       display the size of the message in bytes (%c)
    set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-25.25n %<M?[%M] %s&%s%* %<l?%l&%c>>'

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 28.5. See Also

- cond-date feature

- $index_format

- $status_format

### 28.6. Known Bugs

This feature is hard to understand

### 28.7. Credits

David Champion, Richard Russon, Aleksa Sarai

## 29. New Mail Feature

### Execute a command upon the receipt of new mail.

### 29.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-07-23

Dependencies: None

### 29.2. Introduction

This feature enables the new_mail_command setting, which can be used to execute a custom script (e.g. a notification handler) upon receiving a new mail.

The command string can contain expandos, such as `%n` for the number of new messages. For a complete list, see: $status_format.

### Note

When the notification is sent, the folder of the new mail is no longer known. This is a limitation of NeoMutt. The `%f` expando will show the open folder.

When using Maildir local mailboxes, you must set $check_new config variable for this feature to work.

For example in Linux you can use (most distributions already provide notify-send):

    set new_mail_command="notify-send --icon='/home/santiago/Pictures/neomutt.png' \
      'New Email' '%n new messages, %u unread.' &"

And in OS X you will need to install a command line interface for Notification Center, for example terminal-notifier:

    set new_mail_command="terminal-notifier -title '%v' -subtitle 'New Mail' \
      -message '%n new messages, %u unread.' -activate 'com.apple.Terminal'"

### 29.3. Variables

Table 6.15. New Mail Command Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`new_mail_command` | string | (empty)

### 29.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the new-mail feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Set the command you want NeoMutt to execute upon the receipt of a new email
    set new_mail_command = ""
    # Linux example:
    # set new_mail_command="notify-send --icon='/home/santiago/Pictures/neomutt.png' \
    #   'New Email in %f' '%n new messages, %u unread.' &"
    # OS X example:
    # set new_mail_command="terminal-notifier -title '%v' -subtitle 'New Mail in %f' \
    #   -message '%n new messages, %u unread.' -activate 'com.apple.Terminal'"
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 29.5. See Also

- folder-hook

### 29.6. Known Bugs

None

### 29.7. Credits

Yoshiki Vazquez-Baeza, Santiago Torres-Arias, Richard Russon

## 30. NNTP Feature

### Talk to a Usenet news server

### 30.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-05-30

Dependencies: None

### 30.2. Introduction

Reading news via NNTP

NeoMutt can read from a news server using NNTP.

The default news server can be obtained from the `$NNTPSERVER` environment variable or from the `/etc/nntpserver` file. Like in other news readers, information about the subscribed newsgroups is saved in the file specified by the $newsrc variable. You can open a newsgroup with the function `<change-newsgroup>`

When browsing the list of newsgroups on the server the function `<subscribe>` can be used to tell NeoMutt the groups of interest to you. This list is stored in the $newsrc file, so NeoMutt remembers it across invocations (see also $save_unsubscribed). With the `<unsubscribe>` function a group can be deleted from that list. You can also specify the list of interesting groups with the mailboxes command in your config file.

When checking for new messages, NeoMutt only polls the subscribed newsgroups.

The variable $news_cache_dir can be used to point to a directory. NeoMutt will create a hierarchy of subdirectories named like the account and newsgroup the cache is for. The hierarchy is also used to store header cache if NeoMutt was compiled with header cache support.

### 30.3. Variables

Table 6.16. NNTP Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`ask_followup_to` | boolean | `no`
`ask_x_comment_to` | boolean | `no`
`catchup_newsgroup` | quad | `ask-yes`
`followup_to_poster` | quad | `ask-yes`
`group_index_format` | string | `%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d`
`inews` | string | (empty)
`newsgroups_charset` | string | `utf-8`
`newsrc` | string | `~/.newsrc`
`news_cache_dir` | string | `~/.neomutt`
`news_server` | string | (empty)
`nntp_authenticators` | string | (empty)
`nntp_context` | number | `1000`
`nntp_listgroup` | boolean | `yes`
`nntp_load_description` | boolean | `yes`
`nntp_pass` | string | (empty)
`nntp_poll` | number | `60`
`nntp_user` | string | (empty)
`post_moderated` | quad | `ask-yes`
`save_unsubscribed` | boolean | `no`
`show_new_news` | boolean | `yes`
`show_only_unread` | boolean | `no`
`x_comment_to` | boolean | `no`

### 30.4. Functions

NNTP adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.

Table 6.17. NNTP Functions

Menus | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
browser,index | `<catchup>` | mark all articles in newsgroup as read
index,pager | `<change-newsgroup>` | open a different newsgroup
compose | `<edit-followup-to>` | edit the Followup-To field
compose | `<edit-newsgroups>` | edit the newsgroups list
compose | `<edit-x-comment-to>` | edit the X-Comment-To field
attach,index,pager | `<followup-message>` | followup to newsgroup
index,pager | `<post-message>` | post message to newsgroup
browser | `<reload-active>` | load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server
browser | `<subscribe>` | subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only)
browser | `<subscribe-pattern>` | subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern
browser | `<uncatchup>` | mark all articles in newsgroup as unread
browser | `<unsubscribe>` | unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only)
browser | `<unsubscribe-pattern>` | unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern
index,pager | `<change-newsgroup-readonly>` | open a different newsgroup in read only mode
attach,index,pager | `<forward-to-group>` | forward to newsgroup
index | `<get-children>` | get all children of the current message
index | `<get-parent>` | get parent of the current message
index | `<reconstruct-thread>` | reconstruct thread containing current message
index | `<get-message>` | get message with Message-Id

### 30.5. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the nntp feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    set ask_followup_to = no
    set ask_x_comment_to = no
    set catchup_newsgroup = ask-yes
    set followup_to_poster = ask-yes
    set group_index_format = '%4C %M%N %5s  %-45.45f %d'
    set inews = ''
    set newsgroups_charset = utf-8
    set newsrc = '~/.newsrc'
    set news_cache_dir = '~/.neomutt'
    set news_server = ''
    set nntp_authenticators = ''
    set nntp_context = 1000
    set nntp_listgroup = yes
    set nntp_load_description = yes
    set nntp_pass = ''
    set nntp_poll = 60
    set nntp_user = ''
    set post_moderated = ask-yes
    set save_unsubscribed = no
    set show_new_news = yes
    set show_only_unread = no
    set x_comment_to = no
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # mark all articles in newsgroup as read
    bind browser,index y catchup
    # open a different newsgroup
    bind index,pager i change-newsgroup
    # edit the Followup-To field
    bind compose o edit-followup-to
    # edit the newsgroups list
    bind compose N edit-newsgroups
    # edit the X-Comment-To field
    bind compose x edit-x-comment-to
    # followup to newsgroup
    bind attach,index,pager F followup-message
    # post message to newsgroup
    bind index,pager P post-message
    # load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server
    bind browser g reload-active
    # subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only)
    bind browser s subscribe
    # subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern
    bind browser S subscribe-pattern
    # mark all articles in newsgroup as unread
    bind browser Y uncatchup
    # unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only)
    bind browser u unsubscribe
    # unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern
    bind browser U unsubscribe-pattern
    # open a different newsgroup in read only mode
    bind index,pager \ei change-newsgroup-readonly
    # forward to newsgroup
    bind attach,index,pager \eF forward-to-group
    # get all children of the current message
    # bind index ??? get-children
    # get parent of the current message
    bind index \eG get-parent
    # reconstruct thread containing current message
    # bind index ??? reconstruct-thread
    # get message with Message-Id
    bind index \CG get-message
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 30.6. Known Bugs

None

### 30.7. Credits

Vsevolod Volkov, Felix von Leitner, Richard Russon

## 31. Custom backend based Tags Feature

### Implements Notmuch tags and Imap keywords

### 31.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2017-10-16

Dependencies:

- quasi-delete feature

- index-color feature

### 31.2. Introduction

Some backends allow to index and tag mail without storing the tags within the mail envelope. Two backends are currently implementing this feature. Notmuch handles them natively and IMAP stores them in custom IMAP keywords.

### 31.3. Variables

Table 6.18. Custom tags Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`hidden_tags` | string | `unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted`

### 31.4. Functions

Notmuch adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.

Table 6.19. Notmuch/IMAP Functions

Menus | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
index,pager | `<modify-labels>` | add, remove, or toggle tags: IMAP: edit the tags list Notmuch: [+]<tag> to add, -<tag> to remove, !<tag> to toggle(notmuch) tags. Note: Tab completion of tag names is available
index,pager | `<modify-labels-then-hide>` | add, remove, or toggle tags IMAP: edit the tags list Notmuch: [+]<tag> to add, -<tag> to remove, !<tag> to toggle labels and then hide or unhide the message by changing the "quasi-deleted" to match if it would be shown when requerying. Normal redisplay rules apply here, so the user must call <sync-mailbox> for the changes to be displayed. Note: Tab completion of tag names is available.

### 31.5. Commands

`tag-transforms` `tag` `transformed-string` { `tag` `transformed-string` ...}
`tag-formats` `tag` `format-string` { `tag` `format-string` ...}

### 31.6. Colors

Adds the objects, below, to index-color feature. The objects can take an optional pattern.

Table 6.20. Index Colors

Object | Highlights
--- | ---
`index_tag` | an individual message tag, %G, uses tag name
`index_tags` | the transformed message tags, %g or %J

### 31.7. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the custom tags feature.

    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # This variable specifies private notmuch tags which should not be printed
    # on screen (index, pager).
    set hidden_tags = "unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted"
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # modify (notmuch/imap) tags
    bind index,pager \` modify-labels
    # modify (notmuch/imap) tag non-interactively.
    macro index,pager tt "<modify-labels>!todo\n" "Toggle the 'todo' tag"
    # modify labels and then hide message
    # bind index,pager ??? modify-labels-then-hide
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # COMMANDS – shown with an example
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Replace some tags with icons
    # tag-transforms tag transformed-string { tag transformed-string ...}
    # tag-transforms "inbox"   "i"   \
    #                "unread"  "u"   \
    #                "replied" "↻ "  \
    #                "sent"    "➥ "  \
    #                "todo"    "T"   \
    #                "deleted" "DEL" \
    #                "invites" "CAL"

    # The formats must start with 'G' and the entire sequence is case sensitive.
    # tag-formats tag format-string { tag format-string ...}
    # tag-formats "inbox"   "GI" \
    #             "unread"  "GU" \
    #             "replied" "GR" \
    #             "sent"    "GS" \
    #             "todo"    "Gt" \
    #             "deleted" "GD" \
    #             "invites" "Gi"

    # Now instead of using '%g' or '%J' in your $index_format, which lists all tags
    # in a non-deterministic order, you can something like the following which puts
    # a transformed tag name in a specific spot on the index line:
    # set index_format='%4C %S %[%y.%m.%d] %-18.18n %<GU?%GU& > %<GR?%GR& > %<GI?%GI& > %s'

    # The %G formatting sequence may display all tags including tags hidden by
    # hidden_tags.
    #
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # COLORS – some unpleasant examples are given
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # These symbols are added to the index-color feature:
    # an individual message tag, %G, uses tag name
    color index_tag red white "inbox"
    # the transformed message tags, %g
    color index_tags green default
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 31.8. Credits

Mehdi Abaakouk, Richard Russon, Bernard 'Guyzmo' Pratz

## 32. Notmuch Feature

### Email search engine

### 32.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-17

Dependencies:

- quasi-delete feature

- index-color feature

- Notmuch libraries

### 32.2. Introduction

Notmuch is an email fulltext indexing and tagging engine.

- For more information, see: https://notmuchmail.org/

- More examples: https://notmuchmail.org/mutttips/

### 32.3. Using Notmuch

#### 32.3.1. Folders URL

notmuch://[<path>][?<item>=<name>[& ...]]

The <path> is an absolute path to the directory where the notmuch database is found as returned by “notmuch config get database.path” command. Note that the <path> should NOT include `.notmuch` directory name.

If the "<path>" is not defined then `$nm_default_url` or `$folder` is used, for example:

    set nm_default_url = "notmuch:///home/foo/maildir"
    virtual-mailboxes "My INBOX" "notmuch://?query=tag:inbox"

#### 32.3.2. Items

query=<string>

See SEARCH SYNTAX in notmuch man page. Don't forget to use operators (“and”/“or”) in your queries.

Note that proper URL should not contain blank space and all “bad” chars should be encoded, for example

`tag:AAA and tag:BBB` – encoding -> `tag:AAA%20and%20tag:BBB`

but NeoMutt config file parser is smart enough to accept space in quoted strings. It means that you can use

`notmuch:///foo?query=tag:AAA and tag:BBB`

in your config files to keep things readable.

For more details about Xapian queries, see: https://xapian.org/docs/queryparser.html

limit=<number>

Restricts number of messages/threads in the result. The default limit is nm_db_limit.

Due to a limitation with `libnotmuch`, unread and flagged message count may be inaccurate with limit statements. `libnotmuch` cannot return a specific tag count within the first X messages of a query.

type=<threads|messages>

Reads all matching messages or whole-threads. The default is 'messages' or nm_query_type.

### 32.4. Variables

Table 6.21. Notmuch Variables

Name | Type | Default | Note
--- | --- | --- | ---
`nm_config_file` | path | `auto` | Configuration file for the notmuch database. Either a path, `auto` for detecting a config. file, or empty for no configuration file. Only useful for notmuch 0.32+.
`nm_config_profile` | string | (empty) | Configuration profile for the notmuch database. Only useful for notmuch 0.32+.
`nm_db_limit` | number | `0` |
`nm_default_url` | string | (empty) | Must use format: `notmuch://<absolute path>`
`nm_exclude_tags` | string | (empty) |
`nm_flagged_tag` | string | `flagged` |
`nm_open_timeout` | number | `5` |
`nm_query_type` | string | `messages` |
`nm_query_window_current_position` | number | `0` | Position of current search window
`nm_query_window_current_search` | string | (empty) | Current search parameters
`nm_query_window_duration` | number | `0` | Duration between start and end dates for windowed notmuch query. This corresponds to a bounded notmuch `date:` query. See `notmuch-search-terms` manual page for more info. Value of `0` disables windowed queries unless `nm_query_window_enable=yes`
`nm_query_window_enable` | boolean | `no` | Enables windowed notmuch queries for `nm_query_window_duration = 0`
`nm_query_window_or_terms` | string | (empty) | Additional notmuch search terms to always include in the window even if they're outside the date range. This turns the window from `date:...` to `date:... or (additional search terms.)` For example, to always include flagged, unread emails, set to `tag:flagged and tag:unread`
`nm_query_window_timebase` | string | `week` | Time base for windowed notmuch queries. Must be one of: `hour`, `day`, `week`, `month`, or `year`
`nm_record` | boolean | `no` |
`nm_record_tags` | string | (empty) |
`nm_unread_tag` | string | `unread` |
`virtual_spool_file` | boolean | `no` | Unnecessary since $spool_file supports mailbox descriptions.

More variables about tags configuration can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature

### 32.5. Functions

Notmuch adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.

Table 6.22. Notmuch Functions

Menus | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
index,pager | `<change-vfolder>` | switch to another virtual folder, a new folder maybe be specified by vfolder description (see virtual-mailboxes) or URL. the default is next vfolder with unread messages
index,pager | `<entire-thread>` | read entire thread of the current message
index,pager | `<sidebar-toggle-virtual>` | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes
index,pager | `<vfolder-from-query>` | generate virtual folder from notmuch search query. Note: TAB completion of 'tag:' names is available.
index,pager | `<vfolder-from-query-readonly>` | The same as `<vfolder-from-query>`; however, the mailbox will be read-only.
index | `<vfolder-window-forward>` | generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window forward
index | `<vfolder-window-backward>` | generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window backward
index | `<vfolder-window-reset>` | generate virtual folder by moving the query's time window to the present

More functions about tags can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature

### 32.6. Commands

`virtual-mailboxes` `description` `notmuch-URL` { `description` `notmuch-URL` ...}
`unvirtual-mailboxes` { `*` | `mailbox` ... }

`virtual-mailboxes` is like the mailboxes command, except that it takes a description. The mailbox will be watched for new mail and will appear in the sidebar.

`unvirtual-mailboxes` is identical to the `unmailboxes` command.

More commands about tags can be found in Custom backend Tags Feature

### 32.7. Colors

See Custom backend Tags colors

### 32.8. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the notmuch feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # This variable specifies notmuch query limit.
    set nm_db_limit = 0
    # This variable specifies the default Notmuch database in format:
    # notmuch://<absolute path>
    set nm_default_url = ""
    # The messages tagged with these tags are excluded and not loaded
    # from notmuch DB to NeoMutt unless specified explicitly.
    set nm_exclude_tags = ""
    # This option specifies timeout for Notmuch database. Default is 5 seconds.
    set nm_open_timeout = 5
    # This variable specifies notmuch query type, supported types: 'threads' and
    # 'messages'.
    set nm_query_type = messages
    # When writing a message in the NeoMutt record (see $record in the NeoMutt docs),
    # also add it to the notmuch DB. Replies inherit the tags from the original email.
    set nm_record = no
    # Tags modifications to the messages stored in the NeoMutt record.
    # example:
    #   set record = "~/sent-mails"
    #   set nm_record = yes
    #   set nm_record_tags = "-inbox,archive,me"
    set nm_record_tags = ""
    # This variable specifies the notmuch tag used for unread messages.
    set nm_unread_tag = unread
    # When set, NeoMutt will use the first virtual mailbox (see virtual-mailboxes)
    # as a spool_file.
    set virtual_spool_file = no
    # setup time window preferences
    # first setup the duration, and then the time unit of that duration
    # when set to 0 (the default) the search window feature is disabled
    # unless explicitly enabled with nm_query_window_enable.
    set nm_query_window_enable=yes
    set nm_query_window_duration=2
    set nm_query_window_timebase="week" # or "hour", "day", "week", "month", "year"
    # Extend query window to always show mail matching these terms.
    set nm_query_window_or_terms="tag:unread and tag:flagged"
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # open a different virtual folder
    bind index,pager X change-vfolder
    # read entire thread of the current message
    bind index,pager + entire-thread
    # generate virtual folder from query
    bind index,pager \eX vfolder-from-query
    # generate virtual folder from query with time window
    bind index < vfolder-window-backward
    bind index > vfolder-window-forward
    # toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes
    # bind index,pager ??? sidebar-toggle-virtual
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # COMMANDS – shown with an example
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # virtual-mailboxes description notmuch-URL { description notmuch-URL ...}
    # virtual-mailboxes "Climbing" "notmuch://?query=climbing"
    # unvirtual-mailboxes { * | mailbox ...}
    #
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 32.9. See Also

- Compile-Time Features

### 32.10. Known Bugs

None

### 32.11. Credits

Karel Zak, Chris Mason, Christoph Rissner, David Riebenbauer, David Sterba, David Wilson, Don Zickus, Eric Davis, Jan Synacek, Jeremiah C. Foster, Josh Poimboeuf, Kirill A. Shutemov, Luke Macken, Mantas Mikulėnas, Patrick Brisbin, Philippe Le Brouster, Raghavendra D Prabhu, Sami Farin, Stefan Assmann, Stefan Kuhn, Tim Stoakes, Vladimir Marek, Víctor Manuel Jáquez Leal, Richard Russon, Bernard 'Guyzmo' Pratz

## 33. Pager Read Delay Feature

### Delay when the pager marks a previewed message as read

### 33.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2021-06-16

Dependencies: None

### 33.2. Introduction

The “Pager Read Delay” feature adds a new config variable to allow the pager to operate in a preview mode. A new message is not marked as read merely because the pager opened it, but only after the pager remains on the message for a given length of time.

### 33.3. Functions

The “Pager Read Delay” feature adds no new functions to NeoMutt. Existing pager functions for navigating to a different message now check whether to mark a message as read.

### 33.4. Variables

The “Pager Read Delay” feature adds one new config variable, $pager_read_delay, which is an integer for how many seconds the pager must remain on a given message before marking it as read. The variable defaults to 0 for the original behavior of marking a message as read the moment the pager visits it.

### 33.5. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the pager-read-delay feature.

    # Stay at least 5 seconds on a message before the pager marks it as read
    set pager_read_delay = 5

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 33.6. Known Bugs

When $pager_index_lines is non-zero, the “N” status indicator from the “%Z” expando of $index_format does not actively reflect the current new/read status of the message.

### 33.7. Credits

Eric Blake

## 34. Progress Bar Feature

### Show a visual progress bar on slow operations

### 34.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies: None

### 34.2. Introduction

The “progress” feature shows a visual progress bar on slow tasks, such as indexing a large folder over the net.

### 34.3. Colors

Table 6.23. Progress Colors

Name | Default Color | Description
--- | --- | ---
`progress` | default | Visual progress bar

### 34.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the progress feature.

    # The 'progress' feature provides clear visual feedback for
    # slow tasks, such as indexing a large folder over the net.

    # Set the color of the progress bar
    # White text on a red background
    color progress white red

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 34.5. See Also

- Color command

### 34.6. Known Bugs

None

### 34.7. Credits

Rocco Rutte, Vincent Lefevre, Stefan Kuhn, Karel Zak, Richard Russon

## 35. Quasi-Delete Feature

### Mark emails that should be hidden, but not deleted

### 35.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies: None

### 35.2. Introduction

The “quasi-delete” function marks an email that should be hidden from the index, but NOT deleted. The email will disappear from the index when <sync-mailbox> is called.

On its own, this feature isn't very useful. It forms a useful part of the notmuch plugin.

### 35.3. Functions

Table 6.24. Quasi-Delete Functions

Menus | Default Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | --- | ---
index,pager | (none) | `<quasi-delete>` | delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk

### 35.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the quasi-delete feature.

    # The 'quasi-delete' function marks an email that should be hidden
    # from the index, but NOT deleted.
    bind index,pager Q quasi-delete

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 35.5. See Also

- notmuch feature

### 35.6. Known Bugs

None

### 35.7. Credits

Karel Zak, Richard Russon

## 36. Reply With X-Original-To Feature

### Direct reply to email using X-Original-To header

### 36.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10

Dependencies: None

### 36.2. Introduction

Adds a reply_with_xorig for NeoMutt configuration files. If enabled, allows to reply to an email using the email address in the first X-Original-To: header of a mail as the From: header of the answer.

### 36.3. Variables

Table 6.25. Reply With X-Original-To Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`reply_with_xorig` | Boolean | `no`

### 36.4. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the reply-with-xorig feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Use X-Original-To header to reply when reverse is disabled or no alternate
    # is found.
    set reply_with_xorig = "yes"

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 36.5. Credits

Pierre-Elliott Bécue

## 37. Sensible Browser Feature

### Make the file browser behave

### 37.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10

Dependencies: None

### 37.2. Introduction

The “sensible browser” is a set of small changes to NeoMutt's mailbox browser which make the browser behave in a more predictable way.

The behavior is divided into two use cases: Fixed Order; Variable Order.

#### 37.2.1. A Fixed Order of Mailboxes

This is for users who like their mailboxes in a fixed order, e.g. alphabetical, or unsorted (in the order of the config file).

    # Fixed order
    set sort_browser="alpha"
    set sort_browser="unsorted"

When you first start the browser, e.g. `c?` your current mailbox will be highlighted.

When you navigate to a parent mailbox (“..”) your old mailbox will be highlighted.

“..” will always be listed at the top, however the rest of the list is sorted.

#### 37.2.2. A Variable Order of Mailboxes

This is for users who like their mailboxes sorted by a characteristic that changes, e.g. count of new mail, or the size of mailbox.

    # Variable order
    set sort_browser="reverse-count"
    set sort_browser="reverse-size"

When you first start the browser, e.g. `c?` the highlight will be on the first mailbox, e.g. the one with the most new mail.

When you navigate to a parent mailbox (“..”) your old mailbox will be highlighted.

“..” will always be listed at the top, however the rest of the list is sorted.

### 37.3. See Also

- $folder_format

### 37.4. Known Bugs

None

### 37.5. Credits

Pierre-Elliott Bécue, Haakon Riiser, Richard Russon

## 38. Sidebar Feature

### Overview of mailboxes

### 38.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10, NeoMutt 1.7.0

Dependencies: None

### 38.2. Introduction

The Sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes. The list can be turned on and off, it can be themed and the list style can be configured.

This part of the manual is a reference guide. If you want a simple introduction with examples see the Sidebar Howto. If you just want to get started, you could use the sample Sidebar neomuttrc.

### 38.3. Variables

Table 6.26. Sidebar Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`sidebar_component_depth` | number | `0`
`sidebar_delim_chars` | string | `/.`
`sidebar_divider_char` | string | `|`
`sidebar_folder_indent` | boolean | `no`
`sidebar_format` | string | `%D%* %n`
`sidebar_indent_string` | string | `` (two spaces)
`sidebar_new_mail_only` | boolean | `no`
`sidebar_next_new_wrap` | boolean | `no`
`sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only` | boolean | `no`
`sidebar_on_right` | boolean | `no`
`sidebar_short_path` | boolean | `no`
`sidebar_sort_method` | enum | `unsorted`
`sidebar_visible` | boolean | `no`
`sidebar_width` | number | `20`

For more details, and examples, about the `$sidebar_format`, see the Sidebar Intro.

### 38.4. Functions

Sidebar adds the following functions to NeoMutt. By default, none of them are bound to keys.

Table 6.27. Sidebar Functions

Menus | Function | Description
--- | --- | ---
index,pager | `<sidebar-next>` | Move the highlight to next mailbox
index,pager | `<sidebar-next-new>` | Move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail
index,pager | `<sidebar-open>` | Open highlighted mailbox
index,pager | `<sidebar-page-down>` | Scroll the Sidebar down 1 page
index,pager | `<sidebar-page-up>` | Scroll the Sidebar up 1 page
index,pager | `<sidebar-prev>` | Move the highlight to previous mailbox
index,pager | `<sidebar-prev-new>` | Move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail
index,pager | `<sidebar-toggle-visible>` | Make the Sidebar (in)visible

### 38.5. Commands

`sidebar_pin` `mailbox` [ `mailbox` ...]
`sidebar_unpin` { `*` | `mailbox` ... }

This command specifies mailboxes that will always be displayed in the sidebar, even if $sidebar_new_mail_only is set and the mailbox does not contain new mail.

The “sidebar_unpin” command is used to remove a mailbox from the list of always displayed mailboxes. Use “sidebar_unpin *” to remove all mailboxes.

### 38.6. Colors

Table 6.28. Sidebar Colors

Name | Default Color | Description
--- | --- | ---
`sidebar_background` | default | The entire sidebar panel
`sidebar_divider` | default | The dividing line between the Sidebar and the Index/Pager panels
`sidebar_flagged` | default | Mailboxes containing flagged mail
`sidebar_highlight` | underline | Cursor to select a mailbox
`sidebar_indicator` | neomutt `indicator` | The mailbox open in the Index panel
`sidebar_new` | default | Mailboxes containing new mail
`sidebar_ordinary` | default | Mailboxes that have no new/flagged mails, etc.
`sidebar_spool_file` | default | Mailbox that receives incoming mail
`sidebar_unread` | default | Mailboxes containing unread mail

If the `sidebar_indicator` color isn't set, then the default NeoMutt indicator color will be used (the color used in the index panel).

### 38.7. Sort

Table 6.29. Sidebar Sort

Sort | Description
--- | ---
`alpha` | Alphabetically by path
`count` | Total number of messages
`desc` | Descriptive name of the mailbox
`flagged` | Number of flagged messages
`name` | Alphabetically by path
`new` | Number of unread messages
`path` | Alphabetically by path
`unread` | Number of unread messages
`unsorted` | Order of the `mailboxes` command

### 38.8. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the sidebar feature.

    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # VARIABLES – shown with their default values
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Should the Sidebar be shown?
    set sidebar_visible = no
    # How wide should the Sidebar be in screen columns?

    # Note: Some characters, e.g. Chinese, take up two columns each.
    set sidebar_width = 20
    # Should the mailbox paths be abbreviated?
    set sidebar_short_path = no
    # Number of top-level mailbox path subdirectories to truncate for display
    set sidebar_component_depth = 0
    # When abbreviating mailbox path names, use any of these characters as path
    # separators. Only the part after the last separators will be shown.
    # For file folders '/' is good. For IMAP folders, often '.' is useful.
    set sidebar_delim_chars = '/.'
    # If the mailbox path is abbreviated, should it be indented?
    set sidebar_folder_indent = no
    # Indent mailbox paths with this string.
    set sidebar_indent_string = '  '
    # Make the Sidebar only display mailboxes that contain new, or flagged,
    # mail.
    set sidebar_new_mail_only = no
    # Any mailboxes that are pinned will always be visible, even if the
    # sidebar_new_mail_only option is enabled.
    set sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only = no
    # Only show mailboxes that contain some mail
    sidebar_pin '/home/user/mailbox1'
    sidebar_pin '/home/user/mailbox2'
    # When searching for mailboxes containing new mail, should the search wrap
    # around when it reaches the end of the list?
    set sidebar_next_new_wrap = no
    # Show the Sidebar on the right-hand side of the screen
    set sidebar_on_right = no
    # The character to use as the divider between the Sidebar and the other NeoMutt
    # panels.
    set sidebar_divider_char = '|'
    # Enable extended mailbox mode to calculate total, new, and flagged
    # message counts for each mailbox.
    set mail_check_stats
    # Display the Sidebar mailboxes using this format string.
    set sidebar_format = '%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S'
    # Sort the mailboxes in the Sidebar using this method:
    #       count    – total number of messages
    #       flagged  – number of flagged messages
    #       unread   – number of unread messages
    #       path     – mailbox path
    #       unsorted – do not sort the mailboxes
    set sidebar_sort_method = 'unsorted'
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # FUNCTIONS – shown with an example mapping
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Move the highlight to the previous mailbox
    bind index,pager \Cp sidebar-prev
    # Move the highlight to the next mailbox
    bind index,pager \Cn sidebar-next
    # Open the highlighted mailbox
    bind index,pager \Co sidebar-open
    # Move the highlight to the previous page
    # This is useful if you have a LOT of mailboxes.
    bind index,pager <F3> sidebar-page-up
    # Move the highlight to the next page
    # This is useful if you have a LOT of mailboxes.
    bind index,pager <F4> sidebar-page-down
    # Move the highlight to the previous mailbox containing new, or flagged,
    # mail.
    bind index,pager <F5> sidebar-prev-new
    # Move the highlight to the next mailbox containing new, or flagged, mail.
    bind index,pager <F6> sidebar-next-new
    # Toggle the visibility of the Sidebar.
    bind index,pager B sidebar-toggle-visible
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # COLORS – some unpleasant examples are given
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------
    # Note: All color operations are of the form:
    #       color OBJECT FOREGROUND BACKGROUND
    # Color of the current, open, mailbox
    # Note: This is a general NeoMutt option which colors all selected items.
    color indicator cyan black
    # Sidebar-specific color of the selected item
    color sidebar_indicator cyan black
    # Color of the highlighted, but not open, mailbox.
    color sidebar_highlight black color8
    # Color of the entire Sidebar panel
    color sidebar_background default black
    # Color of the divider separating the Sidebar from NeoMutt panels
    color sidebar_divider color8 black
    # Color to give mailboxes containing flagged mail
    color sidebar_flagged red black
    # Color to give mailboxes containing new mail
    color sidebar_new green black
    # Color to give mailboxes containing no new/flagged mail, etc.
    color sidebar_ordinary color245 default
    # Color to give the spool_file mailbox
    color sidebar_spool_file color207 default
    # Color to give mailboxes containing no unread mail
    color sidebar_unread color136 default
    # --------------------------------------------------------------------------

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 38.9. See Also

- Regular Expressions

- Patterns

- Color command

- notmuch feature

### 38.10. Known Bugs

None

### 38.11. Credits

Justin Hibbits, Thomer M. Gil, David Sterba, Evgeni Golov, Fabian Groffen, Jason DeTiberus, Stefan Assmann, Steve Kemp, Terry Chan, Tyler Earnest, Richard Russon

## 39. Skip Quoted Feature

### Managing quoted text in the pager

### 39.1. Support

Since: `$skip_quoted_offset` in NeoMutt 2016-03-28, `$toggle_quoted_show_levels` in NeoMutt 2019-10-25, `<skip-headers>` in NeoMutt 2021-02-05

Dependencies: None

### 39.2. Introduction

When viewing an email, the `<skip-quoted>` function (by default the `S` key) will scroll past any email headers or quoted text. Sometimes, a little context is useful. By setting the `$skip_quoted_offset` variable, you can select how much of the quoted text is left visible.

When using the `<toggle-quoted>` function (by default the `T` key), it can be convenient to hide text that has been quoted multiple times while still leaving quoted text that is relevant to the unquoted reply intact. This can be done by setting the `$toggle_quoted_show_levels` variable.

Also, it can be handy to jump directly to the start of the email body with the `<skip-headers>` function (by default the `H` key).

### 39.3. Functions

Table 6.30. Skip Quoted Functions

Menus | Default Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | --- | ---
pager | H | `<skip-headers>` | jump to first line after headers

### 39.4. Variables

Table 6.31. Skip-Quoted Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`pager_skip_quoted_context` | number | 0
`skip_quoted_offset` | synonym | pager_skip_quoted_context
`toggle_quoted_show_levels` | number | 0

### 39.5. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the skip-quoted feature.

    # The 'S' (skip-quoted) command scrolls the pager past the quoted text (usually
    # indented with '> '. Setting 'pager_skip_quoted_context leaves some lines
    # of quoted text on screen for context.

    # Show three quoted lines before the reply
    set pager_skip_quoted_context = 3

    # The 'T' (toggle-quoted) command hides quoted text, but can
    # be limited to only hiding deeply-nested quotes.

    # Preserve the first level of quoted text
    set toggle_quoted_show_levels = 1

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 39.6. Known Bugs

None

### 39.7. Credits

David Sterba, Richard Russon

## 40. Status Color Feature

### Custom rules for theming the status bar

### 40.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies: None

### 40.2. Introduction

The “status-color” feature allows you to theme different parts of the status bar (also when it's used by the index).

Unlike normal color commands, `color status` can now take up to 2 extra parameters (regex, num).

### 40.3. Commands

`color` `status` `foreground` `background` [ `regex` [ `num` ]]

With zero parameters, NeoMutt will set the default color for the entire status bar.

With one parameter, NeoMutt will only color the parts matching the regex.

With two parameters, NeoMutt will only color the num'th sub-match of the regex.

### 40.4. Colors

Table 6.32. Status Colors

Name | Default Color | Description
--- | --- | ---
status | `reverse` | Status bar

### 40.5. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the status-color feature.

    # The 'status-color' feature allows you to theme different parts of
    # the status bar (also when it's used by the index).

    # For the examples below, set some defaults
    set status_format='-%r-NeoMutt: %f [Msgs:%<M?%M/>%m%<n? New:%n>%<o? Old:%o>%<d? Del:%d>\
    %<F? Flag:%F>%<t? Tag:%t>%<p? Post:%p>%<b? Inc:%b>%<l? %l>]---(%s/%S)-%>-(%P)---'
    set index_format='%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s'
    set use_threads=yes
    set sort=last-date-received
    set sort_aux=date
    # 'status color' can take up to 2 extra parameters
    # color status foreground background [ regex [ num ]]
    # 0 extra parameters
    # Set the default color for the entire status line
    color status blue white
    # 1 extra parameter
    # Set the color for a matching pattern
    # color status foreground background regex
    # Highlight New, Deleted, or Flagged emails
    color status brightred white '(New|Del|Flag):[0-9]+'
    # Highlight mailbox ordering if it's different from the default
    # First, highlight anything (*/*)
    color status brightred default '\([^)]+/[^)]+\)'
    # Then override the color for one specific case
    color status default default '\(threads/last-date-received\)'
    # 2 extra parameters
    # Set the color for the nth submatch of a pattern
    # color status foreground background regex num
    # Highlight the contents of the []s but not the [] themselves
    color status red default '\[([^]]+)\]' 1
    # The '1' refers to the first regex submatch, which is the inner
    # part in ()s
    # Highlight the mailbox
    color status brightwhite default 'NeoMutt: ([^ ]+)' 1
    # Search for 'NeoMutt: ' but only highlight what comes after it

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 40.6. See Also

- Compile-Time Features

- Regular Expressions

- Patterns

- index-color feature

- Color command

### 40.7. Known Bugs

None

### 40.8. Credits

David Sterba, Thomas Glanzmann, Kirill A. Shutemov, Richard Russon

## 41. TLS-SNI Feature

### Negotiate with a server for a TLS/SSL certificate

### 41.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-03-07

Dependencies:

  OpenSSL

### 41.2. Introduction

The “TLS-SNI” feature adds support for TLS virtual hosting. If your mail server doesn't support this everything will still work normally.

TLS supports sending the expected server hostname during the handshake, via the SNI extension. This can be used to select a server certificate to issue to the client, permitting virtual-hosting without requiring multiple IP addresses.

This has been tested against Exim 4.80, which optionally logs SNI and can perform vhosting.

To verify TLS SNI support by a server, you can use:

    openssl s_client -host <imap server> -port <port> -tls1 -servername <imap server>

### 41.3. Known Bugs

None

### 41.4. Credits

Jeremy Katz, Phil Pennock, Richard Russon

## 42. Trash Folder Feature

### Automatically move deleted emails to a trash bin

### 42.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2016-09-10, NeoMutt 1.7.0

Dependencies:

  If IMAP is enabled, the trash folder will use it wisely

### 42.2. Introduction

In NeoMutt, when you “delete” an email it is first marked deleted. The email isn't really gone until <sync-mailbox> is called. This happens when the user leaves the folder, or the function is called manually.

After `<sync-mailbox>` has been called the email is gone forever.

The $trash variable defines a folder in which to keep old emails. As before, first you mark emails for deletion. When <sync-mailbox> is called the emails are moved to the trash folder.

The `$trash` path can be either a full directory, or be relative to the $folder variable, like the `mailboxes` command.

### Note

Emails deleted from the trash folder are gone forever.

### 42.3. Variables

Table 6.33. Trash Variables

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
trash | string | (none)

### 42.4. Functions

Table 6.34. Trash Functions

Menus | Default Key | Function | Description
--- | --- | --- | ---
index,pager | (none) | `<purge-message>` | really delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder

### 42.5. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the 'trash' feature.

    # This feature defines a new 'trash' folder.

    # When mail is deleted it will be moved to this folder.

    # Folder in which to put deleted emails
    set trash='+Trash'
    set trash='/home/flatcap/Mail/Trash'
    # The default delete key 'd' will move an email to the 'trash' folder
    # Bind 'D' to REALLY delete an email
    bind index D purge-message
    # Note: Deleting emails from the 'trash' folder will REALLY delete them.

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 42.6. See Also

- folder-hook

### 42.7. Known Bugs

None

### 42.8. Credits

Cedric Duval, Benjamin Kuperman, Paul Miller, Richard Russon

## 43. Use Threads Feature

### Improve the experience with viewing threads in the index

### 43.1. Support

Since: NeoMutt 2021-08-01

Dependencies: None

### 43.2. Introduction

The “Use Threads” feature adds a new config variable to allow more precise control of how threads are displayed in the index. Whether threads are in use is now orthogonal from how messages are sorted.

### 43.3. Functions

The “Use Threads” feature adds no new functions to NeoMutt. The existing functions `<sort-mailbox>` and `<sort-reverse>` are updated to toggle the state of `$use_threads` once it has been set, while preserving backwards-compatible behavior on `$sort` if this feature is not used.

### 43.4. Variables

The “Use Threads” feature adds one new config variable, $use_threads, which is an enumeration of possible thread views. The variable defaults to unset for the original behavior of overloading $sort=threads to enable sorting. It can be set to `flat` (or `no`) for an unthreaded view based on `$sort`, to `threads` (or `yes`) for a threaded view where roots appear above children, or to `reverse` for a threaded view where children appear above roots.

When sorting by threads, the value of $sort determines which thread floats to the top. If `$sort` does not contain `reverse-`, the latest thread goes to the bottom for `use_threads=threads` and to the top for `use_threads=reverse`; the direction of float is swapped if `$sort` also uses `reverse-`. If `$sort` includes `last-`, the overall thread is sorted by its descendant at any depth which would sort last in a flat view; otherwise, the overall thread is sorted solely by the thread root. The `last-` prefix is ignored when `use_threads=flat`.

Within a single thread, the value of $sort_aux determines how siblings are sorted. The same prefixes apply as for `$sort`, although it is less common to use the `last-` prefix.

The “Use Threads” feature also modifies the existing config variable $status_format, adding the `%T` expando which shows the current threading method.

### 43.5. Use Threads

Table 6.35. Use Threads

Name | Type | Default
--- | --- | ---
`use_threads` | enum | `unset`

### 43.6. neomuttrc

    # Example NeoMutt config file for the use-threads feature.

    # ------------------------------------------------------------
    # Default configuration: flat view sorted by date
    # selecting threads with <sort-mailbox> changes $sort
    #set use_threads=unset sort=date sort_aux=date
    # Modern configuration: explicit flat view sorted by date
    # selecting threads with <sort-mailbox> changes $use_threads
    set use_threads=no sort=date sort_aux=date
    #   Anne     12:01  cover letter for thread 1
    #   Anne     12:02  part 1 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:03  part 2 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:04  part 3 of thread 1
    #   Barbara  12:05  thread 2
    #   Claire   12:06  thread 3
    #   Diane    12:07  re: part 2 of thread 1
    #   Erica    12:08  re: thread 2

    # ------------------------------------------------------------
    # Legacy configuration: sorting threads by date started
    #set sort=threads sort_aux=date
    # Modern configuration for the same
    # Latest root message sorts last
    set use_threads=yes sort=date sort_aux=date
    #   Anne     12:01  cover letter for thread 1
    #   Anne     12:02  |->part 1 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:03  |->part 2 of thread 1
    #   Diane    12:07  | `->re: part 2 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:04  `->part 3 of thread 1
    #   Barbara  12:05  thread 2
    #   Erica    12:08  `->re: thread 2
    #   Claire   12:06  thread 3

    # ------------------------------------------------------------
    # Legacy configuration: display threads upside-down
    #set sort=reverse-threads sort_aux=date
    # Modern configuration for the same
    # Latest root message sorts first
    set use_threads=reverse sort=date sort_aux=date
    #   Claire   12:06  thread 3
    #   Erica    12:08  ,->re: thread 2
    #   Barbara  12:05  thread 2
    #   Anne     12:04  ,->part 3 of thread 1
    #   Diane    12:07  | ,->re: part 2 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:03  |->part 2 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:02  |->part 1 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:01  cover letter for thread 1

    # ------------------------------------------------------------
    # Legacy configuration: recently active thread/subthread first
    #set sort=threads sort_aux=reverse-last-date
    # Modern configuration for the same
    # Note that subthreads are also rearranged
    set use_threads=threads sort=reverse-last-date sort_aux=reverse-last-date
    #   Barbara  12:05  thread 2
    #   Erica    12:08  `->re: thread 2
    #   Anne     12:01  cover letter for thread 1
    #   Anne     12:03  |->part 2 of thread 1
    #   Diane    12:07  | `->re: part 2 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:04  |->part 3 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:02  `->part 1 of thread 1
    #   Claire   12:06  thread 3

    # ------------------------------------------------------------
    # Modern configuration: threads keep date order, recently active thread last
    # (not possible with legacy configuration)
    set use_threads=threads sort=last-date sort_aux=date
    #   Claire   12:06  thread 3
    #   Anne     12:01  cover letter for thread 1
    #   Anne     12:02  |->part 1 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:03  |->part 2 of thread 1
    #   Diane    12:07  | `->re: part 2 of thread 1
    #   Anne     12:04  `->part 3 of thread 1
    #   Barbara  12:05  thread 2
    #   Erica    12:08  `->re: thread 2

    # vim: syntax=neomuttrc

### 43.7. Known Bugs

Even though `use_threads` accepts the values `yes` and `no`, it does not behave like a boolean or quad-option variable. A bare `set use_threads` performs a query rather than setting it to `yes`, and the variable is not usable with `toggle`.

### 43.8. Credits

Eric Blake

## 44. Autocrypt

NeoMutt can be compiled with Autocrypt support by running `configure` with the `--autocrypt` flag. Autocrypt provides easy to use, passive protection against data collection. Keys are distributed via an `Autocrypt:` header added to emails. It does not protect against active adversaries, and so should not be considered a substitute for normal encryption via your keyring, using key signing and the web of trust to verify identities. With an understanding of these limitations, Autocrypt still provides an easy way to minimize cleartext emails sent between common correspondents, without having to explicitly exchange keys. More information can be found at https://autocrypt.org/.

### 44.1. Requirements

Autocrypt requires support for ECC cryptography, and NeoMutt by default will generate ECC keys. Therefore GnuPG 2.1 or greater is required. Additionally, NeoMutt's Autocrypt implementation uses GPGME and requires at least version 1.8.0.

Account and peer information is stored in a sqlite3 database, and so NeoMutt must be configured with the `--with-sqlite` flag when autocrypt is enabled.

It is highly recommended that NeoMutt be configured with `--idn2` (enabled by default) so that Autocrypt can properly deal with international domain names.

While NeoMutt uses GPGME for Autocrypt, normal keyring operations can still be performed via classic mode (i.e. with $crypt_use_gpgme unset). However, to avoid unnecessary prompts, it is recommended gpg not be configured in `loopback pinentry` mode, and that $pgp_use_gpg_agent remain set (the default).

### 44.2. First Run

To enable Autocrypt, set $autocrypt, and if desired change the value of $autocrypt_dir in your muttrc. The first time NeoMutt is run after that, you will be prompted to create $autocrypt_dir. NeoMutt will then automatically create an sqlite3 database and GPG keyring in that directory. Note since these files should be considered private, NeoMutt will create this directory with mode `700`. If you create the directory manually, you should do the same.

NeoMutt recommends keeping the $autocrypt_dir directory set differently from your GnuPG keyring directory (e.g. `~/.gnupg`). Keys are automatically imported into the keyring from `Autocrypt:` headers. Compared to standard “web of trust” keys, Autocrypt keys are somewhat ephemeral, and the autocrypt database is used to track when keys change or fall out of use. Having these keys mixed in with your normal keyring will make it more difficult to use features such as $crypt_opportunistic_encrypt and Autocrypt at the same time.

The $autocrypt_dir variable is not designed to be changed while NeoMutt is running. The database is created (if necessary) and connected to during startup. Changing the variable can result in a situation where NeoMutt is looking in one place for the database and a different place for the GPG keyring, resulting in strange behavior.

Once the directory, keyring, and database are created, NeoMutt will ask whether you would like to create an account. In order to use Autocrypt, each sending address needs an account. As a convenience you can create an account during the first run. If you would like to add additional accounts later, this can be done via the `<autocrypt-acct-menu>` function in the index, by default bound to `A`.

Account creation will first ask you for an email address. Next, it will ask whether you want to create a new key or select an existing key. (Note key selection takes place from the $autocrypt_dir keyring, which will normally be empty during first run). Finally, it will ask whether this address should prefer encryption or not. Autocrypt 1.1 allows automatically enabling encryption if both sender and receiver have set “prefer encryption”. Otherwise, you will need to manually enable autocrypt encryption in the compose menu. For more details, see the compose menu section below.

After optionally creating an account, NeoMutt will prompt you to scan mailboxes for Autocrypt headers. This step occurs because header cached messages are not re-scanned for Autocrypt headers. Scanning during this step will temporarily disable the header cache while opening each mailbox. If you wish to do this manually later, you can simulate the same thing by unsetting $header_cache and opening a mailbox.

A final technical note: the first run process takes place between reading the muttrc and opening the initial mailbox. Some muttrc files will push macros to be run after opening the mailbox. To prevent this from interfering with the first run prompts, NeoMutt disables all macros during the first run.

### 44.3. Compose Menu

When enabled, Autocrypt will add a line to the compose menu with two fields: `Autocrypt:` and `Recommendation:`.

The `Autocrypt:` field shows whether the message will be encrypted by Autocrypt when sent. It has two values: `Encrypt` and `Off`. `Encrypt` can be enabled using the `<autocrypt-menu>` function, by default bound to `o`.

The `Recommendation:` field shows the output of the Autocrypt recommendation engine. This can have one of five values:

- `Off` means the engine is disabled. This can happen if the From address doesn't have an autocrypt account, or if the account has been manually disabled.

- `No` means one or more recipients are missing an autocrypt key, or the key found is unusable (i.e. expired, revoked, disabled, invalid, or not usable for encryption.)

- `Discouraged` means a key was found for every recipient, but the engine is not confident the message will be decryptable by the recipient. This can happen if the key hasn't been used recently (compared to their last seen email).

  It can also happen if the key wasn't seen first-hand from the sender. Autocrypt has a feature where recipient keys can be included in group-encrypted emails. This allows you to reply to a conversation where you don't have a key first-hand from one of the other recipients. However, those keys are not trusted as much as from first-hand emails, so the engine warns you with a `Discouraged` status.

- `Available` means a key was found for every recipient, and the engine believes all keys are recent and seen from the recipient first hand. However, either you or one of the recipients chose not to specify “prefer encryption”.

- `Yes` is the same as `Available`, with the addition that you and all recipients have specified “prefer encryption”. This value will automatically enable encryption, unless you have manually switched it off or enabled regular encryption or signing via the `<pgp-menu>`.

As mentioned above the `<autocrypt-menu>` function, by default bound to `o`, can be used to change the `Encrypt:` field value. `(e)ncrypt` will toggle encryption on. `(c)lear` will toggle encryption off. If either of these are chosen, the field will remain in that state despite what the `Recommendation:` field shows. Lastly, `(a)utomatic` will set the value based on the recommendation engine's output.

Autocrypt encryption defers to normal encryption or signing. Anything that enables normal encryption or signing will cause autocrypt encryption to turn off. The only exception is when replying to an autocrypt-encrypted email (i.e. an email decrypted from the $autocrypt_dir keyring). Then, if $autocrypt_reply is set, autocrypt mode will be forced on, overriding the settings $crypt_auto_sign, $crypt_auto_encrypt, $crypt_reply_encrypt, $crypt_reply_sign, $crypt_reply_sign_encrypted, and $crypt_opportunistic_encrypt.

When postponing a message, autocrypt will respect $postpone_encrypt, but will use the autocrypt account key to encrypt the message. Be sure to set $postpone_encrypt to ensure postponed messages marked for autocrypt encryption are encrypted.

### 44.4. Account Management

The Autocrypt Account Menu is available from the index via `<autocrypt-acct-menu>`, by default bound to `A`. See Autocrypt Account Menu for the list of functions and their default keybindings.

In this menu, you can create new accounts, delete accounts, toggle an account active/inactive, and toggle the “prefer encryption” flag for an account.

Deleting an account only removes the account from the database. The GPG key is kept, to ensure you still have the ability to read past encrypted emails.

The Autocrypt 1.1 “Setup Message” feature is not available yet, but will be added in the future.

### 44.5. Alternative Key and Keyring Strategies

NeoMutt by default partitions Autocrypt from normal keyring encryption/signing. It does this by using a separate GPG keyring (in $autocrypt_dir) and creating a new ECC key in that keyring for accounts. There are good reasons for doing this by default. It keeps random keys found inside email headers out of your normal keyring. ECC keys are compact and better suited for email headers. Autocrypt key selection is completely different from “web of trust” key selection, based on last-seen rules as opposed to trust and validity. It also allows NeoMutt to distinguish Autocrypt encrypted emails from regular encrypted emails, and set the mode appropriately when replying to each type of email.

Still, some users may want to use an existing key from their normal keyring for Autocrypt too. There are two ways this can be accomplished. The recommended way is to set $autocrypt_dir to your normal keyring directory (e.g. `~/.gnupg`). During account creation, choosing “(s)elect existing GPG key” will then list and allow selecting your existing key for the new account.

An alternative is to copy your key over to the Autocrypt keyring, but there is a severe downside. NeoMutt first tries to decrypt messages using the Autocrypt keyring, and if that fails tries the normal keyring second. This means all encrypted emails to that key will be decrypted, and have signatures verified from, the Autocrypt keyring. Keys signatures and web of trust from your normal keyring will no longer show up in signatures when decrypting.

For that reason, if you want to use an existing key from your normal keyring, it is recommended to just set $autocrypt_dir to `~/.gnupg`. This allows “web of trust” to show an appropriate signature message for verified messages. Autocrypt header keys will be imported into your keyring, but if you don't want them mixed you should strongly consider using a separate autocrypt key and keyring instead.

Both methods have a couple additional caveats:

- Replying to an Autocrypt decrypted message by default forces Autocrypt mode on. By sharing the same key, all replies will then start in Autocrypt mode, even if a message wasn't sent by one of your Autocrypt peers. $autocrypt_reply can be unset to allow manual control of the mode when replying.

- When NeoMutt creates an account from a GPG key, it exports the public key, base64 encodes it, and stores that value in the sqlite3 database. The value is then used in the Autocrypt header added to outgoing emails. The ECC keys NeoMutt creates don't change, but if you use external keys that expire, when you resign to extend the expiration you will need to recreate the Autocrypt account using the account menu. Otherwise the Autocrypt header will contain the old expired exported keydata.

# Chapter 7. Security Considerations

First of all, NeoMutt contains no security holes included by intention but may contain unknown security holes. As a consequence, please run NeoMutt only with as few permissions as possible. Especially, do not run NeoMutt as the super user.

When configuring NeoMutt, there're some points to note about secure setups so please read this chapter carefully.

## 1. Passwords

Although NeoMutt can be told the various passwords for accounts, please never store passwords in configuration files. Besides the fact that the system's operator can always read them, you could forget to mask it out when reporting a bug or asking for help via a mailing list. Even worse, your mail including your password could be archived by internet search engines, mail-to-news gateways etc. It may already be too late before you notice your mistake.

## 2. Temporary Files

NeoMutt uses many temporary files for viewing messages, verifying digital signatures, etc. As long as being used, these files are visible by other users and maybe even readable in case of misconfiguration. Also, a different location for these files may be desired which can be changed via the $tmp_dir variable.

## 3. Information Leaks

### 3.1. Message-Id: headers

Since 2023-02-18 NeoMutt generates random Message-Id: headers, which do not leak any information beyond their randomness.

### 3.2. `mailto:`-style Links

As NeoMutt be can be set up to be the mail client to handle `mailto:` style links in websites, there're security considerations, too. Arbitrary header fields can be embedded in these links which could override existing header fields or attach arbitrary files using the Attach: pseudoheader. This may be problematic if the $edit-headers variable is unset, i.e. the user doesn't want to see header fields while editing the message and doesn't pay enough attention to the compose menu's listing of attachments.

For example, following a link like

    mailto:joe@host?Attach=~/.gnupg/secring.gpg

will send out the user's private gnupg keyring to `joe@host` if the user doesn't follow the information on screen carefully enough.

To prevent these issues, NeoMutt by default only accepts the `Subject` and `Body` headers. Allowed headers can be adjusted with the mailto_allow and unmailto_allow commands.

## 4. External Applications

NeoMutt in many places has to rely on external applications or for convenience supports mechanisms involving external applications.

One of these is the `mailcap` mechanism as defined by RFC1524. Details about a secure use of the mailcap mechanisms is given in Section 3.2, “Secure Use of Mailcap”.

Besides the mailcap mechanism, NeoMutt uses a number of other external utilities for operation, for example to provide crypto support, in backtick expansion in configuration files or format string filters. The same security considerations apply for these as for tools involved via mailcap.

# Chapter 8. Performance Tuning

## 1. Reading and Writing Mailboxes

NeoMutt's performance when reading mailboxes can be improved in two ways:

1. For remote folders (IMAP and POP) as well as folders using one-file-per message storage (Maildir and MH), NeoMutt's performance can be greatly improved using header caching. using a single database per folder.

2. NeoMutt provides the $read_inc and $write_inc variables to specify at which rate to update progress counters. If these values are too low, NeoMutt may spend more time on updating the progress counter than it spends on actually reading/writing folders.

   For example, when opening a maildir folder with a few thousand messages, the default value for $read_inc may be too low. It can be tuned on on a folder-basis using folder-hooks:

       # use very high $read_inc to speed up reading hcache'd maildirs
       folder-hook . 'set read_inc=1000'
       # use lower value for reading slower remote IMAP folders
       folder-hook ^imap 'set read_inc=100'
       # use even lower value for reading even slower remote POP folders
       folder-hook ^pop 'set read_inc=1'

These settings work on a per-message basis. However, as messages may greatly differ in size and certain operations are much faster than others, even per-folder settings of the increment variables may not be desirable as they produce either too few or too much progress updates. Thus, NeoMutt allows to limit the number of progress updates per second it'll actually send to the terminal using the $time_inc variable.

## 2. Reading Messages from Remote Folders

Reading messages from remote folders such as IMAP an POP can be slow especially for large mailboxes since NeoMutt only caches a very limited number of recently viewed messages (usually 10) per session (so that it will be gone for the next session.)

To improve performance and permanently cache whole messages and headers, please refer to body caching and header caching for details.

Additionally, it may be worth trying some of NeoMutt's experimental features. $imap_qresync (which requires header caching) can provide a huge speed boost opening mailboxes if your IMAP server supports it. $imap_deflate enables compression, which can also noticeably reduce download time for large mailboxes and messages.

## 3. Searching and Limiting

When searching mailboxes either via a search or a limit action, for some patterns NeoMutt distinguishes between regular expression and string searches. For regular expressions, patterns are prefixed with “~” and with “=” for string searches.

Even though a regular expression search is fast, it's several times slower than a pure string search which is noticeable especially on large folders. As a consequence, a string search should be used instead of a regular expression search if the user already knows enough about the search pattern.

For example, when limiting a large folder to all messages sent to or by an author, it's much faster to search for the initial part of an e-mail address via `=Luser@` instead of `~Luser@`. This is especially true for searching message bodies since a larger amount of input has to be searched.

As for regular expressions, a lower case string search pattern makes NeoMutt perform a case-insensitive search except for IMAP (because for IMAP NeoMutt performs server-side searches which don't support case-insensitivity).

# Chapter 9. Reference

## 1. Command-Line Options

Running `neomutt` with no arguments will make NeoMutt attempt to read your spool mailbox. However, it is possible to read other mailboxes and to send messages from the command line as well.

Table 9.1. Command line options

Option | Description
--- | ---
-- | Special argument forces NeoMutt to stop option parsing and treat remaining arguments as `address`es even if they start with a dash
-A `alias` | Print an expanded version of the given `alias` to stdout and exit
-a `file` | Attach one or more `file`s to a message (must be the last option). Add any addresses after the '--' argument, e.g.:
    neomutt -a image.jpg -- address1
    neomutt -a image.jpg *.png -- address1 address2
-B | Run in batch mode (do not start the ncurses UI)
-b `address` | Specify a blind carbon copy (Bcc) recipient
-C | Enable cryptographic operations in the cases in which they're disabled by default. Those include batch mode, sending a postponed message, and resending a message.
-c `address` | Specify a carbon copy (Cc) recipient
-D | Dump all config variables as 'name=value' pairs to stdout
-D -O | Like -D, but show one-liner documentation
-D -S | Like -D, but hide the value of sensitive variables
-d `level` | Log debugging output to a file (default is "`~/.neomuttdebug0`"). The `level` can range from 1–5 and affects verbosity (a value of 2 is recommended). Using this option along with -l is useful to log the early startup process (before reading any configuration and hence $debug_level and $debug_file)
-E | Edit `draft` (-H) or `include` (-i) file during message composition
-e `command` | Specify a `command` to be run after reading the config files
-F `config` | Specify an alternative initialization file to read, see section Location of Initialization Files for a list of regular configuration files
-f `mailbox` | Specify a `mailbox` (as defined with mailboxes command) to load
-G | Start NeoMutt with a listing of subscribed newsgroups
-g `server` | Like -G, but start at specified news `server`
-H `draft` | Specify a `draft` file with header and body for message composing
-h | Print this help message and exit
-i `include` | Specify an `include` file to be embedded in the body of a message
-l `file` | Specify a `file` for debugging output (default "`~/.neomuttdebug0`"). This overrules $debug_file setting and NeoMutt keeps up to five debug logs ({ `file` | $debug_file | `~/.neomuttdebug` }[`0-4`]) before override the oldest file
-m `type` | Specify a default mailbox format `type` for newly created folders. The `type` is either MH, MMDF, Maildir or mbox (case-insensitive)
-n | Do not read the system-wide configuration file
-p | Resume a prior postponed message, if any
-Q `variable` | Query a configuration `variable` and print its value to stdout (after the config has been read and any commands executed). Adding `-O` will display one-liner documentation.
-R | Open mailbox in read-only mode
-s `subject` | Specify a `subject` (must be enclosed in quotes if it has spaces)
-v | Print the NeoMutt version and compile-time definitions and exit
-vv | Print the NeoMutt license and copyright information and exit
-y | Start NeoMutt with a listing of all defined mailboxes
-Z | Open the first mailbox with new message or exit immediately with exit code 1 if none is found in all defined mailboxes
-z | Open the first or specified (-f) mailbox if it holds any message or exit immediately with exit code 1 otherwise

To read messages in a mailbox or exit immediately

`neomutt` [ `-nz` ] [ `-F` `config` ] [ `-m` `type` ] [ `-f` `mailbox` ]

To compose a new message

`neomutt` [ `-Enx` ] [ `-F` `config` ] [ `-b` `address` ] [ `-c` `address` ] [ `-H` `draft` ] [ `-i` `include` ] [ `-s` `subject` ] [ `-a` `file` [...] `--` ] { `address` | `mailto_url` ...}

NeoMutt also supports a “batch” mode to send prepared messages. Simply redirect input from the file you wish to send. For example,

    neomutt -s "data set for run #2" professor@bigschool.edu < ~/run2.dat

will send a message to `<professor@bigschool.edu>` with a subject of “data set for run #2”. In the body of the message will be the contents of the file “~/run2.dat”.

An include file passed with `-i` will be used as the body of the message. When combined with `-E`, the include file will be directly edited during message composition. The file will be modified regardless of whether the message is sent or aborted.

A draft file passed with `-H` will be used as the initial header and body for the message. Multipart messages can be used as a draft file. When combined with `-E`, the draft file will be updated to the final state of the message after composition, regardless of whether the message is sent, aborted, or even postponed. Note that if the message is sent encrypted or signed, the draft file will be saved that way too.

All files passed with `-a` file will be attached as a MIME part to the message. To attach a single or several files, use `--` to separate files and recipient addresses:

    neomutt -a image.png -- some@one.org

or

    neomutt -a *.png -- some@one.org

### Note

The `-a` option must be last in the option list.

In addition to accepting a list of email addresses, NeoMutt also accepts a URL with the `mailto:` schema as specified in RFC2368. This is useful when configuring a web browser to launch NeoMutt when clicking on mailto links.

    neomutt mailto:some@one.org?subject=test&cc=other@one.org

## 2. Configuration Commands

The following are the commands understood by NeoMutt:

- `account-hook` `regex` `command`

- `alias` [ `-group` `name` ...] `key` `address` [ `, address` ...]
  `unalias` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `key` ... }

- `alternates` [ `-group` `name` ...] `regex` [ `regex` ...]
  `unalternates` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `regex` ... }

- `alternative_order` `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]
  `unalternative_order` { * | [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]}

- `attachments` { + | - } `disposition` `mime-type` [ `mime-type` ...]
  `unattachments` { + | - } `disposition` `mime-type` [ `mime-type` ...]
  `attachments` `?`
  `unattachments` `*`

- `auto_view` `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]
  `unauto_view` { * | [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]}

- `bind` `map` [ `,map` ...] `key` `function`
  `unbind` { `*` | `map` [ `,map` ...] } [ `key` ]

- `cd` `directory`

- `charset-hook` `alias` `charset`
  `iconv-hook` `charset` `local-charset`

- `color` `object` [ `attribute` ...] `foreground` `background`
  `color` { `header` | `body` } [ `attribute` ...] `foreground` `background` `regex`
  `color` `index` [ `attribute` ...] `foreground` `background` [ `pattern` ]
  `uncolor` { `index` | `header` | `body` } { `*` | `pattern` ... }

- `crypt-hook` `regex` `keyid`

- `exec` `function` [ `function` ...]

- `fcc-save-hook` `pattern` `mailbox`
  `fcc-hook` `pattern` `mailbox`
  `save-hook` `pattern` `mailbox`

- `folder-hook` `regex` `command`

- `group` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `-rx` `regex` ... | `-addr` `address` ... }
  `ungroup` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `-rx` `regex` ... | `-addr` `address` ... }

- `hdr_order` `header` [ `header` ...]
  `unhdr_order` { `*` | `header` ... }

- `ifdef` `symbol` `"config-command [args...]"`
  `ifndef` `symbol` `"config-command [args...]"`
  `finish`

- `ignore` `string` [ `string` ...]
  `unignore` { `*` | `string` ... }

- `index-format-hook` `name` `[!]pattern` `format-string`

- `lists` [ `-group` `name` ] `regex` [ `regex` ...]
  `unlists` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `regex` ... }
  `subscribe` [ `-group` `name` ...] `regex` [ `regex` ...]
  `unsubscribe` [ `-group` `name` ...] { `*` | `regex` ... }

- `macro` `menu` [ `,menu` ...] `key` `sequence` [ `description` ]
  `unmacro` { `*` | `map` [ `,map` ...] } [ `key` ]

- `mailboxes` `mailbox` [ `mailbox` ...]
  `named-mailboxes` `description` `mailbox` [ `description mailbox` ...]
  `unmailboxes` { `*` | `mailbox` ... }

- `mailto_allow` { `*` | `header-field` ... }
  `unmailto_allow` { `*` | `header-field` ... }

- `mbox-hook` [ `-noregex` ] `regex` `mailbox`

- `message-hook` `pattern` `command`

- `mime_lookup` `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]
  `unmime_lookup` { * | [ `mime-type` [ `/mime-subtype` ] ...]}

- `mono` `object` `attribute`
  `mono` { `header` | `body` } `attribute` `regex`
  `mono` `index-object` `attribute` `pattern`
  `unmono` { `index-object` | `header` | `body` } { `*` | `pattern` ... }

- `my_hdr` `string`
  `unmy_hdr` { `*` | `field` ... }

- `open-hook` `regex` `"shell-command"`
  `close-hook` `regex` `"shell-command"`
  `append-hook` `regex` `"shell-command"`

- `push` `string`

- `reply-hook` `pattern` `command`
  `send-hook` `pattern` `command`
  `send2-hook` `pattern` `command`

- `score` `pattern` `value`
  `unscore` { `*` | `pattern` ... }

- `set` { [ `no` | `inv` | `&` | `?` ] `variable` | `variable=value` } [...]
  `unset` `variable` [ `variable` ...]
  `reset` `variable` [ `variable` ...]
  `toggle` `variable` [ `variable` ...]

- `setenv` { `?variable` | `variable value` }
  `unsetenv` `variable`

- `sidebar_pin` `mailbox` [ `mailbox` ...]
  `sidebar_unpin` { `*` | `mailbox` ... }

- `source` `filename`

- `spam` `regex` `format`
  `nospam` { `*` | `regex` }

- `subjectrx` `regex` `replacement`
  `unsubjectrx` { `*` | `regex` }

- `subscribe-to` `imap-folder-uri`
  `unsubscribe-from` `imap-folder-uri`

- `timeout-hook` `command`
  `startup-hook` `command`
  `shutdown-hook` `command`

- `unhook` { `*` | `hook-type` }

## 3. Configuration Variables

### 3.1. abort_backspace

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, hitting backspace against an empty prompt aborts the prompt.

### 3.2. abort_key

Type: string
Default: “`007`”

Specifies the key that can be used to abort prompts. The format is the same as used in "bind" commands. The default is equivalent to "Ctrl-G". Note that the specified key should not be used in other bindings, as the abort operation has higher precedence and the binding will not have the desired effect.

Example:

    set abort_key = "<Esc>"

Please note that when using <Esc> as the abort key, you may also want to set the environment variable ESCDELAY to a low value or even 0 which will reduce the time that ncurses waits to distinguish singular <Esc> key presses from the start of a terminal escape sequence. The default time is 1000 milliseconds and thus quite noticeable.

### 3.3. abort_noattach

Type: quadoption
Default: no

If set to yes, when composing messages containing the regular expression specified by $abort_noattach_regex and no attachments are given, composition will be aborted. If set to no, composing messages as such will never be aborted.

Example:

    set abort_noattach_regex = "\\<attach(|ed|ments?)\\>"

### 3.4. abort_noattach_regex

Type: regular expression
Default: “`\<(attach|attached|attachments?)\>`”

Specifies a regular expression to match against the body of the message, to determine if an attachment was mentioned but mistakenly forgotten. If it matches, $abort_noattach will be consulted to determine if message sending will be aborted.

Like other regular expressions in NeoMutt, the search is case sensitive if the pattern contains at least one upper case letter, and case insensitive otherwise.

### 3.5. abort_nosubject

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

If set to yes, when composing messages and no subject is given at the subject prompt, composition will be aborted. If set to no, composing messages with no subject given at the subject prompt will never be aborted.

### 3.6. abort_unmodified

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

If set to yes, composition will automatically abort after editing the message body if no changes are made to the file (this check only happens after the first edit of the file). When set to no, composition will never be aborted.

### 3.7. account_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

If set, this command is used to retrieve account credentials. The command is invoked passing a number of --key value arguments with the specifics of the account to lookup. The command writes to standard output a number of key: value lines. Currently supported arguments are --hostname, --username, and --type, where type can be any of imap, imaps, pop, pops, smtp, smtps, nntp, and nntps. Currently supported output lines are login, username, and password.

### 3.8. alias_file

Type: path
Default: “`~/.neomuttrc`”

The default file in which to save aliases created by the `<create-alias>` function. Entries added to this file are encoded in the character set specified by $config_charset if it is set or the current character set otherwise.

Note: NeoMutt will not automatically source this file; you must explicitly use the "source" command for it to be executed in case this option points to a dedicated alias file.

The default for this option is the currently used neomuttrc file, or "~/.neomuttrc" if no user neomuttrc was found.

### 3.9. alias_format

Type: string
Default: “`%3n %f%t %-15a %-56r | %c`”

Specifies the format of the data displayed for the "alias" menu. The following `printf(3)`-style sequences are available:

%a | Alias name
%c | Comment
%f | Flags - currently, a "d" for an alias marked for deletion
%n | Index number
%r | Address which alias expands to
%t | Character which indicates if the alias is tagged for inclusion
%Y | Comma-separated tags
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad

### 3.10. allow_8bit

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls whether 8-bit data is converted to 7-bit using either Quoted- Printable or Base64 encoding when sending mail.

### 3.11. allow_ansi

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls whether ANSI color codes in messages (and color tags in rich text messages) are to be interpreted. Messages containing these codes are rare, but if this option is set, their text will be colored accordingly. Note that this may override your color choices, and even present a security problem, since a message could include a line like

    [-- PGP output follows ...

and give it the same color as your attachment color (see also $crypt_timestamp).

### 3.12. arrow_cursor

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, an arrow ("->") will be used to indicate the current entry in menus instead of highlighting the whole line. On slow network or modem links this will make response faster because there is less that has to be redrawn on the screen when moving to the next or previous entries in the menu.

### 3.13. arrow_string

Type: string
Default: “`->`”

Specifies the string of arrow_cursor when arrow_cursor enabled.

### 3.14. ascii_chars

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will use plain ASCII characters when displaying thread and attachment trees, instead of the default ACS characters.

### 3.15. ask_bcc

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for blind-carbon-copy (Bcc) recipients before editing an outgoing message.

### 3.16. ask_cc

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for carbon-copy (Cc) recipients before editing the body of an outgoing message.

### 3.17. ask_followup_to

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for follow-up groups before editing the body of an outgoing message.

### 3.18. ask_x_comment_to

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will prompt you for x-comment-to field before editing the body of an outgoing message.

### 3.19. assumed_charset

Type: string list
Default: (empty)

This variable is a colon-separated list of character encoding schemes for messages without character encoding indication. Header field values and message body content without character encoding indication would be assumed that they are written in one of this list. By default, all the header fields and message body without any charset indication are assumed to be in "us-ascii".

For example, Japanese users might prefer this:

    set assumed_charset="iso-2022-jp:euc-jp:shift_jis:utf-8"

However, only the first content is valid for the message body.

### 3.20. attach_charset

Type: string list
Default: (empty)

This variable is a colon-separated list of character encoding schemes for text file attachments. NeoMutt uses this setting to guess which encoding files being attached are encoded in to convert them to a proper character set given in $send_charset.

If unset, the value of $charset will be used instead. For example, the following configuration would work for Japanese text handling:

    set attach_charset="iso-2022-jp:euc-jp:shift_jis:utf-8"

Note: for Japanese users, "iso-2022-*" must be put at the head of the value as shown above if included.

### 3.21. attach_format

Type: string
Default: “`%u%D%I %t%4n %T%d %> [%.7m/%.10M, %.6e%<C?, %C>, %s]` ”

This variable describes the format of the "attachment" menu. The following `printf(3)`-style sequences are understood:

%C | Charset
%c | Requires charset conversion ("n" or "c")
%D | Deleted flag
%d | Description (if none, falls back to %F)
%e | MIME content-transfer-encoding
%f | Filename
%F | Filename in content-disposition header (if none, falls back to %f)
%I | Disposition ("I" for inline, "A" for attachment)
%m | Major MIME type
%M | MIME subtype
%n | Attachment number
%Q | "Q", if MIME part qualifies for attachment counting
%s | Size (see formatstrings-size)
%T | Graphic tree characters
%t | Tagged flag
%u | Unlink (=to delete) flag
%X | Number of qualifying MIME parts in this part and its children (please see the "attachments" section for possible speed effects)
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad

For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.

### 3.22. attach_save_dir

Type: path
Default: “`./`”

The directory where attachments are saved.

### 3.23. attach_save_without_prompting

Type: boolean
Default: no

This variable, when set to true, will cause attachments to be saved to the 'attach_save_dir' location without prompting the user for the filename.

### 3.24. attach_sep

Type: string
Default: “`\n`”

The separator to add between attachments when operating (saving, printing, piping, etc) on a list of tagged attachments.

### 3.25. attach_split

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If this variable is unset, when operating (saving, printing, piping, etc) on a list of tagged attachments, NeoMutt will concatenate the attachments and will operate on them as a single attachment. The $attach_sep separator is added after each attachment. When set, NeoMutt will operate on the attachments one by one.

### 3.26. attribution_intro

Type: string
Default: “`On %d, %n wrote:`”

This is the string that will precede a replied-to message which is quoted in the main body of the reply (this is the case when $include is set).

For a full listing of defined `printf(3)`-like sequences see the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.

### 3.27. attribution_locale

Type: string
Default: (empty)

The locale used by `strftime(3)` to format dates in the attribution strings. Legal values are the strings your system accepts for the locale environment variable `$LC_TIME`.

This variable is to allow the attribution date format to be customized by recipient or folder using hooks. By default, NeoMutt will use your locale environment, so there is no need to set this except to override that default.

Affected variables are: $attribution_intro, $attribution_trailer, $forward_attribution_intro, $forward_attribution_trailer, $indent_string.

### 3.28. attribution_trailer

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Similar to the $attribution_intro variable, this is the string that will come after a replied-to message which is quoted in the main body of the reply (this is the case when $include is set).

For a full listing of defined `printf(3)`-like sequences see the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.

### 3.29. auto_edit

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set along with $edit_headers, NeoMutt will skip the initial send-menu (prompting for subject and recipients) and allow you to immediately begin editing the body of your message. The send-menu may still be accessed once you have finished editing the body of your message.

Note: when this option is set, you can't use send-hooks that depend on the recipients when composing a new (non-reply) message, as the initial list of recipients is empty.

Also see $fast_reply.

### 3.30. auto_subscribe

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt assumes the presence of a List-Post header means the recipient is subscribed to the list. Unless the mailing list is in the "unsubscribe" or "unlist" lists, it will be added to the "subscribe" list. Parsing and checking these things slows header reading down, so this option is disabled by default.

### 3.31. auto_tag

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, functions in the index menu which affect a message will be applied to all tagged messages (if there are any). When unset, you must first use the `<tag-prefix>` function (bound to ";" by default) to make the next function apply to all tagged messages.

### 3.32. beep

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When this variable is set, NeoMutt will beep when an error occurs.

### 3.33. beep_new

Type: boolean
Default: no

When this variable is set, NeoMutt will beep whenever it prints a message notifying you of new mail. This is independent of the setting of the $beep variable.

### 3.34. bounce

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

Controls whether you will be asked to confirm bouncing messages. If set to yes you don't get asked if you want to bounce a message. Setting this variable to no is not generally useful, and thus not recommended, because you are unable to bounce messages.

### 3.35. bounce_delivered

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When this variable is set, NeoMutt will include Delivered-To headers when bouncing messages. Postfix users may wish to unset this variable.

### 3.36. braille_friendly

Type: boolean
Default: no

When this variable is set, NeoMutt will place the cursor at the beginning of the current line in menus, even when the $arrow_cursor variable is unset, making it easier for blind persons using Braille displays to follow these menus. The option is unset by default because many visual terminals don't permit making the cursor invisible.

### 3.37. browser_abbreviate_mailboxes

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When this variable is set, NeoMutt will abbreviate mailbox names in the browser mailbox list, using '~' and '=' shortcuts.

The default `"alpha"` setting of $sort_browser uses locale-based sorting (using `strcoll(3)`), which ignores some punctuation. This can lead to some situations where the order doesn't make intuitive sense. In those cases, it may be desirable to unset this variable.

### 3.38. browser_sort_dirs_first

Type: boolean
Default: no

If this variable is set, the browser will group directories before files.

### 3.39. catchup_newsgroup

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

If this variable is set, NeoMutt will mark all articles in newsgroup as read when you quit the newsgroup (catchup newsgroup).

### 3.40. certificate_file

Type: path
Default: “`~/.mutt_certificates`”

This variable specifies the file where the certificates you trust are saved. When an unknown certificate is encountered, you are asked if you accept it or not. If you accept it, the certificate can also be saved in this file and further connections are automatically accepted.

You can also manually add CA certificates in this file. Any server certificate that is signed with one of these CA certificates is also automatically accepted.

Example:

    set certificate_file=~/.neomutt/certificates

### 3.41. change_folder_next

Type: boolean
Default: no

When this variable is set, the `<change-folder>` function mailbox suggestion will start at the next folder in your "mailboxes" list, instead of starting at the first folder in the list.

### 3.42. charset

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Character set your terminal uses to display and enter textual data. It is also the fallback for $send_charset.

Upon startup NeoMutt tries to derive this value from environment variables such as `$LC_CTYPE` or `$LANG`.

Note: It should only be set in case NeoMutt isn't able to determine the character set used correctly.

### 3.43. check_mbox_size

Type: boolean
Default: no

When this variable is set, NeoMutt will use file size attribute instead of access time when checking for new mail in mbox and mmdf folders.

This variable is unset by default and should only be enabled when new mail detection for these folder types is unreliable or doesn't work.

Note that enabling this variable should happen before any "mailboxes" directives occur in configuration files regarding mbox or mmdf folders because NeoMutt needs to determine the initial new mail status of such a mailbox by performing a fast mailbox scan when it is defined. Afterwards the new mail status is tracked by file size changes.

### 3.44. check_new

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Note: this option only affects maildir and MH style mailboxes.

When set, NeoMutt will check for new mail delivered while the mailbox is open. Especially with MH mailboxes, this operation can take quite some time since it involves scanning the directory and checking each file to see if it has already been looked at. If this variable is unset, no check for new mail is performed while the mailbox is open.

### 3.45. collapse_all

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will collapse all threads when entering a folder.

### 3.46. collapse_flagged

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When unset, NeoMutt will not collapse a thread if it contains any flagged messages.

### 3.47. collapse_unread

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When unset, NeoMutt will not collapse a thread if it contains any unread messages.

### 3.48. color_directcolor

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will use and allow 24bit colours (aka truecolor aka directcolor). For colours to work properly support from the terminal is required as well as a properly set TERM environment variable advertising the terminals directcolor capability, e.g. "TERM=xterm-direct".

NeoMutt tries to detect whether the terminal supports 24bit colours and enables this variable if it does. If this fails for some reason, you can force 24bit colours by setting this variable manually. You may also try to force a certain TERM environment variable by starting NeoMutt from a terminal as follows (this results in wrong colours if the terminal does not implement directcolors):

    TERM=xterm-direct neomutt

Note: This variable must be set before using any `color` commands.

### 3.49. compose_format

Type: string
Default: “`-- NeoMutt: Compose [Approx. msg size: %l Atts: %a]%>-`”

Controls the format of the status line displayed in the "compose" menu. This string is similar to $status_format, but has its own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences:

%a | Total number of attachments
%h | Local hostname
%l | Approximate size (in bytes) of the current message (see formatstrings-size)
%v | NeoMutt version string
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad

See the text describing the $status_format option for more information on how to set $compose_format.

### 3.50. compose_show_user_headers

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, Neomutt will display user-defined headers (set via my_hdr or from editing with edit-headers).

### 3.51. config_charset

Type: string
Default: (empty)

When defined, NeoMutt will recode commands in rc files from this encoding to the current character set as specified by $charset and aliases written to $alias_file from the current character set.

Please note that if setting $charset it must be done before setting $config_charset.

Recoding should be avoided as it may render unconvertible characters as question marks which can lead to undesired side effects (for example in regular expressions).

### 3.52. confirm_append

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will prompt for confirmation when appending messages to an existing mailbox.

### 3.53. confirm_create

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will prompt for confirmation when saving messages to a mailbox which does not yet exist before creating it.

### 3.54. content_type

Type: string
Default: “`text/plain`”

Sets the default Content-Type for the body of newly composed messages.

### 3.55. copy

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

This variable controls whether or not copies of your outgoing messages will be saved for later references. Also see $record, $save_name, $force_name and "fcc-hook".

### 3.56. copy_decode_weed

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls whether NeoMutt will weed headers when invoking the `<decode-copy>` or `<decode-save>` functions.

### 3.57. count_alternatives

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will recurse inside multipart/alternatives while performing attachment searching and counting(see attachments).

Traditionally, multipart/alternative parts have simply represented different encodings of the main content of the email. Unfortunately, some mail clients have started to place email attachments inside one of alternatives. Setting this will allow NeoMutt to find and count matching attachments hidden there, and include them in the index via %X or through ~X pattern matching.

### 3.58. crypt_auto_encrypt

Type: boolean
Default: no

Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to PGP encrypt outgoing messages. This is probably only useful in connection to the "send-hook" command. It can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when encryption is not required or signing is requested as well. If $smime_is_default is set, then OpenSSL is used instead to create S/MIME messages and settings can be overridden by use of the smime menu instead. (Crypto only)

### 3.59. crypt_auto_pgp

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt may automatically enable PGP encryption/signing for messages. See also $crypt_auto_encrypt, $crypt_reply_encrypt, $crypt_auto_sign, $crypt_reply_sign and $smime_is_default.

### 3.60. crypt_auto_sign

Type: boolean
Default: no

Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to cryptographically sign outgoing messages. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when signing is not required or encryption is requested as well. If $smime_is_default is set, then OpenSSL is used instead to create S/MIME messages and settings can be overridden by use of the smime menu instead of the pgp menu. (Crypto only)

### 3.61. crypt_auto_smime

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt may automatically enable S/MIME encryption/signing for messages. See also $crypt_auto_encrypt, $crypt_reply_encrypt, $crypt_auto_sign, $crypt_reply_sign and $smime_is_default.

### 3.62. crypt_chars

Type: character string
Default: “`SPsK` ”

Controls the characters used in cryptography flags.

Character | Default | Description
1 | S | The mail is signed, and the signature is successfully verified.
2 | P | The mail is PGP encrypted.
3 | s | The mail is signed.
4 | K | The mail contains a PGP public key.
5 | <space> | The mail has no crypto info.

### 3.63. crypt_confirm_hook

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, then you will be prompted for confirmation of keys when using the crypt-hook command. If unset, no such confirmation prompt will be presented. This is generally considered unsafe, especially where typos are concerned.

### 3.64. crypt_opportunistic_encrypt

Type: boolean
Default: no

Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to automatically enable and disable encryption, based on whether all message recipient keys can be located by NeoMutt.

When this option is enabled, NeoMutt will enable/disable encryption each time the TO, CC, and BCC lists are edited. If $edit_headers is set, NeoMutt will also do so each time the message is edited.

While this is set, encryption can't be manually enabled/disabled. The pgp or smime menus provide a selection to temporarily disable this option for the current message.

If $crypt_auto_encrypt or $crypt_reply_encrypt enable encryption for a message, this option will be disabled for that message. It can be manually re-enabled in the pgp or smime menus. (Crypto only)

### 3.65. crypt_opportunistic_encrypt_strong_keys

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, this modifies the behavior of $crypt_opportunistic_encrypt to only search for "strong keys", that is, keys with full validity according to the web-of-trust algorithm. A key with marginal or no validity will not enable opportunistic encryption.

For S/MIME, the behavior depends on the backend. Classic S/MIME will filter for certificates with the 't'(trusted) flag in the .index file. The GPGME backend will use the same filters as with OpenPGP, and depends on GPGME's logic for assigning the GPGME_VALIDITY_FULL and GPGME_VALIDITY_ULTIMATE validity flag.

### 3.66. crypt_protected_headers_read

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will display protected headers ("Memory Hole") in the pager, When set, NeoMutt will display protected headers in the pager, and will update the index and header cache with revised headers.

Protected headers are stored inside the encrypted or signed part of an an email, to prevent disclosure or tampering. For more information see https://github.com/autocrypt/protected-headers Currently NeoMutt only supports the Subject header.

Encrypted messages using protected headers often substitute the exposed Subject header with a dummy value (see $crypt_protected_headers_subject). NeoMutt will update its concept of the correct subject after the message is opened, i.e. via the `<display-message>` function. If you reply to a message before opening it, NeoMutt will end up using the dummy Subject header, so be sure to open such a message first. (Crypto only)

### 3.67. crypt_protected_headers_save

Type: boolean
Default: no

When $crypt_protected_headers_read is set, and a message with a protected Subject is opened, NeoMutt will save the updated Subject into the header cache by default. This allows searching/limiting based on the protected Subject header if the mailbox is re-opened, without having to re-open the message each time. However, for mbox/mh mailbox types, or if header caching is not set up, you would need to re-open the message each time the mailbox was reopened before you could see or search/limit on the protected subject again.

When this variable is set, NeoMutt additionally saves the protected Subject back in the clear-text message headers. This provides better usability, but with the tradeoff of reduced security. The protected Subject header, which may have previously been encrypted, is now stored in clear-text in the message headers. Copying the message elsewhere, via NeoMutt or external tools, could expose this previously encrypted data. Please make sure you understand the consequences of this before you enable this variable. (Crypto only)

### 3.68. crypt_protected_headers_subject

Type: string
Default: “`...`”

When $crypt_protected_headers_write is set, and the message is marked for encryption, this will be substituted into the Subject field in the message headers.

To prevent a subject from being substituted, unset this variable, or set it to the empty string. (Crypto only)

### 3.69. crypt_protected_headers_write

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will generate protected headers for signed and encrypted emails.

Protected headers are stored inside the encrypted or signed part of an an email, to prevent disclosure or tampering. For more information see https://github.com/autocrypt/protected-headers

Currently NeoMutt only supports the Subject header. (Crypto only)

### 3.70. crypt_reply_encrypt

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL encrypt replies to messages which are encrypted. (Crypto only)

### 3.71. crypt_reply_sign

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which are signed.

Note: this does not work on messages that are encrypted and signed! (Crypto only)

### 3.72. crypt_reply_sign_encrypted

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, automatically PGP or OpenSSL sign replies to messages which are encrypted. This makes sense in combination with $crypt_reply_encrypt, because it allows you to sign all messages which are automatically encrypted. This works around the problem noted in $crypt_reply_sign, that NeoMutt is not able to find out whether an encrypted message is also signed. (Crypto only)

### 3.73. crypt_timestamp

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt will include a time stamp in the lines surrounding PGP or S/MIME output, so spoofing such lines is more difficult. If you are using colors to mark these lines, and rely on these, you may unset this setting. (Crypto only)

### 3.74. crypt_use_gpgme

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable controls the use of the GPGME-enabled crypto backends. If it is set and NeoMutt was built with GPGME support, the gpgme code for S/MIME and PGP will be used instead of the classic code. Note that you need to set this option in .neomuttrc; it won't have any effect when used interactively.

Note that the GPGME backend does not support creating old-style inline (traditional) PGP encrypted or signed messages (see $pgp_auto_inline).

### 3.75. crypt_use_pka

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls whether NeoMutt uses PKA (see http://www.g10code.de/docs/pka-intro.de.pdf) during signature verification (only supported by the GPGME backend).

### 3.76. crypt_verify_sig

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

If "yes", always attempt to verify PGP or S/MIME signatures. If "ask-*", ask whether or not to verify the signature. If "no", never attempt to verify cryptographic signatures. (Crypto only)

### 3.77. date_format

Type: string
Default: “`!%a, %b %d, %Y at %I:%M:%S%p %Z`”

Instead of using $date_format it is encouraged to use "%[fmt]" directly in the corresponding format strings, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format. This allows for a more fine grained control of the different menu needs.

This variable controls the format of the date printed by the "%d" sequence in $index_format. This is passed to the `strftime(3)` function to process the date, see the man page for the proper syntax.

Unless the first character in the string is a bang ("!"), the month and week day names are expanded according to the locale. If the first character in the string is a bang, the bang is discarded, and the month and week day names in the rest of the string are expanded in the C locale (that is in US English).

Format strings using this variable are:

UI: $folder_format, $index_format, $mailbox_folder_format, $message_format

Composing: $attribution_intro, $forward_attribution_intro, $forward_attribution_trailer, $forward_format, $indent_string.

### 3.78. debug_file

Type: path
Default: “`~/.neomuttdebug`”

Debug logging is controlled by the variables `$debug_file` and `$debug_level`. `$debug_file` specifies the root of the filename. NeoMutt will add "0" to the end. Each time NeoMutt is run with logging enabled, the log files are rotated. A maximum of five log files are kept, numbered 0 (most recent) to 4 (oldest).

This option can be enabled on the command line, "neomutt -l mylog"

See also: `$debug_level`

### 3.79. debug_level

Type: number
Default: 0

Debug logging is controlled by the variables `$debug_file` and `$debug_level`.

The debug level controls how much information is saved to the log file. If you have a problem with NeoMutt, then enabling logging may help find the cause. Levels 1-3 will usually provide enough information for writing a bug report. Levels 4,5 will be extremely verbose.

Warning: Logging at high levels may save private information to the file.

This option can be enabled on the command line, "neomutt -d 2"

See also: `$debug_file`

### 3.80. default_hook

Type: string
Default: “`~f %s !~P | (~P ~C %s)`”

This variable controls how some hooks are interpreted if their pattern is a plain string or a regex. i.e. they don't contain a pattern, like `~f`

The hooks are: fcc-hook, fcc-save-hook, index-format-hook, message-hook, reply-hook, save-hook, send-hook and send2-hook.

The hooks are expanded when they are declared, so a hook will be interpreted according to the value of this variable at the time the hook is declared.

The default value matches if the message is either from a user matching the regular expression given, or if it is from you (if the from address matches "alternates") and is to or cc'ed to a user matching the given regular expression.

### 3.81. delete

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

Controls whether or not messages are really deleted when closing or synchronizing a mailbox. If set to yes, messages marked for deleting will automatically be purged without prompting. If set to no, messages marked for deletion will be kept in the mailbox.

### 3.82. delete_untag

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If this option is set, NeoMutt will untag messages when marking them for deletion. This applies when you either explicitly delete a message, or when you save it to another folder.

### 3.83. digest_collapse

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If this option is set, NeoMutt's received-attachments menu will not show the subparts of individual messages in a multipart/digest. To see these subparts, press "v" on that menu.

### 3.84. display_filter

Type: command
Default: (empty)

When set, specifies a command used to filter messages. When a message is viewed it is passed as standard input to $display_filter, and the filtered message is read from the standard output.

When preparing the message, NeoMutt inserts some escape sequences into the text. They are of the form: `<esc>]9;XXX<bel>` where "XXX" is a random 64-bit number.

If these escape sequences interfere with your filter, they can be removed using a tool like `ansifilter` or `sed 's/^\x1b]9;[0-9]\+\x7//'`

If they are removed, then PGP and MIME headers will no longer be coloured. This can be fixed by adding this to your config: `color body magenta default '^\[-- .* --\]$'`.

### 3.85. dsn_notify

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This variable sets the request for when notification is returned. The string consists of a comma separated list (no spaces!) of one or more of the following: never, to never request notification, failure, to request notification on transmission failure, delay, to be notified of message delays, success, to be notified of successful transmission.

Example:

    set dsn_notify="failure,delay"

Note: when using $sendmail for delivery, you should not enable this unless you are either using Sendmail 8.8.x or greater or a MTA providing a `sendmail(1)`-compatible interface supporting the `-N` option for DSN. For SMTP delivery, DSN support is auto-detected so that it depends on the server whether DSN will be used or not.

### 3.86. dsn_return

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This variable controls how much of your message is returned in DSN messages. It may be set to either hdrs to return just the message header, or full to return the full message.

Example:

    set dsn_return=hdrs

Note: when using $sendmail for delivery, you should not enable this unless you are either using Sendmail 8.8.x or greater or a MTA providing a `sendmail(1)`-compatible interface supporting the `-R` option for DSN. For SMTP delivery, DSN support is auto-detected so that it depends on the server whether DSN will be used or not.

### 3.87. duplicate_threads

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable controls whether NeoMutt, when $sort is set to threads, threads messages with the same Message-Id together. If it is set, it will indicate that it thinks they are duplicates of each other with an equals sign in the thread tree.

### 3.88. edit_headers

Type: boolean
Default: no

This option allows you to edit the header of your outgoing messages along with the body of your message.

Although the compose menu may have localized header labels, the labels passed to your editor will be standard RFC2822 headers, (e.g. To:, Cc:, Subject:). Headers added in your editor must also be RFC2822 headers, or one of the pseudo headers listed in "edit-header". NeoMutt will not understand localized header labels, just as it would not when parsing an actual email.

Note that changes made to the References: and Date: headers are ignored for interoperability reasons.

### 3.89. editor

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This variable specifies which editor is used by NeoMutt. It defaults to the value of the `$VISUAL`, or `$EDITOR`, environment variable, or to the string "vi" if neither of those are set.

The `$editor` string may contain a %s escape, which will be replaced by the name of the file to be edited. If the %s escape does not appear in `$editor`, a space and the name to be edited are appended.

The resulting string is then executed by running

    sh -c 'string'

where string is the expansion of `$editor` described above.

### 3.90. empty_subject

Type: string
Default: “`Re: your mail`”

This variable specifies the subject to be used when replying to an email with an empty subject. It defaults to "Re: your mail".

### 3.91. encode_from

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will quoted-printable encode messages when they contain the string "From " (note the trailing space) in the beginning of a line. This is useful to avoid the tampering certain mail delivery and transport agents tend to do with messages (in order to prevent tools from misinterpreting the line as a mbox message separator).

### 3.92. entropy_file

Type: path
Default: (empty)

The file which includes random data that is used to initialize SSL library functions.

### 3.93. envelope_from_address

Type: e-mail address
Default: (empty)

Manually sets the envelope sender for outgoing messages. This value is ignored if $use_envelope_from is unset.

### 3.94. external_search_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

If set, contains the name of the external program used by "~I" patterns. This will usually be a wrapper script around mairix, mu, or similar indexers other than notmuch (for which there is optional special support).

Here is an example how it works. Let's assume $external_search_command is set to "mairix_filter", and mairix_filter is a script which runs the old but well loved mairix indexer with the arguments given to mairix_filter, in the "raw" mode of mairix, producing on the standard output a list of Message-IDs, one per line.

If possible, it also filters down the results coming from mairix such that only messages in the current folder remain. It can do this because it gets a hidden first argument which is the path to the folder. (This can be the type of clean and simple script called a one-liner.)

Now if NeoMutt gets a limit or tag command followed by the pattern "~I '-t s:bleeping='", mairix_filter runs mairix with the arguments from inside the quotes (the quotes are needed because of the space after "-t"), mairix finds all messages with "bleeping" in the Subject plus all messages sharing threads with these and outputs their file names, and mairix_filter translates the file names into Message-IDs. Finally, NeoMutt reads the Message-IDs and targets the matching messages with the command given to it.

You, the user, still have to rewrite the mairix_filter script to match the behavior of your indexer, but this should help users of indexers other than notmuch to integrate them cleanly with NeoMutt.

### 3.95. fast_reply

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the initial prompt for recipients (to, cc, bcc) and subject are skipped when the relevant information is already provided. These cases include replying to messages and passing the relevant command line arguments. The initial prompt for recipients is also skipped when composing a new message to the current message sender, while the initial prompt for subject is also skipped when forwarding messages.

Note: this variable has no effect when the $auto_edit variable is set.

See also: $auto_edit, $edit_headers, $ask_cc, $ask_bcc

### 3.96. fcc_attach

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

This variable controls whether or not attachments on outgoing messages are saved along with the main body of your message.

Note: $fcc_before_send forces the default (set) behavior of this option.

### 3.97. fcc_before_send

Type: boolean
Default: no

When this variable is set, FCCs will occur before sending the message. Before sending, the message cannot be manipulated, so it will be stored the exact same as sent: $fcc_attach and $fcc_clear will be ignored (using their default values).

When unset, the default, FCCs will occur after sending. Variables $fcc_attach and $fcc_clear will be respected, allowing it to be stored without attachments or encryption/signing if desired.

### 3.98. fcc_clear

Type: boolean
Default: no

When this variable is set, FCCs will be stored unencrypted and unsigned, even when the actual message is encrypted and/or signed.

Note: $fcc_before_send forces the default (unset) behavior of this option. (PGP only)

See also $pgp_self_encrypt, $smime_self_encrypt

### 3.99. flag_chars

Type: character string
Default: “`*!DdrONon-` ”

Controls the characters used in several flags.

Character | Default | Description
1 | * | The mail is tagged.
2 | ! | The mail is flagged as important.
3 | D | The mail is marked for deletion.
4 | d | The mail has attachments marked for deletion.
5 | r | The mail has been replied to.
6 | O | The mail is Old (Unread but seen).
7 | N | The mail is New (Unread but not seen).
8 | o | The mail thread is Old (Unread but seen).
9 | n | The mail thread is New (Unread but not seen).
10 | - | The mail is read - %S expando.
11 | <space> | The mail is read - %Z expando.

### 3.100. flag_safe

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, flagged messages can't be deleted.

### 3.101. folder

Type: mailbox
Default: “`~/Mail`”

Specifies the default location of your mailboxes. A "+" or "=" at the beginning of a pathname will be expanded to the value of this variable. Note that if you change this variable (from the default) value you need to make sure that the assignment occurs before you use "+" or "=" for any other variables since expansion takes place when handling the "mailboxes" command.

### 3.102. folder_format

Type: string
Default: “`%2C %t %N %F %2l %-8.8u %-8.8g %8s %d %i`”

This variable allows you to customize the file browser display to your personal taste. This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences:

%a |  | Alert: 1 if user is notified of new mail
%C |  | Current file number
%d |  | Date/time folder was last modified
%D |  | Date/time folder was last modified using $date_format. It is encouraged to use "%[fmt]" instead, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format.
%f |  | Filename ("/" is appended to directory names, "@" to symbolic links and "*" to executable files)
%F |  | File permissions
%g |  | Group name (or numeric gid, if missing)
%i |  | Description of the folder
%l |  | Number of hard links
%m | * | Number of messages in the mailbox
%n | * | Number of unread messages in the mailbox
%N |  | "N" if mailbox has new mail, " " (space) otherwise
%p |  | Poll: 1 if Mailbox is checked for new mail
%s |  | Size in bytes (see formatstrings-size)
%t |  | "*" if the file is tagged, blank otherwise
%u |  | Owner name (or numeric uid, if missing)
%[fmt] |  | Date/time folder was last modified using an `strftime(3)` expression
%>X |  | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X |  | Pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X |  | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad

For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.

* = can be optionally printed if nonzero

%m, %n, and %N only work for monitored mailboxes. %m requires $mail_check_stats to be set. %n requires $mail_check_stats to be set (except for IMAP mailboxes).

### 3.103. followup_to

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls whether or not the "Mail-Followup-To:" header field is generated when sending mail. When set, NeoMutt will generate this field when you are replying to a known mailing list, specified with the "subscribe" or "lists" commands.

This field has two purposes. First, preventing you from receiving duplicate copies of replies to messages which you send to mailing lists, and second, ensuring that you do get a reply separately for any messages sent to known lists to which you are not subscribed.

The header will contain only the list's address for subscribed lists, and both the list address and your own email address for unsubscribed lists. Without this header, a group reply to your message sent to a subscribed list will be sent to both the list and your address, resulting in two copies of the same email for you.

### 3.104. followup_to_poster

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

If this variable is set and the keyword "poster" is present in Followup-To header, follow-up to newsgroup function is not permitted. The message will be mailed to the submitter of the message via mail.

### 3.105. force_name

Type: boolean
Default: no

This variable is similar to $save_name, except that NeoMutt will store a copy of your outgoing message by the username of the address you are sending to even if that mailbox does not exist.

Also see the $record variable.

### 3.106. forward_attachments

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

When forwarding inline (i.e. $mime_forward unset or answered with "no" and $forward_decode set), attachments which cannot be decoded in a reasonable manner will be attached to the newly composed message if this quadoption is set or answered with "yes".

### 3.107. forward_attribution_intro

Type: string
Default: “`----- Forwarded message from %f -----`”

This is the string that will precede a message which has been forwarded in the main body of a message (when $mime_forward is unset). For a full listing of defined `printf(3)`-like sequences see the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.

### 3.108. forward_attribution_trailer

Type: string
Default: “`----- End forwarded message -----`”

This is the string that will follow a message which has been forwarded in the main body of a message (when $mime_forward is unset). For a full listing of defined `printf(3)`-like sequences see the section on $index_format. See also $attribution_locale.

### 3.109. forward_decode

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into `text/plain` when forwarding a message. The message header is also RFC2047 decoded. This variable is only used, if $mime_forward is unset, otherwise $mime_forward_decode is used instead.

### 3.110. forward_decrypt

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls the handling of encrypted messages when forwarding a message. When set, the outer layer of encryption is stripped off. This variable is only used if $mime_forward is set and $mime_forward_decode is unset.

### 3.111. forward_edit

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

This quadoption controls whether or not the user is automatically placed in the editor when forwarding messages. For those who always want to forward with no modification, use a setting of "no".

### 3.112. forward_format

Type: string
Default: “`[%a: %s]`”

This variable controls the default subject when forwarding a message. It uses the same format sequences as the $index_format variable.

### 3.113. forward_quote

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, forwarded messages included in the main body of the message (when $mime_forward is unset) will be quoted using $indent_string.

### 3.114. forward_references

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, forwarded messages set the "In-Reply-To:" and "References:" headers in the same way as normal replies would. Hence the forwarded message becomes part of the original thread instead of starting a new one.

### 3.115. from

Type: e-mail address
Default: (empty)

When set, this variable contains a default "from" address. It can be overridden using "my_hdr" (including from a "send-hook") and $reverse_name. This variable is ignored if $use_from is unset.

If not specified, then it may be read from the environment variable `$EMAIL`.

### 3.116. from_chars

Type: character string
Default: (empty)

Controls the character used to prefix the %F and %L fields in the index.

Character | Description
1 | Mail is written by you and has a To address, or has a known mailing list in the To address.
2 | Mail is written by you and has a Cc address, or has a known mailing list in the Cc address.
3 | Mail is written by you and has a Bcc address.
4 | All remaining cases.

If this is empty or unset (default), the traditional long "To ", "Cc " and "Bcc " prefixes are used. If set but too short to include a character for a particular case, a single space will be prepended to the field. To prevent any prefix at all from being added in a particular case, use the special value CR (aka ^M) for the corresponding character.

This slightly odd interface is necessitated by NeoMutt's handling of string variables; one can't tell a variable that is unset from one that is set to the empty string.

### 3.117. gecos_mask

Type: regular expression
Default: “`^[^,]*`”

A regular expression used by NeoMutt to parse the GECOS field of a password entry when expanding the alias. The default value will return the string up to the first "," encountered. If the GECOS field contains a string like "lastname, firstname" then you should set it to "`.*`".

This can be useful if you see the following behavior: you address an e-mail to user ID "stevef" whose full name is "Steve Franklin". If NeoMutt expands "stevef" to '"Franklin" stevef@foo.bar' then you should set the $gecos_mask to a regular expression that will match the whole name so NeoMutt will expand "Franklin" to "Franklin, Steve".

### 3.118. greeting

Type: string
Default: (empty)

When set, this is the string that will precede every message as a greeting phrase to the recipients.

"Format strings" are similar to the strings used in the "C" function printf to format output (see the man page for more detail). The following sequences are defined in NeoMutt:

%n | Recipient's real name
%u | User (login) name of recipient
%v | First name of recipient

### 3.119. group_index_format

Type: string
Default: “`%4C %M%N %5s %-45.45f %d`”

This variable allows you to customize the newsgroup browser display to your personal taste. This string is similar to "index_format", but has its own set of printf()-like sequences:

%a | Alert: 1 if user is notified of new mail
%C | Current newsgroup number
%d | Description of newsgroup (becomes from server)
%f | Newsgroup name
%M | - if newsgroup not allowed for direct post (moderated for example)
%N | N if newsgroup is new, u if unsubscribed, blank otherwise
%n | Number of new articles in newsgroup
%p | Poll: 1 if Mailbox is checked for new mail
%s | Number of unread articles in newsgroup
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad

### 3.120. hdrs

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When unset, the header fields normally added by the "my_hdr" command are not created. This variable must be unset before composing a new message or replying in order to take effect. If set, the user defined header fields are added to every new message.

### 3.121. header

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, this variable causes NeoMutt to include the header of the message you are replying to into the edit buffer. The $weed setting applies.

### 3.122. header_color_partial

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, color header regexes behave like color body regexes: color is applied to the exact text matched by the regex. When unset, color is applied to the entire header.

One use of this option might be to apply color to just the header labels.

See "color" for more details.

### 3.123. help

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, help lines describing the bindings for the major functions provided by each menu are displayed on the first line of the screen.

Note: The binding will not be displayed correctly if the function is bound to a sequence rather than a single keystroke. Also, the help line may not be updated if a binding is changed while NeoMutt is running. Since this variable is primarily aimed at new users, neither of these should present a major problem.

### 3.124. hidden_host

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will skip the host name part of $hostname variable when adding the domain part to addresses.

### 3.125. hidden_tags

Type: string list
Default: “`unread,draft,flagged,passed,replied,attachment,signed,encrypted`”

This variable specifies a list of comma-separated private notmuch/imap tags which should not be printed on screen.

### 3.126. hide_limited

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden by limiting, in the thread tree.

### 3.127. hide_missing

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of missing messages in the thread tree.

### 3.128. hide_thread_subject

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will not show the subject of messages in the thread tree that have the same subject as their parent or closest previously displayed sibling.

### 3.129. hide_top_limited

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of messages that are hidden by limiting, at the top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when $hide_limited is set, this option will have no effect.

### 3.130. hide_top_missing

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will not show the presence of missing messages at the top of threads in the thread tree. Note that when $hide_missing is set, this option will have no effect.

### 3.131. history

Type: number
Default: 10

This variable controls the size (in number of strings remembered) of the string history buffer per category. The buffer is cleared each time the variable is set.

Note that strings (e.g. commands) starting with a space are never recorded in the history. This is for example useful to prevent leaking sensitive information into the history file or for one off tests.

Also note that a string is not added to the history if it exactly matches its immediate predecessor, e.g. executing the same command twice in a row results in only one copy being added to the history. To prevent duplicates over all entries use $history_remove_dups.

### 3.132. history_file

Type: path
Default: “`~/.mutthistory`”

The file in which NeoMutt will save its history.

Also see $save_history.

### 3.133. history_format

Type: string
Default: “`%s`”

Controls the format of the entries of the history list. This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences:

%C | Line number
%s | History match
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad

### 3.134. history_remove_dups

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, all of the string history will be scanned for duplicates when a new entry is added. Duplicate entries in the $history_file will also be removed when it is periodically compacted.

### 3.135. honor_disposition

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will not display attachments with a disposition of "attachment" inline even if it could render the part to plain text. These MIME parts can only be viewed from the attachment menu.

If unset, NeoMutt will render all MIME parts it can properly transform to plain text.

### 3.136. honor_followup_to

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

This variable controls whether or not a Mail-Followup-To header is honored when group-replying to a message.

### 3.137. hostname

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Specifies the fully-qualified hostname of the system NeoMutt is running on containing the host's name and the DNS domain it belongs to. It is used as the domain part (after "@") for local email addresses.

If not specified in a config file, then NeoMutt will try to determine the hostname itself.

Optionally, NeoMutt can be compiled with a fixed domain name.

Also see $use_domain and $hidden_host.

### 3.138. idn_decode

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will show you international domain names decoded. Note: You can use IDNs for addresses even if this is unset. This variable only affects decoding. (IDN only)

### 3.139. idn_encode

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will encode international domain names using IDN. Unset this if your SMTP server can handle newer (RFC6531) UTF-8 encoded domains. (IDN only)

### 3.140. ignore_list_reply_to

Type: boolean
Default: no

Affects the behavior of the `<reply>` function when replying to messages from mailing lists (as defined by the "subscribe" or "lists" commands). When set, if the "Reply-To:" field is set to the same value as the "To:" field, NeoMutt assumes that the "Reply-To:" field was set by the mailing list to automate responses to the list, and will ignore this field. To direct a response to the mailing list when this option is set, use the `<list-reply>` function; `<group-reply>` will reply to both the sender and the list.

### 3.141. imap_authenticators

Type: string list
Default: (empty)

This is a colon-separated list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an IMAP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either "login" or the right side of an IMAP "AUTH=xxx" capability string, e.g. "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If it's unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.

Example:

    set imap_authenticators="gssapi:cram-md5:login"

Note: NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the IMAP server.

### 3.142. imap_check_subscribed

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will fetch the set of subscribed folders from your server whenever a mailbox is selected, and add them to the set of mailboxes it polls for new mail just as if you had issued individual "mailboxes" commands.

### 3.143. imap_condstore

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will use the CONDSTORE extension (RFC7162) if advertised by the server. NeoMutt's current implementation is basic, used only for initial message fetching and flag updates.

For some IMAP servers, enabling this will slightly speed up downloading initial messages. Unfortunately, Gmail is not one those, and displays worse performance when enabled. Your mileage may vary.

### 3.144. imap_deflate

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will use the COMPRESS=DEFLATE extension (RFC4978) if advertised by the server.

In general a good compression efficiency can be achieved, which speeds up reading large mailboxes also on fairly good connections.

### 3.145. imap_delim_chars

Type: string
Default: “`/.`”

This contains the list of characters that NeoMutt will use as folder separators for IMAP paths, when no separator is provided on the IMAP connection.

### 3.146. imap_fetch_chunk_size

Type: number (long)
Default: 0

When set to a value greater than 0, new headers will be downloaded in groups of this many headers per request. If you have a very large mailbox, this might prevent a timeout and disconnect when opening the mailbox, by sending a FETCH per set of this many headers, instead of a single FETCH for all new headers.

### 3.147. imap_headers

Type: string
Default: (empty)

NeoMutt requests these header fields in addition to the default headers ("Date:", "From:", "Sender:", "Subject:", "To:", "Cc:", "Message-Id:", "References:", "Content-Type:", "Content-Description:", "In-Reply-To:", "Reply-To:", "Lines:", "List-Post:", "X-Label:") from IMAP servers before displaying the index menu. You may want to add more headers for spam detection.

Note: This is a space separated list, items should be uppercase and not contain the colon, e.g. "X-BOGOSITY X-SPAM-STATUS" for the "X-Bogosity:" and "X-Spam-Status:" header fields.

### 3.148. imap_idle

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will attempt to use the IMAP IDLE extension to check for new mail in the current mailbox. Some servers (dovecot was the inspiration for this option) react badly to NeoMutt's implementation. If your connection seems to freeze up periodically, try unsetting this.

### 3.149. imap_keep_alive

Type: number
Default: 300

This variable specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that NeoMutt will wait before polling open IMAP connections, to prevent the server from closing them before NeoMutt has finished with them. The default is well within the RFC-specified minimum amount of time (30 minutes) before a server is allowed to do this, but in practice the RFC does get violated every now and then. Reduce this number if you find yourself getting disconnected from your IMAP server due to inactivity.

### 3.150. imap_list_subscribed

Type: boolean
Default: no

This variable configures whether IMAP folder browsing will look for only subscribed folders or all folders. This can be toggled in the IMAP browser with the `<toggle-subscribed>` function.

### 3.151. imap_login

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Your login name on the IMAP server.

This variable defaults to the value of $imap_user.

### 3.152. imap_oauth_refresh_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

The command to run to generate an OAUTH refresh token for authorizing your connection to your IMAP server. This command will be run on every connection attempt that uses the OAUTHBEARER or XOAUTH2 authentication mechanisms. See "oauth" for details.

### 3.153. imap_pass

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Specifies the password for your IMAP account. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt you for your password when you invoke the `<imap-fetch-mail>` function or try to open an IMAP folder.

Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.

### 3.154. imap_passive

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will not open new IMAP connections to check for new mail. NeoMutt will only check for new mail over existing IMAP connections. This is useful if you don't want to be prompted for user/password pairs on NeoMutt invocation, or if opening the connection is slow.

### 3.155. imap_peek

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will avoid implicitly marking your mail as read whenever you fetch a message from the server. This is generally a good thing, but can make closing an IMAP folder somewhat slower. This option exists to appease speed freaks.

### 3.156. imap_pipeline_depth

Type: number
Default: 15

Controls the number of IMAP commands that may be queued up before they are sent to the server. A deeper pipeline reduces the amount of time NeoMutt must wait for the server, and can make IMAP servers feel much more responsive. But not all servers correctly handle pipelined commands, so if you have problems you might want to try setting this variable to 0.

Note: Changes to this variable have no effect on open connections.

### 3.157. imap_poll_timeout

Type: number
Default: 15

This variable specifies the maximum amount of time in seconds that NeoMutt will wait for a response when polling IMAP connections for new mail, before timing out and closing the connection. Set to 0 to disable timing out.

### 3.158. imap_qresync

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will use the QRESYNC extension (RFC7162) if advertised by the server. NeoMutt's current implementation is basic, used only for initial message fetching and flag updates.

Note: this feature is currently experimental. If you experience strange behavior, such as duplicate or missing messages please file a bug report to let us know.

### 3.159. imap_rfc5161

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will use the IMAP ENABLE extension (RFC5161) to select CAPABILITIES. Some servers (notably Coremail System IMap Server) do not properly respond to ENABLE commands, which might cause NeoMutt to hang. If your connection seems to freeze at login, try unsetting this. See also https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/issues/1689

### 3.160. imap_send_id

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will send an IMAP ID command (RFC2971) to the server when logging in if advertised by the server. This command provides information about the IMAP client, such as "NeoMutt" and the current version.

### 3.161. imap_server_noise

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will display warning messages from the IMAP server as error messages. Since these messages are often harmless, or generated due to configuration problems on the server which are out of the users' hands, you may wish to suppress them at some point.

### 3.162. imap_user

Type: string
Default: (empty)

The name of the user whose mail you intend to access on the IMAP server.

This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.

### 3.163. implicit_auto_view

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set to "yes", NeoMutt will look for a mailcap entry with the "`copiousoutput`" flag set for every MIME attachment it doesn't have an internal viewer defined for. If such an entry is found, NeoMutt will use the viewer defined in that entry to convert the body part to text form.

### 3.164. include

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

Controls whether or not a copy of the message(s) you are replying to is included in your reply.

### 3.165. include_encrypted

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls whether or not NeoMutt includes separately encrypted attachment contents when replying.

This variable was added to prevent accidental exposure of encrypted contents when replying to an attacker. If a previously encrypted message were attached by the attacker, they could trick an unwary recipient into decrypting and including the message in their reply.

### 3.166. include_only_first

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls whether or not NeoMutt includes only the first attachment of the message you are replying.

### 3.167. indent_string

Type: string
Default: “`>` ”

Specifies the string to prepend to each line of text quoted in a message to which you are replying. You are strongly encouraged not to change this value, as it tends to agitate the more fanatical netizens.

The value of this option is ignored if $text_flowed is set, because the quoting mechanism is strictly defined for format=flowed.

This option is a format string, please see the description of $index_format for supported `printf(3)`-style sequences.

### 3.168. index_format

Type: string
Default: “`%4C %Z %{%b %d} %-15.15L (%<l?%4l&%4c>) %s`”

This variable allows you to customize the message index display to your personal taste.

"Format strings" are similar to the strings used in the C function `printf(3)` to format output (see the man page for more details). For an explanation of the %<...> construct, see the status_format description. The following sequences are defined in NeoMutt:

%a | Address of the author
%A | Reply-to address (if present; otherwise: address of author)
%b | Filename of the original message folder (think mailbox)
%B | Same as %K
%c | Number of characters (bytes) in the body of the message (see formatstrings-size)
%C | Current message number
%cr | Number of characters (bytes) in the raw message, including the header (see formatstrings-size)
%d | Date and time of message using date_format and sender's timezone It is encouraged to use "%{fmt}" instead, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format.
%D | Date and time of message using date_format and local timezone It is encouraged to use "%[fmt]" instead, where "fmt" is the value of $date_format.
%e | Current message number in thread
%E | Number of messages in current thread
%f | Sender (address + real name), either From: or Return-Path:
%F | Author name, or recipient name if the message is from you
%Fp | Like %F, but plain. No contextual formatting is applied to recipient name
%g | Message tags (e.g. notmuch tags/imap flags)
%Gx | Individual message tag (e.g. notmuch tags/imap flags)
%H | Spam attribute(s) of this message
%i | Message-id of the current message
%I | Initials of author
%J | Message tags (if present, tree unfolded, and != parent's tags)
%K | The list to which the letter was sent (if any; otherwise: empty)
%l | number of lines in the unprocessed message (may not work with maildir, mh, and IMAP folders)
%L | If an address in the "To:" or "Cc:" header field matches an address Defined by the user's "subscribe" command, this displays "To <list-name>", otherwise the same as %F
%m | Total number of message in the mailbox
%M | Number of hidden messages if the thread is collapsed
%n | Author's real name (or address if missing)
%N | Message score
%O | Original save folder where NeoMutt would formerly have Stashed the message: list name or recipient name If not sent to a list
%P | Progress indicator for the built-in pager (how much of the file has been displayed)
%q | Newsgroup name (if compiled with NNTP support)
%r | Comma separated list of "To:" recipients
%R | Comma separated list of "Cc:" recipients
%s | Subject of the message
%S | Single character status of the message ("N"/"O"/"D"/"d"/"!"/"r"/"*")
%t | "To:" field (recipients)
%T | The appropriate character from the $to_chars string
%u | User (login) name of the author
%v | First name of the author, or the recipient if the message is from you
%W | Name of organization of author ("Organization:" field)
%x | "X-Comment-To:" field (if present and compiled with NNTP support)
%X | Number of MIME attachments (please see the "attachments" section for possible speed effects)
%y | "X-Label:" field, if present
%Y | "X-Label:" field, if present, and (1) not at part of a thread tree, (2) at the top of a thread, or (3) "X-Label:" is different from Preceding message's "X-Label:"
%Z | A three character set of message status flags. The first character is new/read/replied flags ("n"/"o"/"r"/"O"/"N"). The second is deleted or encryption flags ("D"/"d"/"S"/"P"/"s"/"K"). The third is either tagged/flagged ("*"/"!"), or one of the characters Listed in $to_chars.
%zc | Message crypto flags
%zs | Message status flags
%zt | Message tag flags
%@name@ | insert and evaluate format-string from the matching "index-format-hook" command
%{fmt} | the date and time of the message is converted to sender's time zone, and "fmt" is expanded by the library function `strftime(3)`; if the first character inside the braces is a bang ("!"), the date is formatted ignoring any locale settings. Note that the sender's time zone might only be available as a numerical offset, so "%Z" behaves like "%z".
%[fmt] | the date and time of the message is converted to the local time zone, and "fmt" is expanded by the library function `strftime(3)`; if the first character inside the brackets is a bang ("!"), the date is formatted ignoring any locale settings.
%(fmt) | the local date and time when the message was received, and "fmt" is expanded by the library function `strftime(3)`; if the first character inside the parentheses is a bang ("!"), the date is formatted ignoring any locale settings.
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad

Date format expressions can be constructed based on relative dates. Using the date formatting operators along with nested conditionals, the date format can be modified based on how old a message is. See the section on "Conditional Dates" for an explanation and examples

Note that for mbox/mmdf, "%l" applies to the unprocessed message, and for maildir/mh, the value comes from the "Lines:" header field when present (the meaning is normally the same). Thus the value depends on the encodings used in the different parts of the message and has little meaning in practice.

"Soft-fill" deserves some explanation: Normal right-justification will print everything to the left of the "%>", displaying padding and whatever lies to the right only if there's room. By contrast, soft-fill gives priority to the right-hand side, guaranteeing space to display it and showing padding only if there's still room. If necessary, soft-fill will eat text leftwards to make room for rightward text.

Note that these expandos are supported in "save-hook", "fcc-hook" and "fcc-save-hook", too.

### 3.169. inews

Type: command
Default: (empty)

If set, specifies the program and arguments used to deliver news posted by NeoMutt. Otherwise, NeoMutt posts article using current connection to news server. The following printf-style sequence is understood:

%a | account url
%p | port
%P | port if specified
%s | news server name
%S | url schema
%u | username

Example:

    set inews="/usr/local/bin/inews -hS"

### 3.170. ispell

Type: command
Default: “`ispell`”

How to invoke ispell (GNU's spell-checking software).

### 3.171. keep_flagged

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, read messages marked as flagged will not be moved from your spool mailbox to your $mbox mailbox or to the "mbox" specified by a mbox-hook command.

Note that $keep_flagged only has an effect if $move is set.

### 3.172. local_date_header

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, the date in the Date header of emails that you send will be in your local timezone. If unset a UTC date will be used instead to avoid leaking information about your current location.

### 3.173. mail_check

Type: number
Default: 5

This variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt should look for new mail. Also see the $timeout variable.

### 3.174. mail_check_recent

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will only notify you about new mail that has been received since the last time you opened the mailbox. When unset, NeoMutt will notify you if any new mail exists in the mailbox, regardless of whether you have visited it recently.

When $mark_old is set, NeoMutt does not consider the mailbox to contain new mail if only old messages exist.

### 3.175. mail_check_stats

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will periodically calculate message statistics of a mailbox while polling for new mail. It will check for unread, flagged, and total message counts. Because this operation is more performance intensive, it defaults to unset, and has a separate option, $mail_check_stats_interval, to control how often to update these counts.

Message statistics can also be explicitly calculated by invoking the `<check-stats>` function.

### 3.176. mail_check_stats_interval

Type: number
Default: 60

When $mail_check_stats is set, this variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt will update message counts.

### 3.177. mailbox_folder_format

Type: string
Default: “`%2C %<n?%6n& > %6m %i`”

This variable allows you to customize the file browser display to your personal taste. It's only used to customize network mailboxes (e.g. imap). This string is identical in formatting to the one used by "$folder_format".

### 3.178. mailcap_path

Type: string list
Default: “`~/.mailcap:/opt/local/share/neomutt/mailcap:/opt/local/etc/mailcap:/etc/mailcap:/usr/etc/mailcap:/usr/local/etc/mailcap`”

This variable specifies a list of colon-separated files to consult when attempting to display MIME bodies not directly supported by NeoMutt. The default value is generated during startup: see the "mailcap" section of the manual.

$mailcap_path is overridden by the environment variable `$MAILCAPS`.

The default search path is from RFC1524.

### 3.179. mailcap_sanitize

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt will restrict possible characters in mailcap % expandos to a well-defined set of safe characters. This is the safe setting, but we are not sure it doesn't break some more advanced MIME stuff.

DON'T CHANGE THIS SETTING UNLESS YOU ARE REALLY SURE WHAT YOU ARE DOING!

### 3.180. maildir_check_cur

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will poll both the new and cur directories of a maildir folder for new messages. This might be useful if other programs interacting with the folder (e.g. dovecot) are moving new messages to the cur directory. Note that setting this option may slow down polling for new messages in large folders, since NeoMutt has to scan all cur messages.

### 3.181. maildir_field_delimiter

Type: string
Default: “`:`”

Use the value as maildir field delimiter. This is a single-character used to accommodate maildir mailboxes on platforms where `:` is not allowed in a filename. The recommended alternative on such platforms is `;`. Neomutt supports all non-alphanumeric values except for `-`, `.`, `\`, `/`. Note: this only applies to maildir-style mailboxes. Setting it will have no effect on other mailbox types.

### 3.182. maildir_trash

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, messages marked as deleted will be saved with the maildir trashed flag instead of unlinked. Note: this only applies to maildir-style mailboxes. Setting it will have no effect on other mailbox types.

### 3.183. mark_macro_prefix

Type: string
Default: “`'`”

Prefix for macros created using mark-message. A new macro automatically generated with <mark-message>a will be composed from this prefix and the letter a.

### 3.184. mark_old

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls whether or not NeoMutt marks new unread messages as old if you exit a mailbox without reading them. With this option set, the next time you start NeoMutt, the messages will show up with an "O" next to them in the index menu, indicating that they are old.

### 3.185. markers

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls the display of wrapped lines in the internal pager. If set, a "+" marker is displayed at the beginning of wrapped lines.

Also see the $smart_wrap variable.

### 3.186. mask

Type: regular expression
Default: “`!^\.[^.]`”

A regular expression used in the file browser, optionally preceded by the not operator "!". Only files whose names match this mask will be shown. The match is always case-sensitive.

### 3.187. mbox

Type: mailbox
Default: “`~/mbox`”

This specifies the folder into which read mail in your $spool_file folder will be appended.

Also see the $move variable.

### 3.188. mbox_type

Type: enumeration
Default: mbox

The default mailbox type used when creating new folders. May be any of "mbox", "MMDF", "MH" or "Maildir".

This can also be set using the `-m` command-line option.

### 3.189. me_too

Type: boolean
Default: no

If unset, NeoMutt will remove your address (see the "alternates" command) from the list of recipients when replying to a message.

### 3.190. menu_context

Type: number
Default: 0

This variable controls the number of lines of context that are given when scrolling through menus. (Similar to $pager_context.)

### 3.191. menu_move_off

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When unset, the bottom entry of menus will never scroll up past the bottom of the screen, unless there are less entries than lines. When set, the bottom entry may move off the bottom.

### 3.192. menu_scroll

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, menus will be scrolled up or down one line when you attempt to move across a screen boundary. If unset, the screen is cleared and the next or previous page of the menu is displayed (useful for slow links to avoid many redraws).

### 3.193. message_cache_clean

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will clean out obsolete entries from the message cache when the mailbox is synchronized. You probably only want to set it every once in a while, since it can be a little slow (especially for large folders).

### 3.194. message_cache_dir

Type: path
Default: (empty)

Set this to a directory and NeoMutt will cache copies of messages from your IMAP and POP servers here. You are free to remove entries at any time.

When setting this variable to a directory, NeoMutt needs to fetch every remote message only once and can perform regular expression searches as fast as for local folders.

Also see the $message_cache_clean variable.

### 3.195. message_format

Type: string
Default: “`%s`”

This is the string displayed in the "attachment" menu for attachments of type `message/rfc822`. For a full listing of defined `printf(3)`-like sequences see the section on $index_format.

### 3.196. meta_key

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, forces NeoMutt to interpret keystrokes with the high bit (bit 8) set as if the user had pressed the Esc key and whatever key remains after having the high bit removed. For example, if the key pressed has an ASCII value of `0xf8`, then this is treated as if the user had pressed Esc then "x". This is because the result of removing the high bit from `0xf8` is `0x78`, which is the ASCII character "x".

### 3.197. mh_purge

Type: boolean
Default: no

When unset, NeoMutt will mimic mh's behavior and rename deleted messages to ,<old file name> in mh folders instead of really deleting them. This leaves the message on disk but makes programs reading the folder ignore it. If the variable is set, the message files will simply be deleted.

This option is similar to $maildir_trash for Maildir folders.

### 3.198. mh_seq_flagged

Type: string
Default: “`flagged`”

The name of the MH sequence used for flagged messages.

### 3.199. mh_seq_replied

Type: string
Default: “`replied`”

The name of the MH sequence used to tag replied messages.

### 3.200. mh_seq_unseen

Type: string
Default: “`unseen`”

The name of the MH sequence used for unseen messages.

### 3.201. mime_forward

Type: quadoption
Default: no

When set, the message you are forwarding will be attached as a separate `message/rfc822` MIME part instead of included in the main body of the message. This is useful for forwarding MIME messages so the receiver can properly view the message as it was delivered to you. If you like to switch between MIME and not MIME from mail to mail, set this variable to "ask-no" or "ask-yes".

Also see $forward_decode and $mime_forward_decode.

### 3.202. mime_forward_decode

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls the decoding of complex MIME messages into `text/plain` when forwarding a message while $mime_forward is set. Otherwise $forward_decode is used instead.

### 3.203. mime_forward_rest

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

When forwarding multiple attachments of a MIME message from the attachment menu, attachments which can't be decoded in a reasonable manner will be attached to the newly composed message if this option is set.

### 3.204. mime_type_query_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This specifies a command to run, to determine the mime type of a new attachment when composing a message. Unless $mime_type_query_first is set, this will only be run if the attachment's extension is not found in the mime.types file.

The string may contain a "%s", which will be substituted with the attachment filename. NeoMutt will add quotes around the string substituted for "%s" automatically according to shell quoting rules, so you should avoid adding your own. If no "%s" is found in the string, NeoMutt will append the attachment filename to the end of the string.

The command should output a single line containing the attachment's mime type.

Suggested values are "xdg-mime query filetype" or "file -bi".

### 3.205. mime_type_query_first

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the $mime_type_query_command will be run before the mime.types lookup.

### 3.206. move

Type: quadoption
Default: no

If this variable is set, then NeoMutt will move read messages from your spool mailbox to your $mbox mailbox or to the "mbox" specified by a mbox-hook command.

See also $keep_flagged.

### 3.207. narrow_tree

Type: boolean
Default: no

This variable, when set, makes the thread tree narrower, allowing deeper threads to fit on the screen.

### 3.208. net_inc

Type: number
Default: 10

Operations that expect to transfer a large amount of data over the network will update their progress every $net_inc kilobytes. If set to 0, no progress messages will be displayed.

See also $read_inc, $write_inc and $net_inc.

### 3.209. new_mail_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

If set, NeoMutt will call this command after a new message is received. See the $status_format documentation for the values that can be formatted into this command.

### 3.210. news_cache_dir

Type: path
Default: “`~/.neomutt`”

This variable pointing to directory where NeoMutt will save cached news articles and headers in. If unset, articles and headers will not be saved at all and will be reloaded from the server each time.

### 3.211. news_server

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This variable specifies domain name or address of NNTP server.

You can also specify username and an alternative port for each news server, e.g. `[[s]news://][username[:password]@]server[:port]`

This option can also be set using the command line option "-g", the environment variable `$NNTPSERVER`, or putting the server name in the file "/etc/nntpserver".

### 3.212. newsgroups_charset

Type: string
Default: “`utf-8`”

Character set of newsgroups descriptions.

### 3.213. newsrc

Type: path
Default: “`~/.newsrc`”

The file, containing info about subscribed newsgroups - names and indexes of read articles. The following printf-style sequence is understood:

Expando | Description | Example
%a | Account url | `news:news.gmane.org`
%p | Port | `119`
%P | Port if specified | `10119`
%s | News server name | `news.gmane.org`
%S | Url schema | `news`
%u | Username | `username`

### 3.214. nntp_authenticators

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This is a colon-delimited list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to a news server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either "user" or any SASL mechanism, e.g. "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If it's unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.

Example:

    set nntp_authenticators="digest-md5:user"

Note: NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the IMAP server.

### 3.215. nntp_context

Type: number (long)
Default: 1000

This variable defines number of articles which will be in index when newsgroup entered. If active newsgroup have more articles than this number, oldest articles will be ignored. Also controls how many articles headers will be saved in cache when you quit newsgroup.

### 3.216. nntp_listgroup

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable controls whether or not existence of each article is checked when newsgroup is entered.

### 3.217. nntp_load_description

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable controls whether or not descriptions for each newsgroup must be loaded when newsgroup is added to list (first time list loading or new newsgroup adding).

### 3.218. nntp_pass

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Your password for NNTP account.

### 3.219. nntp_poll

Type: number
Default: 60

The time in seconds until any operations on newsgroup except post new article will cause recheck for new news. If set to 0, NeoMutt will recheck newsgroup on each operation in index (stepping, read article, etc.).

### 3.220. nntp_user

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Your login name on the NNTP server. If unset and NNTP server requires authentication, NeoMutt will prompt you for your account name when you connect to news server.

### 3.221. pager

Type: command
Default: “`builtin`”

This variable specifies which pager you would like to use to view messages. The value "builtin" means to use the built-in pager, otherwise this variable should specify the pathname of the external pager you would like to use.

Using an external pager may have some disadvantages: Additional keystrokes are necessary because you can't call NeoMutt functions directly from the pager, and screen resizes cause lines longer than the screen width to be badly formatted in the help menu.

### 3.222. pager_context

Type: number
Default: 0

This variable controls the number of lines of context that are given when displaying the next or previous page in the internal pager. By default, NeoMutt will display the line after the last one on the screen at the top of the next page (0 lines of context).

This variable also specifies the amount of context given for search results. If positive, this many lines will be given before a match, if 0, the match will be top-aligned.

### 3.223. pager_format

Type: string
Default: “`-%Z- %C/%m: %-20.20n %s%* -- (%P)`”

This variable controls the format of the one-line message "status" displayed before each message in either the internal or an external pager. The valid sequences are listed in the $index_format section.

### 3.224. pager_index_lines

Type: number
Default: 0

Determines the number of lines of a mini-index which is shown when in the pager. The current message, unless near the top or bottom of the folder, will be roughly one third of the way down this mini-index, giving the reader the context of a few messages before and after the message. This is useful, for example, to determine how many messages remain to be read in the current thread. A value of 0 results in no index being shown.

### 3.225. pager_read_delay

Type: number
Default: 0

Determines the number of seconds that must elapse after first opening a new message in the pager before that message will be marked as read. A value of 0 results in the message being marked read unconditionally; for other values, navigating to another message or exiting the pager before the timeout will leave the message marked unread. This setting is ignored if $pager is not builtin.

### 3.226. pager_skip_quoted_context

Type: number
Default: 0

Determines the number of lines of context to show before the unquoted text when using the `<skip-quoted>` function. When set to a positive number at most that many lines of the previous quote are displayed. If the previous quote is shorter the whole quote is displayed.

The (now deprecated) skip_quoted_offset is an alias for this variable, and should no longer be used.

### 3.227. pager_stop

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the internal-pager will not move to the next message when you are at the end of a message and invoke the `<next-page>` function.

### 3.228. pattern_format

Type: string
Default: “`%2n %-15e %d`”

This variable describes the format of the "pattern completion" menu. The following `printf(3)`-style sequences are understood:

%d | pattern description
%e | pattern expression
%n | index number
%>X | right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | soft-fill with character "X" as pad

### 3.229. pgp_auto_decode

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will automatically attempt to decrypt traditional PGP messages whenever the user performs an operation which ordinarily would result in the contents of the message being operated on. For example, if the user displays a pgp-traditional message which has not been manually checked with the `<check-traditional-pgp>` function, NeoMutt will automatically check the message for traditional pgp.

### 3.230. pgp_auto_inline

Type: boolean
Default: no

This option controls whether NeoMutt generates old-style inline (traditional) PGP encrypted or signed messages under certain circumstances. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when inline is not required. The GPGME backend does not support this option.

Note that NeoMutt might automatically use PGP/MIME for messages which consist of more than a single MIME part. NeoMutt can be configured to ask before sending PGP/MIME messages when inline (traditional) would not work.

Also see the $pgp_mime_auto variable.

Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)

### 3.231. pgp_check_exit

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt will check the exit code of the PGP subprocess when signing or encrypting. A non-zero exit code means that the subprocess failed. (PGP only)

### 3.232. pgp_check_gpg_decrypt_status_fd

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt will check the status file descriptor output of $pgp_decrypt_command and $pgp_decode_command for GnuPG status codes indicating successful decryption. This will check for the presence of DECRYPTION_OKAY, absence of DECRYPTION_FAILED, and that all PLAINTEXT occurs between the BEGIN_DECRYPTION and END_DECRYPTION status codes.

If unset, NeoMutt will instead match the status fd output against $pgp_decryption_okay. (PGP only)

### 3.233. pgp_clear_sign_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This format is used to create an old-style "clearsigned" PGP message. Note that the use of this format is strongly deprecated.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. Note that in this case, %r expands to the search string, which is a list of one or more quoted values such as email address, name, or keyid. (PGP only)

### 3.234. pgp_decode_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This format strings specifies a command which is used to decode application/pgp attachments.

The PGP command formats have their own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences:

%a | The value of $pgp_sign_as if set, otherwise the value of $pgp_default_key.
%f | Expands to the name of a file containing a message.
%p | Expands to PGPPASSFD=0 when a pass phrase is needed, to an empty string otherwise. Note: This may be used with a %<...> construct.
%r | One or more key IDs (or fingerprints if available).
%s | Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part of a `multipart/signed` attachment when verifying it.

(PGP only)

### 3.235. pgp_decrypt_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to decrypt a PGP encrypted message.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

Note: When decrypting messages using `gpg`, a pinentry program needs to be invoked unless the password is cached within `gpg-agent`. Currently, the `pinentry-tty` program (usually distributed with `gpg`) isn't suitable for being invoked by NeoMutt. You are encouraged to use a different pinentry-program when running NeoMutt in order to avoid problems.

See also: https://github.com/neomutt/neomutt/issues/1014

### 3.236. pgp_decryption_okay

Type: regular expression
Default: (empty)

If you assign text to this variable, then an encrypted PGP message is only considered successfully decrypted if the output from $pgp_decrypt_command contains the text. This is used to protect against a spoofed encrypted message, with multipart/encrypted headers but containing a block that is not actually encrypted. (e.g. simply signed and ascii armored text).

Note that if $pgp_check_gpg_decrypt_status_fd is set, this variable is ignored. (PGP only)

### 3.237. pgp_default_key

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This is the default key-pair to use for PGP operations. It will be used for encryption (see $postpone_encrypt and $pgp_self_encrypt).

It will also be used for signing unless $pgp_sign_as is set.

The (now deprecated) pgp_self_encrypt_as is an alias for this variable, and should no longer be used. (PGP only)

### 3.238. pgp_encrypt_only_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to encrypt a body part without signing it.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. Note that in this case, %r expands to the search string, which is a list of one or more quoted values such as email address, name, or keyid. (PGP only)

### 3.239. pgp_encrypt_sign_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to both sign and encrypt a body part.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.240. pgp_entry_format

Type: string
Default: “`%4n %t%f %4l/0x%k %-4a %2c %u`”

This variable allows you to customize the PGP key selection menu to your personal taste. If $crypt_use_gpgme is set, then it applies to S/MIME key selection menu also. This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences:

%a | Algorithm
%c | Capabilities
%f | Flags
%i | Key fingerprint (or long key id if non-existent)
%k | Key id
%l | Key length
%n | Number
%p | Protocol
%t | Trust/validity of the key-uid association
%u | User id
%[<s>] | Date of the key where <s> is an `strftime(3)` expression
%>X | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with character "X"
%|X | Pad to the end of the line with character "X"
%*X | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad

See the section "Sending Cryptographically Signed/Encrypted Messages" of the user manual for the meaning of the letters some of these sequences expand to.

(Crypto only) or (PGP only when GPGME disabled)

### 3.241. pgp_export_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to export a public key from the user's key ring.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.242. pgp_get_keys_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is invoked whenever NeoMutt needs to fetch the public key associated with an email address. Of the sequences supported by $pgp_decode_command, %r is the only `printf(3)`-like sequence used with this format. Note that in this case, %r expands to the email address, not the public key ID (the key ID is unknown, which is why NeoMutt is invoking this command). (PGP only)

### 3.243. pgp_good_sign

Type: regular expression
Default: (empty)

If you assign a text to this variable, then a PGP signature is only considered verified if the output from $pgp_verify_command contains the text. Use this variable if the exit code from the command is 0 even for bad signatures. (PGP only)

### 3.244. pgp_ignore_subkeys

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to ignore OpenPGP subkeys. Instead, the principal key will inherit the subkeys' capabilities. Unset this if you want to play interesting key selection games. (PGP only)

### 3.245. pgp_import_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to import a key from a message into the user's public key ring.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.246. pgp_list_pubring_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to list the public key ring's contents. The output format must be analogous to the one used by

    gpg --list-keys --with-colons --with-fingerprint

Note: gpg's `fixed-list-mode` option should not be used. It produces a different date format which may result in NeoMutt showing incorrect key generation dates.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.247. pgp_list_secring_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to list the secret key ring's contents. The output format must be analogous to the one used by:

    gpg --list-keys --with-colons --with-fingerprint

Note: gpg's `fixed-list-mode` option should not be used. It produces a different date format which may result in NeoMutt showing incorrect key generation dates.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.248. pgp_long_ids

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, use 64 bit PGP key IDs, if unset use the normal 32 bit key IDs. NOTE: Internally, NeoMutt has transitioned to using fingerprints (or long key IDs as a fallback). This option now only controls the display of key IDs in the key selection menu and a few other places. (PGP only)

### 3.249. pgp_mime_auto

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

This option controls whether NeoMutt will prompt you for automatically sending a (signed/encrypted) message using PGP/MIME when inline (traditional) fails (for any reason).

Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)

### 3.250. pgp_reply_inline

Type: boolean
Default: no

Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to always attempt to create an inline (traditional) message when replying to a message which is PGP encrypted/signed inline. This can be overridden by use of the pgp menu, when inline is not required. This option does not automatically detect if the (replied-to) message is inline; instead it relies on NeoMutt internals for previously checked/flagged messages.

Note that NeoMutt might automatically use PGP/MIME for messages which consist of more than a single MIME part. NeoMutt can be configured to ask before sending PGP/MIME messages when inline (traditional) would not work.

Also see the $pgp_mime_auto variable.

Also note that using the old-style PGP message format is strongly deprecated. (PGP only)

### 3.251. pgp_retainable_sigs

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, signed and encrypted messages will consist of nested `multipart/signed` and `multipart/encrypted` body parts.

This is useful for applications like encrypted and signed mailing lists, where the outer layer (`multipart/encrypted`) can be easily removed, while the inner `multipart/signed` part is retained. (PGP only)

### 3.252. pgp_self_encrypt

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, PGP encrypted messages will also be encrypted using the key in $pgp_default_key. (PGP only)

### 3.253. pgp_show_unusable

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt will display non-usable keys on the PGP key selection menu. This includes keys which have been revoked, have expired, or have been marked as "disabled" by the user. (PGP only)

### 3.254. pgp_sign_as

Type: string
Default: (empty)

If you have a different key pair to use for signing, you should set this to the signing key. Most people will only need to set $pgp_default_key. It is recommended that you use the keyid form to specify your key (e.g. `0x00112233`). (PGP only)

### 3.255. pgp_sign_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to create the detached PGP signature for a `multipart/signed` PGP/MIME body part.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.256. pgp_sort_keys

Type: sort order
Default: address

Specifies how the entries in the pgp menu are sorted. The following are legal values:

address | sort alphabetically by user id
keyid | sort alphabetically by key id
date | sort by key creation date
trust | sort by the trust of the key

If you prefer reverse order of the above values, prefix it with "reverse-". (PGP only)

### 3.257. pgp_strict_enc

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt will automatically encode PGP/MIME signed messages as quoted-printable. Please note that unsetting this variable may lead to problems with non-verifyable PGP signatures, so only change this if you know what you are doing. (PGP only)

### 3.258. pgp_timeout

Type: number (long)
Default: 300

The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if not used. (PGP only)

### 3.259. pgp_use_gpg_agent

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt expects a `gpg-agent(1)` process will handle private key passphrase prompts. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt for the passphrase and pass it via stdin to the pgp command.

Note that as of version 2.1, GnuPG automatically spawns an agent and requires the agent be used for passphrase management. Since that version is increasingly prevalent, this variable now defaults set.

NeoMutt works with a GUI or curses pinentry program. A TTY pinentry should not be used.

If you are using an older version of GnuPG without an agent running, or another encryption program without an agent, you will need to unset this variable. (PGP only)

### 3.260. pgp_verify_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to verify PGP signatures.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.261. pgp_verify_key_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to verify key information from the key selection menu.

This is a format string, see the $pgp_decode_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (PGP only)

### 3.262. pipe_decode

Type: boolean
Default: no

Used in connection with the `<pipe-message>` function. When unset, NeoMutt will pipe the messages without any preprocessing. When set, NeoMutt will attempt to decode the messages first.

Also see $pipe_decode_weed, which controls whether headers will be weeded when this is set.

### 3.263. pipe_decode_weed

Type: boolean
Default: yes

For `<pipe-message>`, when $pipe_decode is set, this further controls whether NeoMutt will weed headers.

### 3.264. pipe_sep

Type: string
Default: “`\n`”

The separator to add between messages when piping a list of tagged messages to an external Unix command.

### 3.265. pipe_split

Type: boolean
Default: no

Used in connection with the `<pipe-message>` function following `<tag-prefix>`. If this variable is unset, when piping a list of tagged messages NeoMutt will concatenate the messages and will pipe them all concatenated. When set, NeoMutt will pipe the messages one by one. In both cases the messages are piped in the current sorted order, and the $pipe_sep separator is added after each message.

### 3.266. pop_auth_try_all

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, NeoMutt will try all available authentication methods. When unset, NeoMutt will only fall back to other authentication methods if the previous methods are unavailable. If a method is available but authentication fails, NeoMutt will not connect to the POP server.

### 3.267. pop_authenticators

Type: string list
Default: (empty)

This is a colon-separated list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an POP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are either "user", "apop" or any SASL mechanism, e.g. "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If this option is unset (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure.

Example:

    set pop_authenticators="digest-md5:apop:user"

### 3.268. pop_check_interval

Type: number
Default: 60

This variable configures how often (in seconds) NeoMutt should look for new mail in the currently selected mailbox if it is a POP mailbox.

### 3.269. pop_delete

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-no

If set, NeoMutt will delete successfully downloaded messages from the POP server when using the `<fetch-mail>` function. When unset, NeoMutt will download messages but also leave them on the POP server.

### 3.270. pop_host

Type: string
Default: (empty)

The name of your POP server for the `<fetch-mail>` function. You can also specify an alternative port, username and password, i.e.:

    [pop[s]://][username[:password]@]popserver[:port]

where "[...]" denotes an optional part.

### 3.271. pop_last

Type: boolean
Default: no

If this variable is set, NeoMutt will try to use the "`LAST`" POP command for retrieving only unread messages from the POP server when using the `<fetch-mail>` function.

### 3.272. pop_oauth_refresh_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

The command to run to generate an OAUTH refresh token for authorizing your connection to your POP server. This command will be run on every connection attempt that uses the OAUTHBEARER authentication mechanism. See "oauth" for details.

### 3.273. pop_pass

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Specifies the password for your POP account. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt you for your password when you open a POP mailbox.

Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.

### 3.274. pop_reconnect

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

Controls whether or not NeoMutt will try to reconnect to the POP server if the connection is lost.

### 3.275. pop_user

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Your login name on the POP server.

This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.

### 3.276. post_moderated

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

If set to yes, NeoMutt will post article to newsgroup that have not permissions to posting (e.g. moderated). Note: if news server does not support posting to that newsgroup or totally read-only, that posting will not have an effect.

### 3.277. postpone

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

Controls whether or not messages are saved in the $postponed mailbox when you elect not to send immediately. If set to ask-yes or ask-no, you will be prompted with "Save (postpone) draft message?" when quitting from the "compose" screen.

Also see the $recall variable.

### 3.278. postpone_encrypt

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, postponed messages that are marked for encryption will be self-encrypted. NeoMutt will first try to encrypt using the value specified in $pgp_default_key or $smime_default_key. If those are not set, it will try the deprecated $postpone_encrypt_as. (Crypto only)

### 3.279. postpone_encrypt_as

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This is a deprecated fall-back variable for $postpone_encrypt. Please use $pgp_default_key or $smime_default_key. (Crypto only)

### 3.280. postponed

Type: mailbox
Default: “`~/postponed`”

NeoMutt allows you to indefinitely "postpone sending a message" which you are editing. When you choose to postpone a message, NeoMutt saves it in the mailbox specified by this variable.

Also see the $postpone variable.

### 3.281. preconnect

Type: string
Default: (empty)

If set, a shell command to be executed if NeoMutt fails to establish a connection to the server. This is useful for setting up secure connections, e.g. with `ssh(1)`. If the command returns a nonzero status, NeoMutt gives up opening the server. Example:

    set preconnect="ssh -f -q -L 1234:mailhost.net:143 mailhost.net \
    sleep 20 < /dev/null > /dev/null"

Mailbox "foo" on "mailhost.net" can now be reached as "{localhost:1234}foo".

Note: For this example to work, you must be able to log in to the remote machine without having to enter a password.

### 3.282. preferred_languages

Type: string list
Default: (empty)

This variable specifies a list of comma-separated languages. RFC8255 : user preferred languages to be searched in parts and display. Example:

    set preferred_languages="en,fr,de"

### 3.283. print

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-no

Controls whether or not NeoMutt really prints messages. This is set to "ask-no" by default, because some people accidentally hit "p" often.

### 3.284. print_command

Type: command
Default: “`lpr`”

This specifies the command pipe that should be used to print messages.

### 3.285. print_decode

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Used in connection with the `<print-message>` function. If this option is set, the message is decoded before it is passed to the external command specified by $print_command. If this option is unset, no processing will be applied to the message when printing it. The latter setting may be useful if you are using some advanced printer filter which is able to properly format e-mail messages for printing.

Also see $print_decode_weed, which controls whether headers will be weeded when this is set.

### 3.286. print_decode_weed

Type: boolean
Default: yes

For `<print-message>`, when $print_decode is set, this further controls whether NeoMutt will weed headers.

### 3.287. print_split

Type: boolean
Default: no

Used in connection with the `<print-message>` function. If this option is set, the command specified by $print_command is executed once for each message which is to be printed. If this option is unset, the command specified by $print_command is executed only once, and all the messages are concatenated, with a form feed as the message separator.

Those who use the `enscript`(1) program's mail-printing mode will most likely want to set this option.

### 3.288. prompt_after

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If you use an external $pager, setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to prompt you for a command when the pager exits rather than returning to the index menu. If unset, NeoMutt will return to the index menu when the external pager exits.

### 3.289. query_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This specifies the command NeoMutt will use to make external address queries. The string may contain a "%s", which will be substituted with the query string the user types. NeoMutt will add quotes around the string substituted for "%s" automatically according to shell quoting rules, so you should avoid adding your own. If no "%s" is found in the string, NeoMutt will append the user's query to the end of the string. See "query" (https://neomutt.org/guide/advancedusage.html#query) for more information.

### 3.290. query_format

Type: string
Default: “`%3c %t %-25.25n %-25.25a | %e`”

This variable describes the format of the "query" menu. The following `printf(3)`-style sequences are understood:

%a |  | Destination address
%c |  | Current entry number
%e | * | Extra information
%n |  | Destination name
%t |  | "*" if current entry is tagged, a space otherwise
%Y |  | Comma-separated tags
%>X |  | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with "X"
%|X |  | Pad to the end of the line with "X"
%*X |  | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad

For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.

* = can be optionally printed if nonzero, see the $status_format documentation.

### 3.291. quit

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

This variable controls whether "quit" and "exit" actually quit from NeoMutt. If this option is set, they do quit, if it is unset, they have no effect, and if it is set to ask-yes or ask-no, you are prompted for confirmation when you try to quit.

In order to quit from NeoMutt if this variable is unset, you must send the signal SIGINT to NeoMutt. This can usually be achieved by pressing CTRL-C in the terminal.

### 3.292. quote_regex

Type: regular expression
Default: “`^([ \t]*[|>:}#])+`”

A regular expression used in the internal pager to determine quoted sections of text in the body of a message. Quoted text may be filtered out using the `<toggle-quoted>` command, or colored according to the "color quoted" family of directives.

Higher levels of quoting may be colored differently ("color quoted1", "color quoted2", etc.). The quoting level is determined by removing the last character from the matched text and recursively reapplying the regular expression until it fails to produce a match.

Match detection may be overridden by the $smileys regular expression.

### 3.293. read_inc

Type: number
Default: 10

If set to a value greater than 0, NeoMutt will display which message it is currently on when reading a mailbox or when performing search actions such as search and limit. The message is printed after this many messages have been read or searched (e.g., if set to 25, NeoMutt will print a message when it is at message 25, and then again when it gets to message 50). This variable is meant to indicate progress when reading or searching large mailboxes which may take some time. When set to 0, only a single message will appear before the reading the mailbox.

Also see the $write_inc, $net_inc and $time_inc variables and the "tuning" section of the manual for performance considerations.

### 3.294. read_only

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, all folders are opened in read-only mode.

### 3.295. real_name

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This variable specifies what "real" or "personal" name should be used when sending messages.

If not specified, then the user's "real name" will be read from `/etc/passwd`. This option will not be used, if "$from" is set.

### 3.296. recall

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

Controls whether or not NeoMutt recalls postponed messages when composing a new message.

Setting this variable to yes is not generally useful, and thus not recommended. Note that the `<recall-message>` function can be used to manually recall postponed messages.

Also see $postponed variable.

### 3.297. record

Type: mailbox
Default: “`~/sent`”

This specifies the file into which your outgoing messages should be appended. (This is meant as the primary method for saving a copy of your messages, but another way to do this is using the "my_hdr" command to create a "Bcc:" field with your email address in it.)

The value of $record is overridden by the $force_name and $save_name variables, and the "fcc-hook" command. Also see $copy and $write_bcc.

### 3.298. reflow_space_quotes

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This option controls how quotes from format=flowed messages are displayed in the pager and when replying (with $text_flowed unset). When set, this option adds spaces after each level of quote marks, turning ">>>foo" into "> > > foo".

Note: If $reflow_text is unset, this option has no effect. Also, this option does not affect replies when $text_flowed is set.

### 3.299. reflow_text

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will reformat paragraphs in text/plain parts marked format=flowed. If unset, NeoMutt will display paragraphs unaltered from how they appear in the message body. See RFC3676 for details on the format=flowed format.

Also see $reflow_wrap, and $wrap.

### 3.300. reflow_wrap

Type: number
Default: 78

This variable controls the maximum paragraph width when reformatting text/plain parts when $reflow_text is set. When the value is 0, paragraphs will be wrapped at the terminal's right margin. A positive value sets the paragraph width relative to the left margin. A negative value set the paragraph width relative to the right margin.

Be aware that the reformatted lines of a paragraph are still subject to $wrap. This means if $reflow_wrap is 40 and $wrap is 30, then the paragraph gets reformatted to 40 characters a line (due to $reflow_wrap) and afterwards each 40-character-line is split at 30 characters (due to $wrap), resulting in alternating line lengths of 30 and 10 characters.

Also see $wrap.

### 3.301. reply_regex

Type: regular expression
Default: “`^((re|aw|sv)(\[[0-9]+\])*:[ \t]*)*`”

A regular expression used to recognize reply messages when threading and replying. The default value corresponds to the English "Re:", the German "Aw:" and the Swedish "Sv:".

### 3.302. reply_self

Type: boolean
Default: no

If unset and you are replying to a message sent by you, NeoMutt will assume that you want to reply to the recipients of that message rather than to yourself.

Also see the "alternates" command.

### 3.303. reply_to

Type: quadoption
Default: ask-yes

If set, when replying to a message, NeoMutt will use the address listed in the Reply-to: header as the recipient of the reply. If unset, it will use the address in the From: header field instead. This option is useful for reading a mailing list that sets the Reply-To: header field to the list address and you want to send a private message to the author of a message.

### 3.304. reply_with_xorig

Type: boolean
Default: no

This variable provides a toggle. When active, the From: header will be extracted from the current mail's 'X-Original-To:' header. This setting does not have precedence over "reverse_real_name".

Assuming 'fast_reply' is disabled, this option will prompt the user with a prefilled From: header.

### 3.305. resolve

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, the cursor in a list will be automatically advanced to the next (possibly undeleted) message/attachment/entry whenever a command that modifies the current message/attachment/entry is executed.

Examples of such commands are tagging a message, deleting an entry, or saving an attachment.

### 3.306. resume_draft_files

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, draft files (specified by `-H` on the command line) are processed similarly to when resuming a postponed message. Recipients are not prompted for; send-hooks are not evaluated; no alias expansion takes place; user-defined headers and signatures are not added to the message.

### 3.307. resume_edited_draft_files

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, draft files previously edited (via `-E -H` on the command line) will have $resume_draft_files automatically set when they are used as a draft file again.

The first time a draft file is saved, NeoMutt will add a header, X-Mutt-Resume-Draft to the saved file. The next time the draft file is read in, if NeoMutt sees the header, it will set $resume_draft_files.

This option is designed to prevent multiple signatures, user-defined headers, and other processing effects from being made multiple times to the draft file.

### 3.308. reverse_alias

Type: boolean
Default: no

This variable controls whether or not NeoMutt will display the "personal" name from your aliases in the index menu if it finds an alias that matches the message's sender. For example, if you have the following alias:

    alias juser abd30425@somewhere.net (Joe User)

and then you receive mail which contains the following header:

    From: abd30425@somewhere.net

It would be displayed in the index menu as "Joe User" instead of "abd30425@somewhere.net." This is useful when the person's e-mail address is not human friendly.

### 3.309. reverse_name

Type: boolean
Default: no

It may sometimes arrive that you receive mail to a certain machine, move the messages to another machine, and reply to some the messages from there. If this variable is set, the default From: line of the reply messages is built using the address where you received the messages you are replying to if that address matches your "alternates". If the variable is unset, or the address that would be used doesn't match your "alternates", the From: line will use your address on the current machine.

Also see the "alternates" command and $reverse_real_name.

### 3.310. reverse_real_name

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable fine-tunes the behavior of the $reverse_name feature.

When it is unset, NeoMutt will remove the real name part of a matching address. This allows the use of the email address without having to also use what the sender put in the real name field.

When it is set, NeoMutt will use the matching address as-is.

In either case, a missing real name will be filled in afterwards using the value of $real_name.

### 3.311. rfc2047_parameters

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When this variable is set, NeoMutt will decode RFC2047-encoded MIME parameters. You want to set this variable when NeoMutt suggests you to save attachments to files named like:

    =?iso-8859-1?Q?file=5F=E4=5F991116=2Ezip?=
    =?utf-8?Q?z=C4=99ta.png?=

When this variable is set interactively, the change won't be active until you change folders.

Note that this use of RFC2047's encoding is explicitly prohibited by the standard, but nevertheless encountered in the wild and produced by, e.g., Outlook.

Also note that setting this parameter will not have the effect that NeoMutt generates this kind of encoding. Instead, NeoMutt will unconditionally use the encoding specified in RFC2231.

### 3.312. save_address

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will take the sender's full address when choosing a default folder for saving a mail. If $save_name or $force_name is set too, the selection of the Fcc folder will be changed as well.

### 3.313. save_empty

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When unset, mailboxes which contain no saved messages will be removed when closed (the exception is $spool_file which is never removed). If set, mailboxes are never removed.

Note: This only applies to mbox and MMDF folders, NeoMutt does not delete MH and Maildir directories.

### 3.314. save_history

Type: number
Default: 0

This variable controls the size of the history (per category) saved in the $history_file file.

Setting this to a value greater than $history is possible. However, there will never be more than $history entries to select from even if more are recorded in the history file.

### 3.315. save_name

Type: boolean
Default: no

This variable controls how copies of outgoing messages are saved. When set, a check is made to see if a mailbox specified by the recipient address exists (this is done by searching for a mailbox in the $folder directory with the username part of the recipient address). If the mailbox exists, the outgoing message will be saved to that mailbox, otherwise the message is saved to the $record mailbox.

Also see the $force_name variable.

### 3.316. save_unsubscribed

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, info about unsubscribed newsgroups will be saved into "newsrc" file and into cache.

### 3.317. score

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When this variable is unset, scoring is turned off. This can be useful to selectively disable scoring for certain folders when the $score_threshold_delete variable and related are used.

### 3.318. score_threshold_delete

Type: number
Default: -1

Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the value of this variable are automatically marked for deletion by NeoMutt. Since NeoMutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the default setting of this variable will never mark a message for deletion.

### 3.319. score_threshold_flag

Type: number
Default: 9999

Messages which have been assigned a score greater than or equal to this variable's value are automatically marked "flagged".

### 3.320. score_threshold_read

Type: number
Default: -1

Messages which have been assigned a score equal to or lower than the value of this variable are automatically marked as read by NeoMutt. Since NeoMutt scores are always greater than or equal to zero, the default setting of this variable will never mark a message read.

### 3.321. search_context

Type: number
Default: 0

For the pager, this variable specifies the number of lines shown before search results. By default, search results will be top-aligned.

### 3.322. send_charset

Type: string list
Default: “`us-ascii:iso-8859-1:utf-8`”

A colon-delimited list of character sets for outgoing messages. NeoMutt will use the first character set into which the text can be converted exactly. If your $charset is not "iso-8859-1" and recipients may not understand "UTF-8", it is advisable to include in the list an appropriate widely used standard character set (such as "iso-8859-2", "koi8-r" or "iso-2022-jp") either instead of or after "iso-8859-1".

In case the text can't be converted into one of these exactly, NeoMutt uses $charset as a fallback.

### 3.323. sendmail

Type: command
Default: “`/usr/sbin/sendmail -oem -oi`”

Specifies the program and arguments used to deliver mail sent by NeoMutt. NeoMutt expects that the specified program interprets additional arguments as recipient addresses. NeoMutt appends all recipients after adding a `--` delimiter (if not already present). Additional flags, such as for $use_8bit_mime, $use_envelope_from, $dsn_notify, or $dsn_return will be added before the delimiter.

See also: $write_bcc.

### 3.324. sendmail_wait

Type: number
Default: 0

Specifies the number of seconds to wait for the $sendmail process to finish before giving up and putting delivery in the background.

NeoMutt interprets the value of this variable as follows:

>0 | number of seconds to wait for sendmail to finish before continuing
0 | wait forever for sendmail to finish
<0 | always put sendmail in the background without waiting

Note that if you specify a value other than 0, the output of the child process will be put in a temporary file. If there is some error, you will be informed as to where to find the output.

### 3.325. shell

Type: command
Default: “`/bin/sh`”

Command to use when spawning a subshell. If not specified, then the user's login shell from `/etc/passwd` is used.

### 3.326. show_multipart_alternative

Type: string
Default: (empty)

When set to `info`, the multipart/alternative information is shown. When set to `inline`, all of the alternatives are displayed. When not set, the default behavior is to show only the chosen alternative.

### 3.327. show_new_news

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, news server will be asked for new newsgroups on entering the browser. Otherwise, it will be done only once for a news server. Also controls whether or not number of new articles of subscribed newsgroups will be then checked.

### 3.328. show_only_unread

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, only subscribed newsgroups that contain unread articles will be displayed in browser.

### 3.329. sidebar_component_depth

Type: number
Default: 0

By default the sidebar will show the mailbox's path, relative to the $folder variable. This specifies the number of parent directories to hide from display in the sidebar. For example: If a maildir is normally displayed in the sidebar as dir1/dir2/dir3/maildir, setting `sidebar_component_depth=2` will display it as dir3/maildir, having truncated the 2 highest directories.

See also: $sidebar_short_path

### 3.330. sidebar_delim_chars

Type: string
Default: “`/.`”

This contains the list of characters which you would like to treat as folder separators for displaying paths in the sidebar.

Local mail is often arranged in directories: 'dir1/dir2/mailbox'.

    set sidebar_delim_chars='/'

IMAP mailboxes are often named: 'folder1.folder2.mailbox'.

    set sidebar_delim_chars='.'

See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_indent_string.

### 3.331. sidebar_divider_char

Type: string
Default: “`|`”

The default is a Unicode vertical line.

This specifies the characters to be drawn between the sidebar (when visible) and the other NeoMutt panels. ASCII and Unicode line-drawing characters are supported.

The divider char can be set to an empty string for some extra space. If empty, setting the sidebar_background color may help distinguish the sidebar from other panels.

### 3.332. sidebar_folder_indent

Type: boolean
Default: no

Set this to indent mailboxes in the sidebar.

See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_indent_string, $sidebar_delim_chars.

### 3.333. sidebar_format

Type: string
Default: “`%D%* %n`”

This variable allows you to customize the sidebar display. This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences:

%a |  | Alert: 1 if user is notified of new mail
%B |  | Name of the mailbox
%d | * @ | Number of deleted messages in the mailbox
%D |  | Descriptive name of the mailbox
%F | * | Number of flagged messages in the mailbox
%L | * @ | Number of messages after limiting
%n |  | "N" if mailbox has new mail, " " (space) otherwise
%N | * | Number of unread messages in the mailbox (seen or unseen)
%o | * | Number of old messages in the mailbox (unread, seen)
%p |  | Poll: 1 if Mailbox is checked for new mail
%r | * | Number of read messages in the mailbox (read, seen)
%S | * | Size of mailbox (total number of messages)
%t | * @ | Number of tagged messages in the mailbox
%Z | * | Number of new messages in the mailbox (unread, unseen)
%! |  | "!" : one flagged message; "!!" : two flagged messages; "n!" : n flagged messages (for n > 2). Otherwise prints nothing.
%>X |  | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with "X"
%|X |  | Pad to the end of the line with "X"
%*X |  | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad

* = Can be optionally printed if nonzero

@ = Only applicable to the current folder

In order to use %S, %N, %F, and %!, $mail_check_stats must be set. When thus set, a suggested value for this option is "%B%<F? [%F]>%* %<N?%N/>%S".

### 3.334. sidebar_indent_string

Type: string
Default: “`` ”

This specifies the string that is used to indent mailboxes in the sidebar. It defaults to two spaces.

See also: $sidebar_short_path, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_delim_chars.

### 3.335. sidebar_new_mail_only

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the sidebar will only display mailboxes containing new, or flagged, mail.

See also: sidebar_pin, $sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only.

### 3.336. sidebar_next_new_wrap

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the `<sidebar-next-new>` command will not stop at the end of the list of mailboxes, but wrap around to the beginning. The `<sidebar-prev-new>` command is similarly affected, wrapping around to the end of the list.

### 3.337. sidebar_non_empty_mailbox_only

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the sidebar will only display mailboxes that contain one or more mails.

See also: $sidebar_new_mail_only, sidebar_pin.

### 3.338. sidebar_on_right

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the sidebar will appear on the right-hand side of the screen.

### 3.339. sidebar_short_path

Type: boolean
Default: no

By default the sidebar will show the mailbox's path, relative to the $folder variable. Setting `sidebar_shortpath=yes` will shorten the names relative to the previous name. Here's an example:

shortpath=no | shortpath=yes | shortpath=yes, folderindent=yes, indentstr=".."
`fruit` | `fruit` | `fruit`
`fruit.apple` | `apple` | `..apple`
`fruit.banana` | `banana` | `..banana`
`fruit.cherry` | `cherry` | `..cherry`

See also: $sidebar_delim_chars, $sidebar_folder_indent, $sidebar_indent_string, $sidebar_component_depth.

### 3.340. sidebar_sort_method

Type: sort order
Default: order

Specifies how to sort mailbox entries in the sidebar. By default, the entries are unsorted. Valid values:

- path (alphabetically)

- count (all message count)

- flagged (flagged message count)

- unread (unread message count)

- unsorted

You may optionally use the "reverse-" prefix to specify reverse sorting order (example: "`set sidebar_sort_method=reverse-path`").

The alpha and name values are synonyms for path. The new value is a synonym for unread.

### 3.341. sidebar_visible

Type: boolean
Default: no

This specifies whether or not to show sidebar. The sidebar shows a list of all your mailboxes.

See also: $sidebar_format, $sidebar_width

### 3.342. sidebar_width

Type: number
Default: 30

This controls the width of the sidebar. It is measured in screen columns. For example: sidebar_width=20 could display 20 ASCII characters, or 10 Chinese characters.

### 3.343. sig_dashes

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, a line containing "-- " (note the trailing space) will be inserted before your $signature. It is strongly recommended that you not unset this variable unless your signature contains just your name. The reason for this is because many software packages use "-- \n" to detect your signature. For example, NeoMutt has the ability to highlight the signature in a different color in the built-in pager.

### 3.344. sig_on_top

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, the signature will be included before any quoted or forwarded text. It is strongly recommended that you do not set this variable unless you really know what you are doing, and are prepared to take some heat from netiquette guardians.

### 3.345. signature

Type: path
Default: “`~/.signature`”

Specifies the filename of your signature, which is appended to all outgoing messages. If the filename ends with a pipe ("|"), it is assumed that filename is a shell command and input should be read from its standard output.

### 3.346. simple_search

Type: string
Default: “`~f %s | ~s %s`”

Specifies how NeoMutt should expand a simple search into a real search pattern. A simple search is one that does not contain any of the "~" pattern operators. See "patterns" for more information on search patterns.

simple_search applies to several functions, e.g. `<delete-pattern>`, `<limit>`, searching in the index, and all of the index colors.

For example, if you simply type "joe" at a search or limit prompt, NeoMutt will automatically expand it to the value specified by this variable by replacing "%s" with the supplied string. For the default value, "joe" would be expanded to: "~f joe | ~s joe".

### 3.347. size_show_bytes

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, message sizes will display bytes for values less than 1 kilobyte. See formatstrings-size.

### 3.348. size_show_fractions

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, message sizes will be displayed with a single decimal value for sizes from 0 to 10 kilobytes and 1 to 10 megabytes. See formatstrings-size.

### 3.349. size_show_mb

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set, message sizes will display megabytes for values greater than or equal to 1 megabyte. See formatstrings-size.

### 3.350. size_units_on_left

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, message sizes units will be displayed to the left of the number. See formatstrings-size.

### 3.351. sleep_time

Type: number
Default: 1

Specifies time, in seconds, to pause while displaying certain informational messages, while moving from folder to folder and after expunging messages from the current folder. The default is to pause one second, so a value of zero for this option suppresses the pause.

### 3.352. smart_wrap

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls the display of lines longer than the screen width in the internal pager. If set, long lines are wrapped at a word boundary. If unset, lines are simply wrapped at the screen edge. Also see the $markers variable.

### 3.353. smileys

Type: regular expression
Default: “`(>From )|(:[-^]?[][)(><}{|/DP])`”

The pager uses this variable to catch some common false positives of $quote_regex, most notably smileys and not consider a line quoted text if it also matches $smileys. This mostly happens at the beginning of a line.

### 3.354. smime_ask_cert_label

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This flag controls whether you want to be asked to enter a label for a certificate about to be added to the database or not. It is set by default. (S/MIME only)

### 3.355. smime_ca_location

Type: path
Default: (empty)

This variable contains the name of either a directory, or a file which contains trusted certificates for use with OpenSSL. (S/MIME only)

### 3.356. smime_certificates

Type: path
Default: (empty)

Since for S/MIME there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, NeoMutt has to handle storage and retrieval of keys by itself. This is very basic right now, and keys and certificates are stored in two different directories, both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index file which contains mailbox-address keyid pairs, and which can be manually edited. This option points to the location of the certificates. (S/MIME only)

### 3.357. smime_decrypt_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This format string specifies a command which is used to decrypt `application/pkcs7-mime` attachments.

The OpenSSL command formats have their own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences similar to PGP's:

%a | The algorithm used for encryption.
%c | One or more certificate IDs.
%C | CA location: Depending on whether $smime_ca_location points to a directory or file, this expands to "-CApath $smime_ca_location" or "-CAfile $smime_ca_location".
%d | The message digest algorithm specified with $smime_sign_digest_alg.
%f | Expands to the name of a file containing a message.
%i | Intermediate certificates
%k | The key-pair specified with $smime_default_key
%s | Expands to the name of a file containing the signature part of a `multipart/signed` attachment when verifying it.

For examples on how to configure these formats, see the `smime.rc` in the `samples/` subdirectory which has been installed on your system alongside the documentation. (S/MIME only)

### 3.358. smime_decrypt_use_default_key

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set (default) this tells NeoMutt to use the default key for decryption. Otherwise, if managing multiple certificate-key-pairs, NeoMutt will try to use the mailbox-address to determine the key to use. It will ask you to supply a key, if it can't find one. (S/MIME only)

### 3.359. smime_default_key

Type: string
Default: (empty)

This is the default key-pair to use for S/MIME operations, and must be set to the keyid (the hash-value that OpenSSL generates) to work properly.

It will be used for encryption (see $postpone_encrypt and $smime_self_encrypt).

It will be used for decryption unless $smime_decrypt_use_default_key is unset.

It will also be used for signing unless $smime_sign_as is set.

The (now deprecated) smime_self_encrypt_as is an alias for this variable, and should no longer be used. (S/MIME only)

### 3.360. smime_encrypt_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to create encrypted S/MIME messages.

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

Encrypt the message to $smime_default_key too. (S/MIME only)

### 3.361. smime_encrypt_with

Type: string
Default: “`aes256`”

This sets the algorithm that should be used for encryption. Valid choices are "aes128", "aes192", "aes256", "des", "des3", "rc2-40", "rc2-64", "rc2-128". (S/MIME only)

### 3.362. smime_get_cert_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to extract X509 certificates from a PKCS7 structure.

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

### 3.363. smime_get_cert_email_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to extract the mail address(es) used for storing X509 certificates, and for verification purposes (to check whether the certificate was issued for the sender's mailbox).

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

### 3.364. smime_get_signer_cert_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to extract only the signers X509 certificate from a S/MIME signature, so that the certificate's owner may get compared to the email's "From:" field.

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

### 3.365. smime_import_cert_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to import a certificate via smime_keys.

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. NOTE: %c and %k will default to $smime_sign_as if set, otherwise $smime_default_key. (S/MIME only)

### 3.366. smime_is_default

Type: boolean
Default: no

The default behavior of NeoMutt is to use PGP on all auto-sign/encryption operations. To override and to use OpenSSL instead this must be set. However, this has no effect while replying, since NeoMutt will automatically select the same application that was used to sign/encrypt the original message. (Note that this variable can be overridden by unsetting $crypt_auto_smime.) (S/MIME only)

### 3.367. smime_keys

Type: path
Default: (empty)

Since for S/MIME there is no pubring/secring as with PGP, NeoMutt has to handle storage and retrieval of keys/certs by itself. This is very basic right now, and stores keys and certificates in two different directories, both named as the hash-value retrieved from OpenSSL. There is an index file which contains mailbox-address keyid pair, and which can be manually edited. This option points to the location of the private keys. (S/MIME only)

### 3.368. smime_pk7out_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to extract PKCS7 structures of S/MIME signatures, in order to extract the public X509 certificate(s).

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

### 3.369. smime_self_encrypt

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, S/MIME encrypted messages will also be encrypted using the certificate in $smime_default_key. (S/MIME only)

### 3.370. smime_sign_as

Type: string
Default: (empty)

If you have a separate key to use for signing, you should set this to the signing key. Most people will only need to set $smime_default_key. (S/MIME only)

### 3.371. smime_sign_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to created S/MIME signatures of type `multipart/signed`, which can be read by all mail clients.

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

### 3.372. smime_sign_digest_alg

Type: string
Default: “`sha256`”

This sets the algorithm that should be used for the signature message digest. Valid choices are "md5", "sha1", "sha224", "sha256", "sha384", "sha512". (S/MIME only)

### 3.373. smime_timeout

Type: number
Default: 300

The number of seconds after which a cached passphrase will expire if not used. (S/MIME only)

### 3.374. smime_verify_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type `multipart/signed`.

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

### 3.375. smime_verify_opaque_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

This command is used to verify S/MIME signatures of type `application/pkcs7-mime`.

This is a format string, see the $smime_decrypt_command command for possible `printf(3)`-like sequences. (S/MIME only)

### 3.376. smtp_authenticators

Type: string list
Default: (empty)

This is a colon-separated list of authentication methods NeoMutt may attempt to use to log in to an SMTP server, in the order NeoMutt should try them. Authentication methods are any SASL mechanism, e.g. "plain", "digest-md5", "gssapi" or "cram-md5". This option is case-insensitive. If it is "unset" (the default) NeoMutt will try all available methods, in order from most-secure to least-secure. Support for the "plain" mechanism is bundled; other mechanisms are provided by an external SASL library (look for '+sasl' in the output of neomutt -v).

Example:

    set smtp_authenticators="digest-md5:cram-md5"

### 3.377. smtp_oauth_refresh_command

Type: command
Default: (empty)

The command to run to generate an OAUTH refresh token for authorizing your connection to your SMTP server. This command will be run on every connection attempt that uses the OAUTHBEARER or XOAUTH2 authentication mechanisms. See "oauth" for details.

### 3.378. smtp_pass

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Specifies the password for your SMTP account. If unset, NeoMutt will prompt you for your password when you first send mail via SMTP. See $smtp_url to configure NeoMutt to send mail via SMTP.

Warning: you should only use this option when you are on a fairly secure machine, because the superuser can read your neomuttrc even if you are the only one who can read the file.

### 3.379. smtp_url

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Defines the SMTP smarthost where sent messages should relayed for delivery. This should take the form of an SMTP URL, e.g.:

    smtp[s]://[user[:pass]@]host[:port]

where "[...]" denotes an optional part. Setting this variable overrides the value of the $sendmail variable.

Also see $write_bcc.

### 3.380. smtp_user

Type: string
Default: (empty)

The username for the SMTP server.

This variable defaults to your user name on the local machine.

### 3.381. socket_timeout

Type: number
Default: 30

Causes NeoMutt to timeout any socket connect/read/write operation (for IMAP, POP or SMTP) after this many seconds. A negative value causes NeoMutt to wait indefinitely.

### 3.382. sort

Type: sort order
Default: date

Specifies how to sort messages in the "index" menu. Valid values are:

- date

- date-received

- from

- score

- size

- spam

- subject

- threads

- to

- unsorted

You may optionally use the "reverse-" prefix to specify reverse sorting order, or the "last-" prefix to sort threads based on the corresponding attribute of the last descendant rather than the thread root. If both prefixes are in use, "reverse-" must come before "last-". The "last-" prefix has no effect on a flat view.

Any ties in the primary sort are broken by $sort_aux. When $use_threads is "threads" or "reverse", $sort controls the sorting between threads, and $sort_aux controls the sorting within a thread.

The "date-sent" value is a synonym for "date". The "mailbox-order" value is a synonym for "unsorted".

The values of "threads" and "reverse-threads" are legacy options, which cause the value of `$sort_aux` to also control sorting between threads, and they may not be used with the "last-" prefix. The preferred way to enable a threaded view is via `$use_threads`. This variable can also be set via the `<sort-mailbox>` and `<sort-reverse>` functions.

Note: When $use_threads is "threads", the last thread sorts to the bottom; when it is "reversed", the last thread sorts to the top. The use of "reverse-" in $sort swaps which end the last thread will sort to.

See the "Use Threads Feature" section for further explanation and examples, https://neomutt.org/feature/use-threads

### 3.383. sort_alias

Type: sort order
Default: alias

Specifies how the entries in the "alias" menu are sorted. The following are legal values:

- address (sort alphabetically by email address)

- alias (sort alphabetically by alias name)

- unsorted (leave in order specified in .neomuttrc)

Note: This also affects the entries of the address query menu, thus potentially overruling the order of entries as generated by $query_command.

### 3.384. sort_aux

Type: sort order
Default: date

This provides a secondary sort for messages in the "index" menu, used when the $sort value is equal for two messages.

When sorting by threads, this variable controls how subthreads are sorted within a single thread (for the order between threads, see $sort). This can be set to any value that $sort can, including with the use of "reverse-" and "last-" prefixes, except for variations using "threads" (in that case, NeoMutt will just use "date"). For instance,

    set sort_aux=last-date-received

would mean that if a new message is received in a thread, that subthread becomes the last one displayed (or the first, if you have "`set use_threads=reverse`".) When using $use_threads, it is more common to use "last-" with $sort and not with $sort_aux.

See the "Use Threads Feature" section for further explanation and examples, https://neomutt.org/feature/use-threads

### 3.385. sort_browser

Type: sort order
Default: alpha

Specifies how to sort entries in the file browser. By default, the entries are sorted alphabetically. Valid values:

- alpha (alphabetically)

- count (all message count)

- date

- desc (description)

- new (new message count)

- size

- unsorted

You may optionally use the "reverse-" prefix to specify reverse sorting order (example: "`set sort_browser=reverse-date`").

The "unread" value is a synonym for "new".

### 3.386. sort_re

Type: boolean
Default: yes

This variable is only useful when sorting by threads with $strict_threads unset. In that case, it changes the heuristic neomutt uses to thread messages by subject. With $sort_re set, neomutt will only attach a message as the child of another message by subject if the subject of the child message starts with a substring matching the setting of $reply_regex. With $sort_re unset, neomutt will attach the message whether or not this is the case, as long as the non-$reply_regex parts of both messages are identical.

### 3.387. spam_separator

Type: string
Default: “`,`”

This variable controls what happens when multiple spam headers are matched: if unset, each successive header will overwrite any previous matches value for the spam label. If set, each successive match will append to the previous, using this variable's value as a separator.

### 3.388. spool_file

Type: mailbox
Default: (empty)

If your spool mailbox is in a non-default place where NeoMutt can't find it, you can specify its location with this variable. The description from "named-mailboxes" or "virtual-mailboxes" may be used for the spool_file.

If not specified, then the environment variables `$MAIL` and `$MAILDIR` will be checked.

### 3.389. ssl_ciphers

Type: string
Default: (empty)

Contains a colon-separated list of ciphers to use when using SSL. For OpenSSL, see ciphers(1) for the syntax of the string.

For GnuTLS, this option will be used in place of "NORMAL" at the start of the priority string. See gnutls_priority_init(3) for the syntax and more details. (Note: GnuTLS version 2.1.7 or higher is required.)

### 3.390. ssl_client_cert

Type: path
Default: (empty)

The file containing a client certificate and its associated private key.

### 3.391. ssl_force_tls

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If this variable is set, NeoMutt will require that all connections to remote servers be encrypted. Furthermore it will attempt to negotiate TLS even if the server does not advertise the capability, since it would otherwise have to abort the connection anyway. This option supersedes $ssl_starttls.

### 3.392. ssl_starttls

Type: quadoption
Default: yes

If set (the default), NeoMutt will attempt to use `STARTTLS` on servers advertising the capability. When unset, NeoMutt will not attempt to use `STARTTLS` regardless of the server's capabilities.

Note that `STARTTLS` is subject to many kinds of attacks, including the ability of a machine-in-the-middle to suppress the advertising of support. Setting $ssl_force_tls is recommended if you rely on `STARTTLS`.

### 3.393. ssl_use_sslv2

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set , NeoMutt will use SSLv2 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2011, SSLv2 is considered insecure, and using is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc6176 (OpenSSL only)

### 3.394. ssl_use_sslv3

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set , NeoMutt will use SSLv3 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2015, SSLv3 is considered insecure, and using it is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7525

### 3.395. ssl_use_system_certs

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set to yes, NeoMutt will use CA certificates in the system-wide certificate store when checking if a server certificate is signed by a trusted CA. (OpenSSL only)

### 3.396. ssl_use_tlsv1

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.0 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2015, TLSv1.0 is considered insecure, and using it is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7525

### 3.397. ssl_use_tlsv1_1

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.1 when communicating with servers that request it. N.B. As of 2015, TLSv1.1 is considered insecure, and using it is inadvisable. See https://tools.ietf.org/html/rfc7525

### 3.398. ssl_use_tlsv1_2

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.2 when communicating with servers that request it.

### 3.399. ssl_use_tlsv1_3

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set , NeoMutt will use TLSv1.3 when communicating with servers that request it.

### 3.400. ssl_verify_dates

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set (the default), NeoMutt will not automatically accept a server certificate that is either not yet valid or already expired. You should only unset this for particular known hosts, using the `<account-hook>` function.

### 3.401. ssl_verify_host

Type: boolean
Default: yes

If set (the default), NeoMutt will not automatically accept a server certificate whose host name does not match the host used in your folder URL. You should only unset this for particular known hosts, using the `<account-hook>` function.

### 3.402. ssl_verify_partial_chains

Type: boolean
Default: no

This option should not be changed from the default unless you understand what you are doing.

Setting this variable to yes will permit verifying partial certification chains, i. e. a certificate chain where not the root, but an intermediate certificate CA, or the host certificate, are marked trusted (in $certificate_file), without marking the root signing CA as trusted.

(OpenSSL 1.0.2b and newer only).

### 3.403. status_chars

Type: character string
Default: “`-*%A`”

Controls the characters used by the "%r" indicator in $status_format.

Character | Default | Description
1 | - | Mailbox is unchanged
2 | * | Mailbox has been changed and needs to be resynchronized
3 | % | Mailbox is read-only, or will not be written when exiting. (You can toggle whether to write changes to a mailbox with the `<toggle-write>` operation, bound by default to "%")
4 | A | Folder opened in attach-message mode. (Certain operations like composing a new mail, replying, forwarding, etc. are not permitted in this mode)

### 3.404. status_format

Type: string
Default: “`-%r-NeoMutt: %D [Msgs:%<M?%M/>%m%<n? New:%n>%<o? Old:%o>%<d? Del:%d>%<F? Flag:%F>%<t? Tag:%t>%<p? Post:%p>%<b? Inc:%b>%<l? %l>]---(%<T?%T/>%s/%S)-%>-(%P)---`”

Controls the format of the status line displayed in the "index" menu. This string is similar to $index_format, but has its own set of `printf(3)`-like sequences:

%b | * | Number of mailboxes with new mail
%d | * | Number of deleted messages
%D |  | Description of the mailbox
%f |  | The full pathname of the current mailbox
%F | * | Number of flagged messages
%h |  | Local hostname
%l | * | Size (in bytes) of the current mailbox (see formatstrings-size)
%L | * | Size (in bytes) of the messages shown (i.e., which match the current limit) (see formatstrings-size)
%m | * | The number of messages in the mailbox
%M | * | The number of messages shown (i.e., which match the current limit)
%n | * | Number of new messages in the mailbox (unread, unseen)
%o | * | Number of old messages in the mailbox (unread, seen)
%p | * | Number of postponed messages
%P |  | Percentage of the way through the index
%r |  | Modified/read-only/won't-write/attach-message indicator, According to $status_chars
%R | * | Number of read messages in the mailbox (read, seen)
%s |  | Current sorting mode ($sort)
%S |  | Current aux sorting method ($sort_aux)
%t | * | Number of tagged messages in the mailbox
%T | * | Current threading mode ($use_threads)
%u | * | Number of unread messages in the mailbox (seen or unseen)
%v |  | NeoMutt version string
%V | * | Currently active limit pattern, if any
%>X |  | Right justify the rest of the string and pad with "X"
%|X |  | Pad to the end of the line with "X"
%*X |  | Soft-fill with character "X" as pad

For an explanation of "soft-fill", see the $index_format documentation.

* = can be optionally printed if nonzero

Some of the above sequences can be used to optionally print a string if their value is nonzero. For example, you may only want to see the number of flagged messages if such messages exist, since zero is not particularly meaningful. To optionally print a string based upon one of the above sequences, the following construct is used:

`%<sequence_char?optional_string>`

where sequence_char is a character from the table above, and optional_string is the string you would like printed if sequence_char is nonzero. optional_string may contain other sequences as well as normal text.

Here is an example illustrating how to optionally print the number of new messages in a mailbox:

`%<n?%n new messages>`

You can also switch between two strings using the following construct:

`%<sequence_char?if_string&else_string>`

If the value of sequence_char is non-zero, if_string will be expanded, otherwise else_string will be expanded.

As another example, here is how to show either $sort and $sort_aux or $use_threads and $sort, based on whether threads are enabled with $use_threads:

`%<T?%s/%S&%T/%s>`

You can force the result of any `printf(3)`-like sequence to be lowercase by prefixing the sequence character with an underscore ("_") sign. For example, if you want to display the local hostname in lowercase, you would use: "`%_h`".

If you prefix the sequence character with a colon (":") character, NeoMutt will replace any dots in the expansion by underscores. This might be helpful with IMAP folders that don't like dots in folder names.

### 3.405. status_on_top

Type: boolean
Default: no

Setting this variable causes the "status bar" to be displayed on the first line of the screen rather than near the bottom. If $help is set too, it'll be placed at the bottom.

### 3.406. strict_threads

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, threading will only make use of the "In-Reply-To" and "References:" fields when you $sort by message threads. By default, messages with the same subject are grouped together in "pseudo threads.". This may not always be desirable, such as in a personal mailbox where you might have several unrelated messages with the subjects like "hi" which will get grouped together. See also $sort_re for a less drastic way of controlling this behavior.

### 3.407. suspend

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When unset, NeoMutt won't stop when the user presses the terminal's susp key, usually "^Z". This is useful if you run NeoMutt inside an xterm using a command like "`xterm -e neomutt`".

On startup NeoMutt tries to detect if it is the process session leader. If so, the default of suspend is "no" otherwise "yes". This default covers the above mentioned use case of "`xterm -e neomutt`".

### 3.408. text_flowed

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will generate "format=flowed" bodies with a content type of "`text/plain; format=flowed`". This format is easier to handle for some mailing software, and generally just looks like ordinary text. To actually make use of this format's features, you'll need support in your editor.

The option only controls newly composed messages. Postponed messages, resent messages, and draft messages (via -H on the command line) will use the content-type of the source message.

Note that $indent_string is ignored when this option is set.

### 3.409. thorough_search

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Affects the `~b`, `~B`, and `~h` search operations described in section "patterns". If set, the headers and body/attachments of messages to be searched are decoded before searching. If unset, messages are searched as they appear in the folder.

Users searching attachments or for non-ASCII characters should set this value because decoding also includes MIME parsing/decoding and possible character set conversions. Otherwise NeoMutt will attempt to match against the raw message received (for example quoted-printable encoded or with encoded headers) which may lead to incorrect search results.

### 3.410. thread_received

Type: boolean
Default: no

If $strict_threads is unset, then messages may also be grouped by subject. Unlike threading by "In-Reply-To:" and "References:" header, grouping by subject does not imply a parent-child relation between two messages.

To determine the ancestry between messages grouped by subject, Neomutt uses their date: only newer messages can be descendants of older ones.

When $thread_received is set, NeoMutt uses the date received rather than the date sent when comparing messages for the date.

See also $strict_threads, and $sort_re.

### 3.411. tilde

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, the internal-pager will pad blank lines to the bottom of the screen with a tilde ("~").

### 3.412. time_inc

Type: number
Default: 0

Along with $read_inc, $write_inc, and $net_inc, this variable controls the frequency with which progress updates are displayed. It suppresses updates less than $time_inc milliseconds apart. This can improve throughput on systems with slow terminals, or when running NeoMutt on a remote system.

Also see the "tuning" section of the manual for performance considerations.

### 3.413. timeout

Type: number
Default: 600

When NeoMutt is waiting for user input either idling in menus or in an interactive prompt, NeoMutt would block until input is present. Depending on the context, this would prevent certain operations from working, like checking for new mail or keeping an IMAP connection alive.

This variable controls how many seconds NeoMutt will at most wait until it aborts waiting for input, performs these operations and continues to wait for input.

A value of zero or less will cause NeoMutt to never time out.

### 3.414. tmp_dir

Type: path
Default: “`/tmp`”

This variable allows you to specify where NeoMutt will place its temporary files needed for displaying and composing messages.

If this variable is not set, the environment variable `$TMPDIR` is used. Failing that, then "`/tmp`" is used.

### 3.415. to_chars

Type: character string
Default: “`+TCFLR`”

Controls the character used to indicate mail addressed to you.

Character | Default | Description
1 | <space> | The mail is not addressed to your address.
2 | + | You are the only recipient of the message.
3 | T | Your address appears in the "To:" header field, but you are not the only recipient of the message.
4 | C | Your address is specified in the "Cc:" header field, but you are not the only recipient.
5 | F | Indicates the mail that was sent by you.
6 | L | Indicates the mail was sent to a mailing-list you subscribe to.
7 | R | Your address appears in the "Reply-To:" header field but none of the above applies.

### 3.416. toggle_quoted_show_levels

Type: number
Default: 0

Quoted text may be filtered out using the `<toggle-quoted>` command. If set to a number greater than 0, then the `<toggle-quoted>` command will only filter out quote levels above this number.

### 3.417. trash

Type: mailbox
Default: (empty)

If set, this variable specifies the path of the trash folder where the mails marked for deletion will be moved, instead of being irremediably purged.

NOTE: When you delete a message in the trash folder, it is really deleted, so that you have a way to clean the trash.

### 3.418. ts_enabled

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls whether NeoMutt tries to set the terminal status line and icon name. Most terminal emulators emulate the status line in the window title.

### 3.419. ts_icon_format

Type: string
Default: “`M%<n?AIL&ail>`”

Controls the format of the icon title, as long as "$ts_enabled" is set. This string is identical in formatting to the one used by "$status_format".

### 3.420. ts_status_format

Type: string
Default: “`NeoMutt with %<m?%m messages&no messages>%<n? [%n NEW]>`”

Controls the format of the terminal status line (or window title), provided that "$ts_enabled" has been set. This string is identical in formatting to the one used by "$status_format".

### 3.421. tunnel

Type: command
Default: (empty)

Setting this variable will cause NeoMutt to open a pipe to a command instead of a raw socket. You may be able to use this to set up preauthenticated connections to your IMAP/POP3/SMTP server. Example:

    set tunnel="ssh -q mailhost.net /usr/local/libexec/imapd"

Note: For this example to work you must be able to log in to the remote machine without having to enter a password.

When set, NeoMutt uses the tunnel for all remote connections. Please see "account-hook" in the manual for how to use different tunnel commands per connection.

### 3.422. tunnel_is_secure

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will assume the $tunnel connection does not need STARTTLS to be enabled. It will also allow IMAP PREAUTH server responses inside a tunnel to proceed. This is appropriate if $tunnel uses ssh or directly invokes the server locally.

When unset, NeoMutt will negotiate STARTTLS according to the ssl_starttls and ssl_force_tls variables. If ssl_force_tls is set, NeoMutt will abort connecting if an IMAP server responds with PREAUTH. This setting is appropriate if $tunnel does not provide security and could be tampered with by attackers.

### 3.423. uncollapse_jump

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will jump to the next unread message, if any, when the current thread is uncollapsed.

### 3.424. uncollapse_new

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will automatically uncollapse any collapsed thread that receives a new message. When unset, collapsed threads will remain collapsed. the presence of the new message will still affect index sorting, though.

### 3.425. use_8bit_mime

Type: boolean
Default: no

Warning: do not set this variable unless you are using a version of sendmail which supports the `-B8BITMIME` flag (such as sendmail 8.8.x) or you may not be able to send mail.

When set, NeoMutt will invoke $sendmail with the `-B8BITMIME` flag when sending 8-bit messages to enable ESMTP negotiation.

### 3.426. use_domain

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will qualify all local addresses (ones without the "@host" portion) with the value of $hostname. If unset, no addresses will be qualified.

### 3.427. use_envelope_from

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will set the envelope sender of the message. If $envelope_from_address is set, it will be used as the sender address. If unset, NeoMutt will attempt to derive the sender from the "From:" header.

Note that this information is passed to sendmail command using the `-f` command line switch. Therefore setting this option is not useful if the $sendmail variable already contains `-f` or if the executable pointed to by $sendmail doesn't support the `-f` switch.

### 3.428. use_from

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will generate the "From:" header field when sending messages. If unset, no "From:" header field will be generated unless the user explicitly sets one using the "my_hdr" command.

### 3.429. use_ipv6

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will look for IPv6 addresses of hosts it tries to contact. If this option is unset, NeoMutt will restrict itself to IPv4 addresses. Normally, the default should work.

### 3.430. use_threads

Type: enumeration
Default: unset

The style of threading used in the index. May be one of "flat" (no threading), "threads" (threaded, with subthreads below root message) or "reverse" (threaded, with subthreads above root message). For convenience, the value "yes" is a synonym for "threads", and "no" is a synonym for "flat".

If this variable is never set, then `$sort` controls whether threading is used, `$sort_aux` controls both the sorting of threads and subthreads, and using `<sort-mailbox>` to select threads affects only `$sort`. Once this variable is set, attempting to set `$sort` to a value using "threads" will warn, the value of `$sort` controls the sorting between threads while `$sort_aux` controls sorting within a thread, and `<sort-mailbox>` toggles `$use_threads`.

Example:

    set use_threads=yes

See the "Use Threads Feature" section for further explanation and examples.

### 3.431. user_agent

Type: boolean
Default: no

When set, NeoMutt will add a "User-Agent:" header to outgoing messages, indicating which version of NeoMutt was used for composing them.

### 3.432. wait_key

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls whether NeoMutt will ask you to press a key after an external command has been invoked by these functions: `<shell-escape>`, `<pipe-message>`, `<pipe-entry>`, `<print-message>`, and `<print-entry>` commands.

It is also used when viewing attachments with "auto_view", provided that the corresponding mailcap entry has a needsterminal flag, and the external program is interactive.

When set, NeoMutt will always ask for a key. When unset, NeoMutt will wait for a key only if the external command returned a non-zero status.

### 3.433. weed

Type: boolean
Default: yes

When set, NeoMutt will weed headers when displaying, forwarding, or replying to messages.

Also see $copy_decode_weed, $pipe_decode_weed, $print_decode_weed.

### 3.434. wrap

Type: number
Default: 0

When set to a positive value, NeoMutt will wrap text at $wrap characters. When set to a negative value, NeoMutt will wrap text so that there are $wrap characters of empty space on the right side of the terminal. Setting it to zero makes NeoMutt wrap at the terminal width.

Also see $reflow_wrap.

### 3.435. wrap_headers

Type: number
Default: 78

This option specifies the number of characters to use for wrapping an outgoing message's headers. Allowed values are between 78 and 998 inclusive.

Note: This option usually shouldn't be changed. RFC5233 recommends a line length of 78 (the default), so please only change this setting when you know what you're doing.

### 3.436. wrap_search

Type: boolean
Default: yes

Controls whether searches wrap around the end.

When set, searches will wrap around the first (or last) item. When unset, incremental searches will not wrap.

### 3.437. write_bcc

Type: boolean
Default: no

Controls whether NeoMutt writes out the "Bcc:" header when preparing messages to be sent. Some MTAs, such as Exim and Courier, do not strip the "Bcc:" header; so it is advisable to leave this unset unless you have a particular need for the header to be in the sent message.

If NeoMutt is set to deliver directly via SMTP(see $smtp_url), this option does nothing: NeoMutt will never write out the "Bcc:" header in this case.

Note this option only affects the sending of messages. Fcc'ed copies of a message will always contain the "Bcc:" header if one exists.

### 3.438. write_inc

Type: number
Default: 10

When writing a mailbox, a message will be printed every $write_inc messages to indicate progress. If set to 0, only a single message will be displayed before writing a mailbox.

Also see the $read_inc, $net_inc and $time_inc variables and the "tuning" section of the manual for performance considerations.

### 3.439. x_comment_to

Type: boolean
Default: no

If set, NeoMutt will add "X-Comment-To:" field (that contains full name of original article author) to article that followuped to newsgroup.

## 4. Functions

The following is the list of available functions listed by the mapping in which they are available. The default key setting is given, and an explanation of what the function does. The key bindings of these functions can be changed with the bind command.

### 4.1. Generic Menu

The generic menu is not a real menu, but specifies common functions (such as movement) available in all menus except for pager and editor. Changing settings for this menu will affect the default bindings for all menus (except as noted).

Table 9.2. Default Generic Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<bottom-page>` | L | move to the bottom of the page
`<check-stats>` |  | calculate message statistics for all mailboxes
`<current-bottom>` |  | move entry to bottom of screen
`<current-middle>` |  | move entry to middle of screen
`<current-top>` |  | move entry to top of screen
`<end-cond>` |  | end of conditional execution (noop)
`<enter-command>` | : | enter a neomuttrc command
`<error-history>` |  | show log (and debug) messages
`<exit>` |  | exit this menu
`<first-entry>` | <Home> | move to the first entry
`<first-entry>` | = | move to the first entry
`<half-down>` | ] | scroll down 1/2 page
`<half-up>` | [ | scroll up 1/2 page
`<help>` | ? | this screen
`<jump>` |  | jump to an index number
`<last-entry>` | <End> | move to the last entry
`<last-entry>` | * | move to the last entry
`<middle-page>` | M | move to the middle of the page
`<next-entry>` | <Down> | move to the next entry
`<next-entry>` | j | move to the next entry
`<next-line>` | > | scroll down one line
`<next-page>` | <Pagedown> | move to the next page
`<next-page>` | <Right> | move to the next page
`<next-page>` | z | move to the next page
`<previous-entry>` | <Up> | move to the previous entry
`<previous-entry>` | k | move to the previous entry
`<previous-line>` | < | scroll up one line
`<previous-page>` | <Left> | move to the previous page
`<previous-page>` | <Pageup> | move to the previous page
`<previous-page>` | Z | move to the previous page
`<redraw-screen>` | ^L | clear and redraw the screen
`<refresh>` | ^L | clear and redraw the screen
`<search>` | / | search for a regular expression
`<search-next>` | n | search for next match
`<search-opposite>` |  | search for next match in opposite direction
`<search-reverse>` | Esc / | search backwards for a regular expression
`<select-entry>` | <Enter> | select the current entry
`<select-entry>` | <Keypadenter> | select the current entry
`<select-entry>` | <Return> | select the current entry
`<shell-escape>` | ! | invoke a command in a subshell
`<show-log-messages>` |  | show log (and debug) messages
`<show-version>` | V | show the NeoMutt version number and date
`<tag-entry>` | t | tag the current entry
`<tag-prefix>` | ; | apply next function to tagged messages
`<tag-prefix-cond>` |  | apply next function ONLY to tagged messages
`<top-page>` | H | move to the top of the page
`<what-key>` |  | display the keycode for a key press

### 4.2. Index Menu

Table 9.3. Default Index Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<alias-dialog>` |  | open the aliases dialog
`<bounce-message>` | b | remail a message to another user
`<break-thread>` | # | break the thread in two
`<buffy-list>` | . | list mailboxes with new mail
`<catchup>` |  | mark all articles in newsgroup as read
`<change-folder>` | c | open a different folder
`<change-folder-readonly>` | Esc c | open a different folder in read only mode
`<change-newsgroup>` | i | open a different newsgroup
`<change-newsgroup-readonly>` | Esc i | open a different newsgroup in read only mode
`<check-traditional-pgp>` | Esc P | check for classic PGP
`<clear-flag>` | W | clear a status flag from a message
`<collapse-all>` | Esc V | collapse/uncollapse all threads
`<collapse-thread>` | Esc v | collapse/uncollapse current thread
`<compose-to-sender>` |  | compose new message to the current message sender
`<copy-message>` | C | copy a message to a file/mailbox
`<create-alias>` | a | create an alias from a message sender
`<decode-copy>` | Esc C | make decoded (text/plain) copy
`<decode-save>` | Esc s | make decoded copy (text/plain) and delete
`<decrypt-copy>` |  | make decrypted copy
`<decrypt-save>` |  | make decrypted copy and delete
`<delete-message>` | d | delete the current entry
`<delete-pattern>` | D | delete non-hidden messages matching a pattern
`<delete-subthread>` | Esc d | delete all messages in subthread
`<delete-thread>` | ^D | delete all messages in thread
`<display-address>` | @ | display full address of sender
`<display-message>` | <Enter> | display a message
`<display-message>` | <Keypadenter> | display a message
`<display-message>` | <Return> | display a message
`<display-message>` | <Space> | display a message
`<display-toggle-weed>` | h | display message and toggle header weeding
`<edit>` |  | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms)
`<edit-label>` | Y | add, change, or delete a message's label
`<edit-or-view-raw-message>` | e | edit the raw message if the mailbox is not read-only, otherwise view it
`<edit-raw-message>` |  | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms)
`<edit-type>` | ^E | edit attachment content type
`<exit>` | x | exit this menu
`<extract-keys>` | ^K | extract supported public keys
`<fetch-mail>` | G | retrieve mail from POP server
`<flag-message>` | F | toggle a message's 'important' flag
`<followup-message>` |  | followup to newsgroup
`<forget-passphrase>` | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory
`<forward-message>` | f | forward a message with comments
`<forward-to-group>` |  | forward to newsgroup
`<get-children>` |  | get all children of the current message
`<get-message>` |  | get message with Message-Id
`<get-parent>` |  | get parent of the current message
`<group-chat-reply>` |  | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc
`<group-reply>` | g | reply to all recipients
`<imap-fetch-mail>` |  | force retrieval of mail from IMAP server
`<imap-logout-all>` |  | logout from all IMAP servers
`<limit>` | l | show only messages matching a pattern
`<limit-current-thread>` |  | limit view to current thread
`<link-threads>` | & | link tagged message to the current one
`<list-reply>` | L | reply to specified mailing list
`<list-subscribe>` |  | subscribe to a mailing list
`<list-unsubscribe>` |  | unsubscribe from a mailing list
`<mail>` | m | compose a new mail message
`<mail-key>` | Esc k | mail a PGP public key
`<mailbox-list>` | . | list mailboxes with new mail
`<mark-message>` | ~ | create a hotkey macro for the current message
`<modify-labels>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags
`<modify-labels-then-hide>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message
`<modify-tags>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags
`<modify-tags-then-hide>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message
`<next-entry>` | J | move to the next entry
`<next-new>` |  | jump to the next new message
`<next-new-then-unread>` | <Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message
`<next-subthread>` | Esc n | jump to the next subthread
`<next-thread>` | ^N | jump to the next thread
`<next-undeleted>` | <Down> | move to the next undeleted message
`<next-undeleted>` | j | move to the next undeleted message
`<next-unread>` |  | jump to the next unread message
`<next-unread-mailbox>` |  | open next mailbox with new mail
`<parent-message>` | P | jump to parent message in thread
`<pipe-entry>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<pipe-message>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<post-message>` |  | post message to newsgroup
`<previous-entry>` | K | move to the previous entry
`<previous-new>` |  | jump to the previous new message
`<previous-new-then-unread>` | Esc <Tab> | jump to the previous new or unread message
`<previous-subthread>` | Esc p | jump to previous subthread
`<previous-thread>` | ^P | jump to previous thread
`<previous-undeleted>` | <Up> | move to the previous undeleted message
`<previous-undeleted>` | k | move to the previous undeleted message
`<previous-unread>` |  | jump to the previous unread message
`<print-message>` | p | print the current entry
`<purge-message>` |  | delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder
`<purge-thread>` |  | delete the current thread, bypassing the trash folder
`<quasi-delete>` |  | delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk
`<query>` | Q | query external program for addresses
`<quit>` | q | save changes to mailbox and quit
`<read-subthread>` | Esc r | mark the current subthread as read
`<read-thread>` | ^R | mark the current thread as read
`<recall-message>` | R | recall a postponed message
`<reconstruct-thread>` |  | reconstruct thread containing current message
`<reply>` | r | reply to a message
`<resend-message>` | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one
`<root-message>` |  | jump to root message in thread
`<save-message>` | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file
`<set-flag>` | w | set a status flag on a message
`<show-limit>` | Esc l | show currently active limit pattern
`<show-log-messages>` | M | show log (and debug) messages
`<sidebar-first>` |  | move the highlight to the first mailbox
`<sidebar-last>` |  | move the highlight to the last mailbox
`<sidebar-next>` |  | move the highlight to next mailbox
`<sidebar-next-new>` |  | move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail
`<sidebar-open>` |  | open highlighted mailbox
`<sidebar-page-down>` |  | scroll the sidebar down 1 page
`<sidebar-page-up>` |  | scroll the sidebar up 1 page
`<sidebar-prev>` |  | move the highlight to previous mailbox
`<sidebar-prev-new>` |  | move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail
`<sidebar-toggle-virtual>` |  | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes
`<sidebar-toggle-visible>` |  | make the sidebar (in)visible
`<sort-mailbox>` | o | sort messages
`<sort-reverse>` | O | sort messages in reverse order
`<sync-mailbox>` | $ | save changes to mailbox
`<tag-pattern>` | T | tag non-hidden messages matching a pattern
`<tag-subthread>` |  | tag the current subthread
`<tag-thread>` | Esc t | tag the current thread
`<toggle-new>` | N | toggle a message's 'new' flag
`<toggle-read>` |  | toggle view of read messages
`<toggle-write>` | % | toggle whether the mailbox will be rewritten
`<undelete-message>` | u | undelete the current entry
`<undelete-pattern>` | U | undelete non-hidden messages matching a pattern
`<undelete-subthread>` | Esc u | undelete all messages in subthread
`<undelete-thread>` | ^U | undelete all messages in thread
`<untag-pattern>` | ^T | untag non-hidden messages matching a pattern
`<view-attachments>` | v | show MIME attachments
`<view-raw-message>` |  | show the raw message

### 4.3. Pager Menu

Table 9.4. Default Pager Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<bottom>` | <End> | jump to the bottom of the message
`<bounce-message>` | b | remail a message to another user
`<break-thread>` | # | break the thread in two
`<buffy-list>` | . | list mailboxes with new mail
`<change-folder>` | c | open a different folder
`<change-folder-readonly>` | Esc c | open a different folder in read only mode
`<change-newsgroup>` |  | open a different newsgroup
`<change-newsgroup-readonly>` |  | open a different newsgroup in read only mode
`<check-stats>` |  | calculate message statistics for all mailboxes
`<check-traditional-pgp>` | Esc P | check for classic PGP
`<clear-flag>` | W | clear a status flag from a message
`<compose-to-sender>` |  | compose new message to the current message sender
`<copy-message>` | C | copy a message to a file/mailbox
`<create-alias>` | a | create an alias from a message sender
`<decode-copy>` | Esc C | make decoded (text/plain) copy
`<decode-save>` | Esc s | make decoded copy (text/plain) and delete
`<decrypt-copy>` |  | make decrypted copy
`<decrypt-save>` |  | make decrypted copy and delete
`<delete-message>` | d | delete the current entry
`<delete-subthread>` | Esc d | delete all messages in subthread
`<delete-thread>` | ^D | delete all messages in thread
`<display-address>` | @ | display full address of sender
`<display-toggle-weed>` | h | display message and toggle header weeding
`<edit>` |  | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms)
`<edit-label>` | Y | add, change, or delete a message's label
`<edit-or-view-raw-message>` | e | edit the raw message if the mailbox is not read-only, otherwise view it
`<edit-raw-message>` |  | edit the raw message (edit and edit-raw-message are synonyms)
`<edit-type>` | ^E | edit attachment content type
`<enter-command>` | : | enter a neomuttrc command
`<error-history>` |  | show log (and debug) messages
`<exit>` | i | exit this menu
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<exit>` | x | exit this menu
`<extract-keys>` | ^K | extract supported public keys
`<flag-message>` | F | toggle a message's 'important' flag
`<followup-message>` |  | followup to newsgroup
`<forget-passphrase>` | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory
`<forward-message>` | f | forward a message with comments
`<forward-to-group>` |  | forward to newsgroup
`<group-chat-reply>` |  | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc
`<group-reply>` | g | reply to all recipients
`<half-down>` |  | scroll down 1/2 page
`<half-up>` |  | scroll up 1/2 page
`<help>` | ? | this screen
`<imap-fetch-mail>` |  | force retrieval of mail from IMAP server
`<imap-logout-all>` |  | logout from all IMAP servers
`<jump>` |  | jump to an index number
`<link-threads>` | & | link tagged message to the current one
`<list-reply>` | L | reply to specified mailing list
`<list-subscribe>` |  | subscribe to a mailing list
`<list-unsubscribe>` |  | unsubscribe from a mailing list
`<mail>` | m | compose a new mail message
`<mail-key>` | Esc k | mail a PGP public key
`<mailbox-list>` | . | list mailboxes with new mail
`<mark-as-new>` | N | toggle a message's 'new' flag
`<modify-labels>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags
`<modify-labels-then-hide>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message
`<modify-tags>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags
`<modify-tags-then-hide>` |  | modify (notmuch/imap) tags and then hide message
`<next-entry>` | J | move to the next entry
`<next-line>` | <Enter> | scroll down one line
`<next-line>` | <Keypadenter> | scroll down one line
`<next-line>` | <Return> | scroll down one line
`<next-new>` |  | jump to the next new message
`<next-new-then-unread>` | <Tab> | jump to the next new or unread message
`<next-page>` | <Pagedown> | move to the next page
`<next-page>` | <Space> | move to the next page
`<next-subthread>` | Esc n | jump to the next subthread
`<next-thread>` | ^N | jump to the next thread
`<next-undeleted>` | <Down> | move to the next undeleted message
`<next-undeleted>` | <Right> | move to the next undeleted message
`<next-undeleted>` | j | move to the next undeleted message
`<next-unread>` |  | jump to the next unread message
`<next-unread-mailbox>` |  | open next mailbox with new mail
`<parent-message>` | P | jump to parent message in thread
`<pipe-entry>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<pipe-message>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<post-message>` |  | post message to newsgroup
`<previous-entry>` | K | move to the previous entry
`<previous-line>` | <Backspace> | scroll up one line
`<previous-new>` |  | jump to the previous new message
`<previous-new-then-unread>` |  | jump to the previous new or unread message
`<previous-page>` | <Pageup> | move to the previous page
`<previous-page>` | - | move to the previous page
`<previous-subthread>` | Esc p | jump to previous subthread
`<previous-thread>` | ^P | jump to previous thread
`<previous-undeleted>` | <Left> | move to the previous undeleted message
`<previous-undeleted>` | <Up> | move to the previous undeleted message
`<previous-undeleted>` | k | move to the previous undeleted message
`<previous-unread>` |  | jump to the previous unread message
`<print-entry>` |  | print the current entry
`<print-message>` | p | print the current entry
`<purge-message>` |  | delete the current entry, bypassing the trash folder
`<purge-thread>` |  | delete the current thread, bypassing the trash folder
`<quasi-delete>` |  | delete from NeoMutt, don't touch on disk
`<quit>` | Q | save changes to mailbox and quit
`<read-subthread>` | Esc r | mark the current subthread as read
`<read-thread>` | ^R | mark the current thread as read
`<recall-message>` | R | recall a postponed message
`<reconstruct-thread>` |  | reconstruct thread containing current message
`<redraw-screen>` | ^L | clear and redraw the screen
`<reply>` | r | reply to a message
`<resend-message>` | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one
`<root-message>` |  | jump to root message in thread
`<save-entry>` |  | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file
`<save-message>` | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file
`<search>` | / | search for a regular expression
`<search-next>` | n | search for next match
`<search-opposite>` |  | search for next match in opposite direction
`<search-reverse>` | Esc / | search backwards for a regular expression
`<search-toggle>` | \\ | toggle search pattern coloring
`<set-flag>` | w | set a status flag on a message
`<shell-escape>` | ! | invoke a command in a subshell
`<show-log-messages>` |  | show log (and debug) messages
`<show-version>` | V | show the NeoMutt version number and date
`<sidebar-first>` |  | move the highlight to the first mailbox
`<sidebar-last>` |  | move the highlight to the last mailbox
`<sidebar-next>` |  | move the highlight to next mailbox
`<sidebar-next-new>` |  | move the highlight to next mailbox with new mail
`<sidebar-open>` |  | open highlighted mailbox
`<sidebar-page-down>` |  | scroll the sidebar down 1 page
`<sidebar-page-up>` |  | scroll the sidebar up 1 page
`<sidebar-prev>` |  | move the highlight to previous mailbox
`<sidebar-prev-new>` |  | move the highlight to previous mailbox with new mail
`<sidebar-toggle-virtual>` |  | toggle between mailboxes and virtual mailboxes
`<sidebar-toggle-visible>` |  | make the sidebar (in)visible
`<skip-headers>` | H | jump to first line after headers
`<skip-quoted>` | S | skip beyond quoted text
`<sort-mailbox>` | o | sort messages
`<sort-reverse>` | O | sort messages in reverse order
`<sync-mailbox>` | $ | save changes to mailbox
`<tag-message>` | t | tag the current entry
`<toggle-quoted>` | T | toggle display of quoted text
`<toggle-write>` | % | toggle whether the mailbox will be rewritten
`<top>` | <Home> | jump to the top of the message
`<top>` | ^ | jump to the top of the message
`<undelete-message>` | u | undelete the current entry
`<undelete-subthread>` | Esc u | undelete all messages in subthread
`<undelete-thread>` | ^U | undelete all messages in thread
`<view-attachments>` | v | show MIME attachments
`<view-raw-message>` |  | show the raw message
`<what-key>` |  | display the keycode for a key press

### 4.4. Alias Menu

Table 9.5. Default Alias Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<delete-entry>` | d | delete the current entry
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<limit>` | l | show only messages matching a pattern
`<mail>` | m | compose a new mail message
`<sort-alias>` | o | sort messages
`<sort-alias-reverse>` | O | sort messages in reverse order
`<tag-entry>` | <Space> | tag the current entry
`<undelete-entry>` | u | undelete the current entry

### 4.5. Query Menu

Table 9.6. Default Query Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<create-alias>` | a | create an alias from a message sender
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<limit>` | l | show only messages matching a pattern
`<mail>` | m | compose a new mail message
`<query>` | Q | query external program for addresses
`<query-append>` | A | append new query results to current results
`<sort>` | o | sort messages
`<sort-reverse>` | O | sort messages in reverse order

### 4.6. Attachment Menu

Table 9.7. Default Attachment Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<bounce-message>` | b | remail a message to another user
`<check-traditional-pgp>` | Esc P | check for classic PGP
`<collapse-parts>` | v | toggle display of subparts
`<compose-to-sender>` |  | compose new message to the current message sender
`<delete-entry>` | d | delete the current entry
`<display-toggle-weed>` | h | display message and toggle header weeding
`<edit-type>` | ^E | edit attachment content type
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<extract-keys>` | ^K | extract supported public keys
`<followup-message>` |  | followup to newsgroup
`<forget-passphrase>` | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory
`<forward-message>` | f | forward a message with comments
`<forward-to-group>` |  | forward to newsgroup
`<group-chat-reply>` |  | reply to all recipients preserving To/Cc
`<group-reply>` | g | reply to all recipients
`<list-reply>` | L | reply to specified mailing list
`<list-subscribe>` |  | subscribe to a mailing list
`<list-unsubscribe>` |  | unsubscribe from a mailing list
`<pipe-entry>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<pipe-message>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<print-entry>` | p | print the current entry
`<reply>` | r | reply to a message
`<resend-message>` | Esc e | use the current message as a template for a new one
`<save-entry>` | s | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file
`<undelete-entry>` | u | undelete the current entry
`<view-attach>` | <Enter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
`<view-attach>` | <Keypadenter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
`<view-attach>` | <Return> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
`<view-mailcap>` | m | force viewing of attachment using mailcap
`<view-pager>` |  | view attachment in pager using copiousoutput mailcap
`<view-text>` | T | view attachment as text

### 4.7. Compose Menu

Table 9.8. Default Compose Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<attach-file>` | a | attach files to this message
`<attach-key>` | Esc k | attach a PGP public key
`<attach-message>` | A | attach messages to this message
`<attach-news-message>` |  | attach news articles to this message
`<copy-file>` | C | save message/attachment to a mailbox/file
`<detach-file>` | D | delete the current entry
`<display-toggle-weed>` | h | display message and toggle header weeding
`<edit-bcc>` | b | edit the BCC list
`<edit-cc>` | c | edit the CC list
`<edit-content-id>` | Esc i | edit the 'Content-ID' of the attachment
`<edit-description>` | d | edit attachment description
`<edit-encoding>` | ^E | edit attachment transfer-encoding
`<edit-fcc>` | f | enter a file to save a copy of this message in
`<edit-file>` | Esc e | edit the file to be attached
`<edit-followup-to>` |  | edit the Followup-To field
`<edit-from>` | Esc f | edit the from field
`<edit-headers>` | E | edit the message with headers
`<edit-language>` | ^L | edit the 'Content-Language' of the attachment
`<edit-message>` | e | edit the message
`<edit-mime>` | m | edit attachment using mailcap entry
`<edit-newsgroups>` |  | edit the newsgroups list
`<edit-reply-to>` | r | edit the Reply-To field
`<edit-subject>` | s | edit the subject of this message
`<edit-to>` | t | edit the TO list
`<edit-type>` | ^T | edit attachment content type
`<edit-x-comment-to>` |  | edit the X-Comment-To field
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<filter-entry>` | F | filter attachment through a shell command
`<forget-passphrase>` | ^F | wipe passphrases from memory
`<get-attachment>` | G | get a temporary copy of an attachment
`<group-alternatives>` | & | group tagged attachments as 'multipart/alternative'
`<group-multilingual>` | ^ | group tagged attachments as 'multipart/multilingual'
`<group-related>` | % | group tagged attachments as 'multipart/related'
`<ispell>` | i | run ispell on the message
`<move-down>` | + | move an attachment down in the attachment list
`<move-up>` | - | move an attachment up in the attachment list
`<new-mime>` | n | compose new attachment using mailcap entry
`<pgp-menu>` | p | show PGP options
`<pipe-entry>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<pipe-message>` | | | pipe message/attachment to a shell command
`<postpone-message>` | P | save this message to send later
`<print-entry>` | l | print the current entry
`<rename-attachment>` | ^O | send attachment with a different name
`<rename-file>` | R | rename/move an attached file
`<send-message>` | y | send the message
`<smime-menu>` | S | show S/MIME options
`<tag-entry>` | T | tag the current entry
`<toggle-disposition>` | ^D | toggle disposition between inline/attachment
`<toggle-recode>` |  | toggle recoding of this attachment
`<toggle-unlink>` | u | toggle whether to delete file after sending it
`<ungroup-attachment>` | # | ungroup 'multipart' attachment
`<update-encoding>` | U | update an attachment's encoding info
`<view-attach>` | <Enter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
`<view-attach>` | <Keypadenter> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
`<view-attach>` | <Return> | view attachment using mailcap entry if necessary
`<view-mailcap>` |  | force viewing of attachment using mailcap
`<view-pager>` |  | view attachment in pager using copiousoutput mailcap
`<view-text>` |  | view attachment as text
`<write-fcc>` | w | write the message to a folder

### 4.8. Postpone Menu

Table 9.9. Default Postpone Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<delete-entry>` | d | delete the current entry
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<undelete-entry>` | u | undelete the current entry

### 4.9. Browser Menu

Table 9.10. Default Browser Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<buffy-list>` | . | list mailboxes with new mail
`<catchup>` |  | mark all articles in newsgroup as read
`<change-dir>` | c | change directories
`<check-new>` |  | check mailboxes for new mail
`<create-mailbox>` | C | create a new mailbox (IMAP only)
`<delete-mailbox>` | d | delete the current mailbox (IMAP only)
`<descend-directory>` |  | descend into a directory
`<display-filename>` | @ | display the currently selected file's name
`<enter-mask>` | m | enter a file mask
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<goto-folder>` | = | swap the current folder position with $folder if it exists
`<goto-parent>` | p | go to parent directory
`<mailbox-list>` | . | list mailboxes with new mail
`<reload-active>` |  | load list of all newsgroups from NNTP server
`<rename-mailbox>` | r | rename the current mailbox (IMAP only)
`<select-new>` | N | select a new file in this directory
`<sort>` | o | sort messages
`<sort-reverse>` | O | sort messages in reverse order
`<subscribe>` | s | subscribe to current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only)
`<subscribe-pattern>` |  | subscribe to newsgroups matching a pattern
`<toggle-mailboxes>` | <Tab> | toggle whether to browse mailboxes or all files
`<toggle-subscribed>` | T | toggle view all/subscribed mailboxes (IMAP only)
`<uncatchup>` |  | mark all articles in newsgroup as unread
`<unsubscribe>` | u | unsubscribe from current mbox (IMAP/NNTP only)
`<unsubscribe-pattern>` |  | unsubscribe from newsgroups matching a pattern
`<view-file>` | <Space> | view file

### 4.10. Pgp Menu

Table 9.11. Default Pgp Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<verify-key>` | c | verify a PGP public key
`<view-name>` | % | view the key's user id

### 4.11. Smime Menu

Table 9.12. Default Smime Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<exit>` | q | exit this menu
`<verify-key>` | c | verify a PGP public key
`<view-name>` | % | view the key's user id

### 4.12. Editor Menu

Table 9.13. Default Editor Menu Bindings

Function | Default key | Description
--- | --- | ---
`<backspace>` | <Backspace> | delete the char in front of the cursor
`<backspace>` | <Delete> | delete the char in front of the cursor
`<backward-char>` | <Left> | move the cursor one character to the left
`<backward-char>` | ^B | move the cursor one character to the left
`<backward-word>` | Esc b | move the cursor to the beginning of the word
`<bol>` | <Home> | jump to the beginning of the line
`<bol>` | ^A | jump to the beginning of the line
`<buffy-cycle>` | <Space> | cycle among incoming mailboxes
`<capitalize-word>` | Esc c | capitalize the word
`<complete>` | <Tab> | complete filename or alias
`<complete-query>` | ^T | complete address with query
`<delete-char>` | <Delete> | delete the char under the cursor
`<delete-char>` | ^D | delete the char under the cursor
`<downcase-word>` | Esc l | convert the word to lower case
`<eol>` | <End> | jump to the end of the line
`<eol>` | ^E | jump to the end of the line
`<forward-char>` | <Right> | move the cursor one character to the right
`<forward-char>` | ^F | move the cursor one character to the right
`<forward-word>` | Esc f | move the cursor to the end of the word
`<help>` | Esc ? | this screen
`<history-down>` | <Down> | scroll down through the history list
`<history-down>` | ^N | scroll down through the history list
`<history-search>` | ^R | search through the history list
`<history-up>` | <Up> | scroll up through the history list
`<history-up>` | ^P | scroll up through the history list
`<kill-eol>` | ^K | delete chars from cursor to end of line
`<kill-eow>` | Esc d | delete chars from the cursor to the end of the word
`<kill-line>` | ^U | delete chars from cursor to beginning the line
`<kill-whole-line>` |  | delete all chars on the line
`<kill-word>` | ^W | delete the word in front of the cursor
`<mailbox-cycle>` | <Space> | cycle among incoming mailboxes
`<quote-char>` | ^V | quote the next typed key
`<redraw-screen>` | ^L | clear and redraw the screen
`<transpose-chars>` |  | transpose character under cursor with previous
`<upcase-word>` | Esc u | convert the word to upper case

# Chapter 10. Miscellany

## 1. Acknowledgements

The following people have been very helpful to the development of Mutt:

Kari Hurtta, Vikas Agnihotri, Francois Berjon, Aric Blumer, John Capo, David Champion, Brendan Cully, Liviu Daia, Thomas E. Dickey, David DeSimone, Nickolay N. Dudorov, Ruslan Ermilov, Edmund Grimley Evans, Michael Finken, Sven Guckes, Lars Hecking, Mark Holloman, Andreas Holzmann, Marco d'Itri, Björn Jacke, Byrial Jensen, David Jeske, Christophe Kalt, Tommi Komulainen, Felix von Leitner (a.k.a “Fefe”), Brandon Long, Jimmy Mäkelä, Lars Marowsky-Bree, Kevin J. McCarthy, Thomas “Mike” Michlmayr, Andrew W. Nosenko, David O'Brien, Clint Olsen, Park Myeong Seok, Thomas Parmelan, Ollivier Robert, Thomas Roessler, Roland Rosenfeld, Rocco Rutte, TAKIZAWA Takashi, Allain Thivillon, Gero Treuner, Vsevolod Volkov, Ken Weinert

## 2. About This Document

This document was written in DocBook, and then rendered using the Gnome XSLT toolkit.